Home

$" " $" ءAfyi Apwiء 6€xپ&dagger;…p&fnof; - Southern Graphics & Systems

1. Scan See Viewport 10 oy To enter negative values press the minus key and then type the number you want to use The lt LEFT gt arrow key can also be used to decrement the value assigned to the parameter Each time the lt LEFT gt arrow is pressed the number is decremented by one For example to enter a value of 5 start from zero and press the left arrow key five times 314 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport Follow Cursor When the Follow Cursor parameter is disabled set to N the cursor is always assumed to be located at the origin Using the previous example e the area displayed will be 4 9 2 0 to 4 9 9 2 0 1 or after clipping values that are negative or higher than 80 0 2 to 4 3 Wraparound When Wraparound is enabled set to Y the Scan See display is treated as a one line by 20 column display rather than 2 lines by 10 columns Panning If Panning is disabled set to N the Scan See viewport does not move when the cursor moves one position to the right and the pivot is still inside the Scan See display However the Scan See display is updated to reflect the changes within that viewport If the pivot goes outside the viewport or if the 7535 7530 display cha
2. File View Jg h 9 PC Power Regional Connection Settings Remove SNMP Storage Programs it 1234 Teklogix Scanners Stylus System ly 3 Total Recall Volume amp Sounds amp TA Figure 5 72 Teklogix Scanner Icon 5 10 1 Bar Codes ponderada Te Non decoded 1 Decoded internal Code IDecoded Intermec ISCP amp Code Imager EH EAN 1 Decoded external ES Codabar disabled Code 93 disabled Code 11 disabled To change a setting press space right arrow or double click Figure 5 73 Scanner Properties 150 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Bar Codes The Scanner The dropdown menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one of the following scanner types used with your hand held Non decoded Decoded internal Decoded Intermec ISCP Imager and Decoded external The symbologies listed in the Barcodes tab change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it supports Important To improve the decode speed and performance enable set to on only those codes that are required by the application Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes External non decoded scanners are also configured through the Scanner Properties dialog box However e
3. 6 6 5 Data Entry The 7535 7530 accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to the host computer The following actions cause the 7535 7530 to transmit e Pressing a function key or the ENTER key which is considered to be lt F0 gt causes the hand held to transmit Completing data entry into a transmit on entry field also causes the hand held to transmit There are several ways to configure the 7535 7530 to complete a data field Pressing lt ENTER gt after entering data Pressing a function key after entering data e Pressing an arrow key after entering data Filling an auto tab field Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 229 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 6 6 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described in the table below Field mode Press lt CTRL gt f to enter field mode In this mode once data entry into a field has been completed the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field In field mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys do not perform any functions Pressing the lt UP gt or DOWN arrow key completes the entry field and then moves the cursor to the previous or next field Fcursor mode Press lt CTRL gt u to enter fcursor mode In this mode once data entry into a field has b
4. This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer In this menu the Y or N is used to visually guide you to the selected character set For example in the sample menu above the Y next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group To choose a character set Position the cursor on the appropriate item for example ISO and press lt F1 gt to display the character set options To activate a character set press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to set it to Y AN Important Ifyou choose a Chinese character set from the Misc menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the 7535 7530 screen a shaded box character is used as a substitute Please review Default font on page 299 If you are using a Korean character set a right arrow character is used as a substitute V Match Chr This parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies visible field match data from the host Field matching allows the host to pre load data into an entry field that is compared with the user s input The hand held beeps if the entered data does not match Visible field matching means that the data to be matched is displayed in the entry field Enter the decimal value for the ASCH character that will be used by the host to identify visible match field data Enter 0 zero to disable
5. e Press lt CTRL gt lt W gt to make this message appear only when the 7535 7530 locks The message should look similar to the sample below V6 0 fld 0 6 V6 0 is the TESS version number fld indicates that TESS is currently in field mode Insert and replace mode are represented as ins and rep respectively The number 0 6 indicates the response time of the last transmission in seconds Press lt CTRL gt lt T gt to display the unit number instead of the TESS version number Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 233 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Lock Messages 6 6 1 Lock Messages When information is transmitted to the host computer the keyboard locks to prevent further data entry until the 7535 7530 receives a reply A locked state is indicated by either LOCK B base or LOCK H host in the lower left corner of the display When the reply is received by the 7535 7530 the lock message disappears and the keyboard can be used again 6 6 8 Control Commands A group of lt CTRL gt key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the 7535 7530 will operate under a variety of conditions e CTRL P Reprints the last print page sent from the host This key combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not previously received at the hand held e lt CTRL gt lt S gt Displays the hand held status continuously Below is a samp
6. 5 12 2 Establishing A Connection lll 5 12 3 Disconnecting From A Network 5 12 4 Advanced Information 0 00 0 000 5 12 Tools Men 2 ace dock oe des Ay ek el a He eds Rd bo des ed d iv Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 6 1 TheTekterm Application llle 6 2 Additional Keyboard Functions o oo 6 2 1 Function Keys And Softkeys 6 2 2 Macro Keys 0 002 eee eee eee 63 Changing The Screen Font Size 2204 6 4 Panning The Screen Contents 2 20004 6 4 1 Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications 6 5 The Tekterm Status Area llle 6 6 TESSEmulation 0 a a i ene 6 6 1 Configuration 0 2 020004 2 ee eee 6 6 2 Working With Multiple Sessions 663 TheFieldTypes 0 00002 eee eee 6 6 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 6 6 5 DataEntry a a e a aa 6 6 6 TESS Status Message o o o 20200004 6 6 7 Lock Messages 2 0 eee ee 6 6 8 Control Commands e 6 6 9 Resetting A TESS Session 04 6 6 10 The Local Menu o e e 6 6 11 Selecting Another Host Computer 6 6 12 Queuing Mode llle 67 ANSIEmulatio a e 6 7 1 Configuration eA 6 7 2 Sending Data To The Host
7. Docking Device When a hand held is inserted in a docking station charger or cradle an associated icon appears in the taskbar mm Y to Gang Charger Combo Charger amp Quad Docking Station Power Cradle Portable Docking Combo Docking Station Module PDM Bluetooth Radio If a Bluetooth radio is installed in your unit this icon is displayed in the taskbar Security Level Security levels can be set to limit user access In addition applications can be restricted to prevent inadvertent changes 52 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 6 ill Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Audio Indicators Wireless WAN These icons provide access to and information about the 7535 7530 GSM GPRS wide area networking status Refer to Wireless WAN on page 202 for details about each of these taskbar icons G E A Bases il ill ull alll ill 3 1 3 Audio Indicators The beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed a keyboard character is rejected scan input is accepted or rejected an operator s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low The volume function keys are located in the top row ofthe keyboard The increase volume key is labelled with a plus symbol Y and the decrease volume function key is labelled with a minus symbol 3 7 3 1 Adjusting The Beeper Volume On 58 key and 63 key keyboards the volume f
8. gt lis 10 Figure 6 Task Manager Screen IM Note To bypass the Start Menu and go directly to the Task Manager screen Mt press ALT lt ESC gt To switch between applications e Highlight the application you want to work with and press ENTER To end or close an application e Highlight the application you want to end and tap on the End Task button If you re using the keyboard e Press TAB to highlight the End Task button and press ENTER 226 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Tekterm Status Area 6 5 The Tekterm Status Area Tekterm provides a status area just above the softkey labels The status area indi cates the operating condition of the hand held 84 Keyboard Macro Ctrl Panels Indicators Y Sof tkeys Ctrl Panel Figure 6 2 Status Area The security level assigned within the Tekterm application is displayed in the status area One of the following is displayed Supervisor or Teklogix 6 6 TESS Emulation TESS Teklogix Screen Subsystem is the normal operating mode of Psion Teklogix computers Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or a Psion Teklogix Software Development Kit SDK and installed in the host converts host screens to TESS commands The 9150 Access Point is also equipped with protocol emulation software A IM Note If the message RESET Press Enter flashes at the bottom
9. 2222s A 1 Product Repairs lee A 1 Worldwide Offices i a a E AE a ee A 2 Appendix B RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only B 1 B 2 T stallati nx 2 da aera ee Pm a OR ae ec eke SS B 1 Enabling The RD7950 22A B 5 viii Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Contents Appendix C Port Pinouts C 1 CA C3 C 4 C 5 Tether Port Pinout 222A C 1 Docking Station Connector ea e C 1 Battery Contacts 2 2 C 2 7535 USB Cable PN 10100909 o o o o o o ooo C 2 7535 USB Cable PN 1010057 o o o o oo C 3 Appendix D USB Setup Application D 1 USB Setpa 2 ats ee ende E OUR d oe dodi e Ies D 1 D 1 1 Launching The Application o D 1 D 1 2 Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf D 2 D 1 3 Installation Installing The 7535 7530 As a Device On The PC D 4 D 1 4 PostInstallation leen D 5 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual ix PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENTS Microsoft s End User License Agreement You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by Psion Teklogix Inc from Microsoft Licensing Inc or its affiliates MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property
10. TEKTERM APPLICATION 6 1 The Tekterm Application llle 221 6 2 Additional Keyboard Functions 2l 221 6 2 1 Function Keys And Softkeys 00 4 221 6 2 1 1 7535 Function Keys llle 221 6 2 1 2 7530 Function Keys 2l 2 eae 222 6 2 1 3 Softkey Function Keys 0 223 60 2 2 Macro Keys a 0 oap er pig Res ee RC RD Bgl AS 224 6 3 Changing The Screen Font Size aa 225 6 4 Panning The Screen Contents 2l lle 225 6 4 1 Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications 226 6 5 The Tekterm Status Area ee 227 6 6 TESS Emulation lA 227 6 6 1 Configuration 228 6 6 2 Working With Multiple Sessions 228 6 6 3 The Field Types 4 39b a Pa Ae 228 6 6 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 0 0 000002008 229 6 6 5 Data EY ate as a At ec cr xU UOS A A 229 6 6 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 230 6 6 5 2 DEL Key Behaviour In TESS 231 6 6 5 3 lt BKSP gt Key Behaviour In TESS 232 6 6 6 TESS Status Message 00000 ee ee eee 233 6 67 Lock M eSSages ira ang aoa Roe ee ae a I aa se s 234 6 6 8 Control Commands 2 2 ee ee ee 234 6 6 9 Resetting A TESS Session o e e 234 6 6 10 The Local Menu 22s 235 6 6 11 Selecting Another Host Computer 235 6 6 12 Queuing Mode e 236 6 7 ANSI Emulatio
11. 366 8 10 2 PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs 368 8 11 RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only 369 8 12 7535 1900 mAh Lithium Ion Battery Pack 371 8 13 7530 1900 mAh Lithium Ion Battery Pack 371 8 14 7530 2400 mAh Lithium Ion Battery Pack 372 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 345 L Note 8 Size Weight Chapter 8 Specifications 7535 Hand Held Computer Specifications Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice 7535 Hand Held Computer Specifications 4 102mm width x 2 5 62 5mm depth x 9 6 244mm length Keypad area 3 75 5mm width x 1 4 36mm depth With battery 21 7 oz 700g With pistol grip add 4 3 oz 125g Operating System Microsoft Windows CE NET Version 4 2 Processor And Memory 400 MHz XScale PXA255 Processor RAM 64MB SDRAM Future option 128MB Flash ROM 32MB FLASH 7 2N 1800mAh Li ion rechargeable battery Intelligent fast charge 10 hour battery operation 5 scans transmit amp receive min Built in gas gauge amp performance monitor Quick swap battery packs Built in fast charger 1 75 hour typical recharge Self guiding amp latching battery pack design System backup 15 minutes during battery swap 1 week real time clock backup Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 347 Chapter 8 Specifications
12. Range More Parameters See page 251 Security User See page 250 Display See page 251 The Parameters menu allows you to adjust the screen contrast and select a security level With a Supervisory or Teklogix password you can also access the parameters listed in the More Parameters sub menu 6 12 1 Security Settings To access the More Parameters sub menus the Security parameter must be set to either a Supervisor or a Teklogix level password The default security level is User To display the Security Level dialog box e Double tap on the Security parameter or e Press Fl Set Password Configure AN Important Refer to Security Settings on page 74 for details 250 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Display Options 6 13 Display Options The Display sub menu is used to adjust your hand held s display properties e Press lt F1 gt to open the Display sub menu 02 Display Range Backlight Ctrl Panel See text Contrast Ctrl Panel see text Double tapping the Backlight Ctrl Panel parameter presents the Display Properties dialog box where you can adjust the background appearance backlight and contrast of your 7535 7530 display Important Display Properties dialog box options are described in detail beginning on page
13. lll len 160 510 212 MSEPISSSey 5 km ARR e e uu esce 161 5410 2 13 Discrete 2 9f 5 ue oe ee de ero 161 5 10 2 14 IATA20f5 oaa 2n 162 5 10 3 Decoded Internal Scanners lll ln 162 5 10 3 1 Options Decoded Internal Scanner 163 5 10 3 2 Data Options Decoded Internal Scanner 165 10 33 Code 32 a E Oeo RS CHE RU LT S 166 5410 3 4 Code 128 ce oboe pue eden tons 168 510 35 EAN TS curra fe ope eM pu 169 5 10 30 BEAN Sari RODA ERR s AE 169 3 10 37 WRC Ac cr dents uM anderes er VELIS 169 52103328 UPC E 4 en pum ARES tee Hee 170 5 10 3 9 UPC EAN Shared Settings 171 86 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration 5 10 3 10 Codabar 22e 172 5 10 3 11 Code 93 eu sober SOR es nca 173 5 10 3 12 Interleaved20f5 173 5 10 3 13 MSI Plessey 2 0 0 0 0 000002 ee eee 174 5 10 3 14 Discrete 2 0f5 0 0 0 0 0 2 00 00 0 0008 175 5 10 3 15 2D PDEZATT v tein eee baie RGSS ea CORE 176 5 10 3 16 2D Micro PDF 417 00 176 5 10 3 17 2D RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology 177 5 10 3 18 Composite 2 0 2 0 2 00 0002 o 177 5 10 4 Decoded Intermec ISCP o 178 SOAL Code 39 i uou se Ste canon eR dmi 178 5 10 4 2 Codel28 178 DLO WPGC A aue uro eben ve tac ae RR Rea OE 179 10 44 UPC Ema ES San ee o oe ek oa dk Se 179 5 10 4 5 BANS cerddor
14. Configure button To change the settings in an existing network high light the network you want to modify and choose the Configure button to display the Wireless Properties dialog box Connect button To force connection to a specific existing network highlight the network to which you want your 7535 7530 to connect and choose the Connect button Select a network and press Connect or right click for more options To add a new network double click Add New Y Add New Status Connected to Section A Signal Strength Excellent Iz Notify when new networks are available Connect Advanced Log fl 5 Figure 2 8 Wireless Information Tab This tab lists available networks any access points that are broadcasting an SSID and it lists preferred networks networks that you have config ured Since access points are generally secure they will most likely not be listed here By default 7535 7530 attempts to connect to preferred net works This behaviour can be changed by enabling Automatically connect to non preferred networks in the Advanced dialog box page 30 To add a new configuration tap on the Add New button A blank Wire less Properties dialog box is displayed 24 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit 5 Wireless Properties Wireless Properties OK A Network name SSID po
15. 280 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes Key Function In newline mode this key moves the cursor to the first ENTER column of the next line In line feed mode this key moves the cursor to column one of the current line CTRL G Bell The 7535 7530 beeps CTRL H Backspace The cursor moves back one space CTRL I Tab The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop CTRL J Line Feed CTRL L Form Feed CTRL K Vertical Tab The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical tab set This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves the cursor to the left by one position The cursor moves down one line in the same column DEL Table 6 4 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode DEL Key This parameter determines whether the lt DEL gt key acts as a delete key erasing the character to the right of the cursor a backspace key erasing the character to the left of the cursor or a CLEAR key erasing the entire contents of the field BKSP Key This parameter determines whether the lt BKSP gt key acts as a delete key erasing the character to the right of the cursor or a backspace key erasing the character to the left of the cursor or a lt CLEAR gt key erasing the entire contents of the field PrintScreen Key This parameter determines the hot key for printing the screen contents via t
16. 6 10 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values AN Important When F3 the DEFAULT key is pressed all parameter values revert to the factory defaults including those values that you ve changed and saved e Press F3 the DEFAULT function key or tap the stylus on the DEFAULT softkey label to reinstate the default parameter values e Press F4 the SAVE function key or tap the stylus on the SAVE softkey label to save the changes e Reset the 7535 7530 See Resetting The 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer in the next section 6 11 Resetting The 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer Some parameter adjustments require that the 7535 7530 be reset before the changes can take effect To reset the 7535 7530 e Press and hold down the lt BLUE gt key and the lt ENTER ON gt key simulta neously until all LEDs illuminate yellow approximately six seconds Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 249 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Parameters Menu A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit All RAM memory contents are lost The contents of the flash memory and memory card are preserved When the 7535 7530 is reset the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft Windows CE NET splash screen before displaying the startup desktop 6 12 The Parameters Menu e At the Display menu type a to display the Parameters menu 01 Parameters
17. 6 9 x 11 2 x 18 3 cm 2 7 x 44 x 7 2 in Scanner 280 g 9 9 ozs Cable 82 3 cm 32 in 176 g 6 2 ozs Collapsed 81 cm 32 in Max working 183 cm 72 in 4 VDC to 14 VDC Undecoded 75 mA 5 VDC Decoded 100 mA 5 VDC lt 50 pA 5 VDC Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode VLD Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism 35 scans sec nominal Paper Labels decoded 7 5 mil 6 to 10in 15 to 25 cm 10mil 5 to 20in 13 to 51 cm 15 mil 5 to 32in 13 to 81 cm 20 mil 5 to 48in 15 to 122 cm 40 mil 8 to 85in 20 to 216 cm 55 mil 15to 108 in 38 to 274 cm Reflective Labels decoded 40mil 22 to 100in 56 to 254 cm 55mil 30 to 104 in 76 to 366 cm 70mil 40 to 180in 102 to 457 cm 100 mil 45 to 264 in 114 to 671 cm 366 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs Depth of Field Extra Long Range Print Contrast Ratio Pitch Skew Ambient Light Immunity Environmental Temperature Rating Humidity Shock at 23 C Vibration Water and Dust Decoding Capabilities Auto discriminates between Safety Regulatory Electrical Emissions Laser Classification Paper Labels decoded 15mil 28to 60in 71to 152 cm 20mil 28to 72in 71to 182 cm 40mil 28to 144in 71 to 144 cm 55mil 40to 180in 102 to 457 Reflective Labels decoded 40 mil 40to 180in 102 to 457 cm 70 mil 80to 300 in 2032 to 762 cm 100 m
18. AN Important Ifthe word BLUE is displayed in uppercase in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen this key is locked on the 7535 7530 will not switch off Press the BLUE key twice fol lowed by lt ENTER ON gt to switch the 7535 7530 off If however you ve disabled the Blue Key in the One Shot dialog box see Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 100 the 7535 7530 can be turned off even when the lt BLUE gt key is locked on 3 5 The Keyboard The 7535 offers two types of keyboard layouts a 58 key keyboard and a 36 key large button keyboard The 7530 also offers two types of keyboard layouts a 63 key and a 37 key keyboard Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard the differences are noted The lt BLUE gt and lt ORANGE gt modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print above the keyboard keys 3 5 1 Modifier Keys The lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt BLUE gt and lt ORANGE gt keys are modifier keys Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed For example on a 7535 58 key keyboard a square bracket is printed in orange print above the lt 4 gt key Pressing the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the lt 4 gt key displays a square bracket rather than the number 4 40 P
19. Back Next gt Cancel L Note Both drivers are selected for backup by default The backup directory is system directory drivers ptxBackup Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual D 3 Appendix D USB Setup Application Installation Installing The 7535 7530 As a Device On The PC D 1 3 Installation Installing The 7535 7530 As a Device On The PC l Install Dialog Box The sys files you selected are copied to the backup directory If an unknown error occurs during the backup you are asked whether you d prefer to cancel the install or continue with the process The wceusbsh inf and usbstor inf files are updated If you indicated that the wceusbsh driver should be installed the Install dialog box appears again The USB Setup application will attempt to install the drivers immediately This will succeed only if a valid USB connection to the device that is running Windows CE NET exists If the install fails due to an unknown error the install for this particular driver is aborted Ifthe install fails because there was an inappropriate USB connection there are two possibilities Anappropriate USB connection was never established between the PC and the 7535 7530 running Windows CE NET In this case when an appropriate USB connection with this device exists Windows will auto matically attempt to install the device driver Anappropriate USB connection exists between the PC and the 7535 7530 runn
20. Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R amp TTE direktivet 1999 5 EC fra EU Erklering finnes pa www psionteklogix com VIII Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Approvals And Safety Summary Utrustningen uppfyller kraven f r EU direktivet 1999 5 EC om ansluten teleutrust ning och msesidigt erk nnande av utrustningens verensst mmelse R amp TTE F rklaringen finns att l sa p www psionteklogix com T m laite vastaa EU n radio ja telep telaitedirektiivin EU R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC vaatimuksia Julkilausuma n ht vill osoitteessa www psionteklogix com PSION TEKLOGIX t mto prohla uje e toto za zen je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1995 5 ES NV 426 2000 Sb a Prohl en o shod je k dispozici na www PsionTeklogix com Toto za zen lze provozovat v esk republice na z klad gener ln licence GL 12 R 2000 PSION TEKLOGIX t mto vyhlasuje Ze toto zariadenie sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1995 5 ES NV 443 2001 Z z a Vyhl senie o zhode je k dispoz cii na www PsionTeklogix com Toto zariadenie je mo n prev dzkova v Slovenskej republike na z klade V eobecn ho povolenia VPR 01 2001 Use of the 802 11b WORKABOUT PRO C amp S in France Owing to French Government restrictions the 802 11b 7535 7530 Hand Held
21. Output Used to output data only All input characters are ignored Supports no handshaking To enable the input and or output serial in and or serial out must be enabled in the TESS menu Buffer The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by the application for both input and output The buffer controls the amount of data the application can send to or receive from a serial device Retries This parameter determines the number of times the 7535 7530 attempts to transmit a byte from the serial port If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded the transmission fails Input Tmo This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the 7535 7530 waits before passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks Output Tmo The value assigned at this parameter determines the maximum number of milliseconds that the application will wait for a write sent to the port to succeed before it is aborted The write may be one or several bytes in length Shared The Shared parameter allows a port to be shared by multiple sessions within Tek Term If it is not enabled set to Y the first session to access the port has sole use of it Test When this parameter is enabled set to Y data is output through the serial port to make certain that it is operating appropriately Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 311 Chapter 6 Tekterm Applicatio
22. Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 187 Chapter 5 Configuration Decoded External 5 10 6 Decoded External Scanner Settings Barcodes Options Translations Scanner Decoded external y TEC oo To change a setting press space right arrow or double click Figure 5 79 Tether And Console Port Settings While you cannot configure the scanner you can configure communications with a serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab 5 10 6 1 Tether Port Scanner Settings ok x Barcodes Options Translations Scanner Decoded external y Tether Port Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 E Console Port To change a setting press space right arrow or double click 250 Figure 5 80 Tether Port Settings 188 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Tether Port Baud Double tapping on this parameter displays a pop up window in which you can choose an appropriate baud rate Figure 5 81 Tether Port Baud Rates Data Bits This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the tether port Double tapping on this option displa
23. To access function keys lt F7 gt to lt F30 gt e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by the alpha key to which the function key you want to use is mapped For example To access function key F7 press BLUE lt C gt To access function key F8 press BLUE lt D gt and so on 36 Key Keyboard Function Keys The 36 key keyboard is equipped with thirty function keys Function keys lt F1 gt to lt F4 gt are located across the top of the keyboard and function keys F5 to lt F10 gt are located at the bottom of the keyboard Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 221 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 7530 Function Keys Additional function keys lt F11 gt to lt F20 gt are colour coded in orange print above function keys F1 to lt F10 gt To access function keys lt F11 gt to lt F20 gt Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate function key For example To access function key lt F11 gt press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by F1 To access function key lt F12 gt press lt ORANGE gt followed by F2 and so on To access function keys lt F21 gt to lt F30 gt you ll need to press lt SHIFT gt F1 to lt F10 gt To access function keys lt F21 gt to lt F30 gt e Press the lt SHIFT gt key followed by the appropriate function key For example To access function key lt F21 gt press the lt SHIFT gt key followed by F1 To acces
24. Y any value assigned to the Terminal parameter is ignored Note Auto Term is available when 802 1Qv2 is assigned to the Host Conn parameter or when 802 IQv1 is enabled in the Radio Menu see 802 IQ v1 on page 253 Group r Auto Term Range Group 1 1 5 When Auto Term is set to Y the Group parameter is used to identify the group or pool of numbers from which an auto address is chosen Terminal For every application session you create the Terminal assigned must be non zero and unique This parameter defines the number for the ANSI session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 7535 7530 268 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Other applications running in the 7535 7530 such as a TESS session or another ANSI session must each have a different number In addition each Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 using the radio link must have a unique number 6 19 1 1 Host Conn Host Conn Range Conn Type Telnet 802 1Qv2 9010t Telnet Settings See text Conn Type The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of application you are running ANSI or TESS and the type of radio installed in your hand held For ANSI applications this parameter allows you to choose one of the following
25. es 268 619 2 TESS Settings ioo ee e Xp ee a 285 6 20 Ports Tether And Console 308 6 20 1 Peripheral Port Opti0MS o 308 6 20 2 Port Parameter Settings ee 309 6 20 3 Port Scan See Parameters o o 312 6 21 NECWODS 0 seis seen ts a cx da Tee Yee at es os ERG 317 6 21 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings o 317 6 21 2 802 1O v2 43 x wise Set at a Re A a 318 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 7 External Bar Code Readers 22s 323 7 1 1 PowerScan Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners 323 7 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader 323 71 2 Batteries AA ee ida NS 323 7 2 1 Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions 323 7 3 Important Charger Safety Instructions 325 RAs Chargers uox onov ROR We Ra HO I OR RP ee es 326 vi Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Contents 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 Gang Charger ai pa oa E E eA 326 PSA Installation a aa aa a Se ee ee US 327 7 5 2 Operator Controls llle 327 7 53 Charge Indicators e 327 7 5 4 Charging Batteries o 328 7 5 5 Troubleshooting 000000 eee ee 328 Combo Charger 5 x uns a doe ed ee a a 329 7 6 1 Installation i orte dee Goad wee Res A EIE ues 330 7 62 Operator Cont
26. or press lt F1 gt 02 Parameters Radio System Scanner Ctrl Panel View Manager Applications Ports Network 6 15 Radio Parameters Important Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory settings without a clear understanding of your system f LA Note A Narrow Band radio is available for 7530 hand held For details on set m ting up this radio refer to Narrow Band Radio Setup 7530 Only on page 137 For 7535 7530s equipped with 802 11 radios follow the directions following 252 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Radio Parameters e Press lt F1 gt to display the Radio sub menu 03 Radio 802 11 e Press lt F1 gt to access the 802 11 sub menu r 04 802 11 DS SS 802 1Q v1 N gt e Set 802 1Q vl to Y to activate these parameters and press lt F1 gt to display 802 1Q v1 parameters m 05 802 10 vl Range Auto Radio Addr Y Y N Radio Address 0 1 3840 Initial RTT 0 0 1000 Protocol Type 2457 1501 65535 802 10 vl When 802 10 v1 is set to Y the attached sub menu of parameters is enabled Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is enabled a request is sent to the network controller to assign a radio address to the hand held computer radio If Auto Radio
27. table allows these arrow key character sequences to be redefined r 07 Arrow Key Remap Up Arrow 1B 5B 41 00 00 Down Arrow 1B 5B 41 00 00 Right Arrow 1B 5B 41 00 00 Left Arrow 1B 5B 41 00 00 272 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen To change values Highlight the arrow key you want to remap e Either type new values or press the lt LEFT gt or lt RIGHT gt arrow key to change the values e Use the stylus or press the TAB key to move through the string of values 6 19 1 Screen 05 Screen Range of Pages 4 0 16 of Rows 24 4 60 of Cols 80 80 or 132 Default Font 17x30 see text 80 col Font 17x30 see text 132 col Font 17x30 see text Video see text Label F1 F4 See text Colour overrideN See text of Pages This parameter defines how many pages are accessible to application programs The ANSI control functions Next Page NP and Previous page PP are used to select another page These pages are independent of each other so that if lines of text scroll off a page the other pages are unaffected There is no error indication from the hand held computer ifthe memory required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in the computer of Rows This parameter defines the logical page length in lines used by the host computer application
28. troubleshooting tips 56 two dimensional 2D imager scanner 57 PC A Check Digit 769 PC A Preamble 7 70 PC EANI 771 183 PC EAN Shared Settings 179 PC E Check Digit 170 PC E Preamble 770 PC E1 Check Digit 770 PC E1 Preamble 770 warning message 192 2D DataMatrix 786 2D Maxicode 786 2D Micro PDF 417 176 186 2D PDF 417 176 186 2D QR Code 186 2D Raster Expand Rate 64 2D Raster Height 164 2D RSS Code 177 187 2D Scanning Mode 164 2D UPC Half Block Stitching 172 c c ccc cce scanning AComposite 187 AIAG 297 aiming target dot duration 153 163 182 Append Enter 296 Append F0 296 appending characters 155 157 191 Auto Exposure Imager 82 Aztec 187 Bad Scan Beep 192 Bi Direction Redundancy 7 64 Center Bar Code Only Imager 82 check digit 156 159 160 161 175 Check Digits MSI Plessey 175 Check Digit Verification 767 Check Digit Verification 12 of 5 174 Click Data appending data 191 Click Time 7 97 CLSI Editing 173 Codabar 172 Code 128 168 178 Code 128 Emulation 1 76 Code 32 Prefix 166 Code 39 166 178 Code 93 173 Composite 177 Cont Nxt Fld 296 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Conv UPC E To UPC A 170 Conv UPC E1 To UPC A 7 Convert To Code 32 166 Convert To EAN 13 174 country code 156 decoded 152 decoded external 788 Console Port 190 Tether Port 788 decoded internal 162 decoded Intermec ISCP 178 Decode Perf Lev
29. 10 heavy duty wire crimp ring terminal Torque the ground lug hardware to 23 0 2 0 in Ibs Connect the other end of the ground strap to a solid reliable point on the main portion of the vehicle chassis ensuring a solid electrical connection As with other vehicle cables the routing of the ground strap should be carefully considered to ensure it does not pose a hazard to the operator or the safe operation of the vehicle If necessary secure the ground strap with cable ties or some other mechanical means to prevent loops or loose lengths of wire that could catch on stationary items when the vehicle is in motion 1 11 6 1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle A 1 8 meter 6 foot extension power cable PN 13985 is supplied with your power cradle This cable should be wired to a filtered fused maximum 10A accessory supply on the vehicle The power cradle draws no more than 8A less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V Any additional wiring connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply The black lead connects to the negative supply this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body The power cradle is fully isolated and can be used with both negative and positive chassis vehicles You may have the option of connecting power before or after the key switch It is preferable to wire the power cradle afte
30. Bar code data is stripped off any identifying headers symbology etc and passed verbatim The Scan See is capable of displaying only a subset of the default PC 8 ASCII character set Any characters that cannot be displayed are currently translated to 6 21 Network r 03 Network Ctrl Panel 802 1Qv2 6 21 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings This option displays a Windows CE NET screen where you can set up your 802 11 radio launch an existing network connection or create a new connection The radio icon NETWLANI in the sample screen in this window is used to configure the 802 11 radio installed in the 7535 7530 Make New USB Cable Connection AAA Figure 6 11 Network Settings AN Important Follow the steps outlined in Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit on page 22 for details about configuring your radio Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 317 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 802 IQ v2 6 21 2 802 10 v2 Important For setup information about 802 IQ v2 refer to the 9400 and 9450 Network Controllers User Manual and or the 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual r 04 802 10 v2 Range Port 8888 see text More Parameters gt see text Port Port specifies the UDP port used by 80210 v2 The default value is 8888 Keep in mind that the value assigned here must match the value set at the network cont
31. Contents Chapter 8 Specifications 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 7535 Hand Held Computer Specifications 347 7530 Hand Held Computer Specifications 349 Radio Specifications 2 0 llle 351 Internal Scanner Port 2 2 o o e 352 Bar Code Applications a 352 REID Applications 3 4 303 Peas A ae RE a a S 352 Internal Scanners e a a a e e a 353 External Scanners 22e 353 Internal Scanner Specifications ooo llle 353 8 9 1 SE 1200 High Performance amp Long Range Specs 354 8 9 2 SE 1200 Advanced Long Range amp SE 2223PDF Specs 355 89 3 SE 1224HP SEI200WA amp SE 923HS 357 8 9 4 SE 1524ER Extended Range Scanner 360 8 9 5 Intermec E1022 Linear 1D Imager Scanner 363 8 9 6 Symagery SX5303 Imager 364 External Scanner Specifications o 366 8 10 1 PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs 366 8 10 2 PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs 368 RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only 369 7535 1900 mAh Lithium Ion Battery Pack 371 7530 1900 mAh Lithium Ion Battery Pack 371 7530 2400 mAh Lithium Ion Battery Pack 372 Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices A l A 2 A 3 Technical Support
32. O This is an ad hoc network Shayton we E Authentication Open y Network key Key index Tues The key is provided automatically Enable 802 1X authentication cone c Figure 2 9 Wireless Properties Dialog Box Network name SSID Type the appropriate SSID Service Set Identifier in the Network name SSID text box at the top of this dialog box The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network AN Important Keep in mind that the 7535 7530 will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID Ad Hoc And Infrastructure Ifyou are using an Infrastructure network one in which 7535 7530s must pass data through an access point leave the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network blank If you are using an Ad Hoc network a network in which 7535 7530s pass data directly to other 7535 7530s without an access point highlight This is an ad hoc network and add a checkmark in the checkbox to enable Ad Hoc Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption prevents others from acciden tally accessing your network If you are not using encryption you can choose Disabled from the dropdown encryption menu Otherwise leave this field as is Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 25 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit Authentication
33. PC Half Block Stitching 2D 7 72 pper ANSI Host Char Set 284 pper Case 29 SB Setup Application D 1 installing usbstor amp wceusbsh inf D 4 launching D 1 updating usbstor amp wceusbsh inf D 2 usbstor inf installing D 4 usbstor inf updating D 2 Use Increment X Increment 267 Y Increment 267 Use increment 26 user permissions Exit 259 SOO AE em m em Ee Eee ec Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual xxi Index XXii Font Change 259 Screen Switch 258 User security level 74 V Valid Numerics TESS 299 Variations Code 128 156 Verify 153 Version 316 Version Scan See 316 version number TESS 233 vertical tab CTRL K 281 video attributes 274 275 298 All Fld Video 298 Blink 275 298 Bold 274 298 Reverse 275 298 Underline 275 View IDs 261 viewport mapping 3 2 visible fields match 290 V Match Chr 290 volume adjusting 257 VT220 Function keys equivalent Psion Teklogix keyboard Function keys 237 W warm reset 32 Warm Reset Shutdown menu 82 warnings 192 warranty 4 wceusbsh inf installing D 4 wceusbsh inf updating D 2 WEC Write Error Code 305 Window Delay Polling 145 Windows Start Menu See Start Menu 72 Windows CE dialogue box 82 files folders amp programs working with 68 Windows CE navigating in 67 Windows Explorer 77 wireless connection setup 22 Wireless Information Tab 24 Wireless Properties tab 25 Wireless WAN 202 215 Wireless WAN icon 53
34. gt D Keyboard Mouse 2 3 Owner Password 4 O B ES 9 Internet Options e Network and Dial up Connections un PC d EZ riko Figure 5 37 Network And Dial up Connection Icon 2 Choose the Make New Connection icon File Edit Advanced 3 gt USB Cable D Connection gt iXM3 Le Lx Figure 5 38 Creating A GPRS Connection 124 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 3 Inthe Make New Connection dialog box choose Dial Up Connection Enter a name for your GPRS network connection File Edit Advanced Make New Connection Type a name for the connection cens network Select the connection type Dial Up Connection O Direct Connection Q virtual Private Network etwork L2TP i2 Figure 5 39 Setting Up The Connection 4 Choose the Next button to display the Modem dialog box TA GPRS network Che Select a modem Haves Compatible on COMI RS Phone 0060570501 Security Settings lt Back Next gt gt i Figure 5 40 Setting Up The Modem 5 Inthe dropdown menu labelled Select a modem choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialog box Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 125 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone The 7535 7530 c
35. rmm TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTITTTTITTTTITITTTTITTITIITI O 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 cm 0 127 254 381 508 635 762 889 1018 143 1270 1397 1524 1651 1778 1905 2032 2159 2286 2413 Depth of Field Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle Figure 8 1 SE 1224HP Decode Zone 358 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Decode Zones Width of Fiold in Inches Centimotors nn 10 3 In N 26 2 Cm pm ai L soin ER 12 7 Cm apt S X Oin if 0 Cm Wido JJ j Angle E a H amp 0In 5 Mil o s m y 127 Cm 7 5 Mil gt eec r 100 UPC 4 n Bs r 10 3 In 20 Mil 262 Cm 40 Mil a 55 Mil 0 In 5 In 10 In 15In 20 In 25 In 0 Cm 12 7 Cm 25 4 Cm 38 1 Cm 50 8 Cm 63 5 Cm Typical Depth of Field in Inches Centimeters Minimum distance determined by Symbol length and scan angle Figure 8 2 SE 1200WA Decode Zone in on 203 SE 900HS Decode Zone E Note Guaranted performance at 73 4 F 23 C Ea ms on high quality symbols E w E Ea 192 X E i t gt 2 8 h o o E 2 eias oz st E 17 66 mi POF Iss e E e zal 75m M 2 4 102 1 LL E E 15 jns m jka 20 ns e 15 Led ail shes 5 6 203 20 8 0 ome 280 Ld DIUI T T I T T T T T T T T T 1 in 0 5 o 15 20 em 127 254 58 1 508 Depth of Field Minimum distance
36. you can use the keyboard or you can select items by tapping a stylus on the screen Keep in mind that some 7535s are not equipped with touchscreens in these cases navigation will be limited to the keyboard There are four types of parameters numeric Y N alpha and string entry Some menus have sub menus attached to them and others utilize a Control Panel dialog box to make adjustments AN Important Depending on the method you use when working with menus review either Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus on page 244 or Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus on page 247 6 10 1 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus Press the UP and lt DOWN gt arrow keys to move the cursor up and down the current menu The currently selected parameter name will be displayed in reverse video 6 10 1 1 Sub Menus The character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub menu Displaying Sub Menus To display a sub menu e Use the UP and lt DOWN gt arrow keys to position the cursor on the menu item with the sub menu you want to display e Press F1 the NEXT menu function key Returning To The Previous Menu e Press F2 the PREV function key or e Press lt ESC gt 244 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Numeric Parameters 6 10 1 2 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are di
37. 318 narrow band radio 3 8 WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS 253 802 1Q v1 253 radio address automatic 802 IQ v1 253 radio specifications 351 radio statistics screen 802 1Q 240 Radio Tab Narrow Band radio 147 Raster 164 Raster Expand Rate 2D 764 Raster Height 2D 164 rb received beacons 242 RD7950 integrated UHF RFID reader 7535 only B 1 RD7950 read and write distance 370 recalibrating touchscreen 46 1 4 received acknowledgements 242 received beacons rb 242 received messages rm 242 receive LED 49 Remap Passthru 293 Remap Underline To 306 Remote Desktop Connection 77 remote desktop connection 89 Repeat Delay between key repeats 99 Repeat Rate of key repeats 99 Repeat tab key repeat settings 98 Replace mode 230 replace mode 299 reprinting a page 234 RESET Press Enter message 227 resetting default parameter values 249 TESS session 234 7535 memory 249 resetting the WORKABOUT cold reset 32 warm reset 32 resetting the 7535 32 xiv Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual response time improving with queuing mode 236 retransmissions 802 IQv1 xr See xr retransmissions 242 Retries 377 reverse video attribute 275 298 RFID applications 352 RD7950 installation 7535 only B RD7950 integrated RFID reader 7535 only B 1 RD7950 read and write distance 370 RD7950 specifications 369 SE923 combo RFID scanner operating 58 RFID internal scanner combo 58 Rights 197 Rjct if Alph
38. 4 gt fo MA Ol Figure 5 30 Bluetooth Icon The Bluetooth Control dialog box is used to display the other Bluetooth devices with which you can communicate 116 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Devices Tab 5 6 The Devices Tab Bluetooth Manager ok Ipsi Devices servers Outgoing Actis Name Address Act PIN san services sot pin E Figure 5 31 The Bluetooth Device Tab Scan e Click on the Scan button to list available devices Please wait while Bluetooth scans for devices Stop Services Set PIN E Figure 5 32 Available Bluetooth Devices Wait for the 7535 7530 to complete its scan approximately 20 seconds When scanning starts the Scan button will change to Stop if necessary you can tap on this button to stop the process Once scanning is complete all discovered devices will be displayed in the list box with Name Address Active status and PIN information Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 117 Chapter 5 Configuration The Devices Tab Note During the scanning process addresses are located first followed by names Only the names of devices that are within the Bluetooth radio cov erage range will be retrieved The Active column indicates whether any service is activated for that device When a service is activated the device is displayed in the list even
39. 7535 Hand Held Computer Specifications Communication Ports Environmental Guaranteed Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Rain And Dust Resistance Humidity Drop Durability Approvals Safety EMC Laser Tether port optional with one RS232 serial port decoded scanner printer undecoded scanner port USB host port power out Docking station port with one RS232 serial port including diagnostics USB device port USB host port power in out 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C Short exposure to temperatures outside this range may cause the 7535 monochrome screen to become very dark or light temporarily Long exposure to temperatures below 40 C 40 F may damage the screen Prolonged exposure to temperatures above 60 C 140 F will damage the main battery and temperatures above 70 C 158 F may damage the unit 13 F to 140 F 25 C to 60 C IEC 529 classification IP54 5 95 RH non condensing Multiple 5 ft 1 5m drops to polished concrete Cradle shock 30g in each axis Cradle vibration 1 5g RMS PSD 4Hz 500Hz UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No950 LVD EN60950 FCC Part 15 Class B EMC Directive Class B IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Class 2 CDRH 21 CFR 1040 Class II 348 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications 7530 Hand Held Computer Specifications 8 1530 Hand Held Computer Specifications Size 3 94 100mm width x 3 35 85mm
40. Computers are limited to indoor use They may be used outdoors on private property only with prior authorization from the French Ministry of Defense For GSM GPRS Users in North America Although the GSM GPRS Expansion Module is a three band device only the 1900 PCS band is used in North America FCC Information To Users Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa tion This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful inter Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual IX Approvals And Safety Summary ference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encour aged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is c
41. Convert to UPC A Setting this parameter to on results in a non standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code Include Number Sys If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data Include Check When enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum A Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter see page 153 must be enabled Refer to Addendum on page 157 Prefix Suffix Refer to page 157 for details 5 10 2 8 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar or off to disable it Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 154 for details 5 10 2 9 Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 159 Chapter 5 Configuration Code 11 Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 154 for details 5 10 2 10 Code l Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11 Include Check If Include Check is enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Check Digit This parameter can be set to None One Check Digit or Two Check Digits Double tap on this parameter to display a dialog box listing your options e M Highlight the check digit you want to use and tap on OK If this parameter set to One Check Digit
42. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U S export jurisdic tion You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFT WARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information see http www microsoft com exporting Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc End User License Agreement End User License Agreement ATTENTION PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE CARE FULLY BEFORE INSTALLATION USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE SOFT WARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND IF THE SOFTWARE IS SUPPLIED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND Software License Terms The following terms govern your use of the enclosed Software unless you have a separate written agreement with Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc herein also known as MDC License Grant MDC grants you a non exclusive and non transferable license to Use one copy of the Software Use means storing loading installing executing or displaying the Software Software
43. Troubleshooting issues for the combo dock are identical to those of the quad dock Refer to Troubleshooting on page 335 for helpful tips 1 8 Quad Dock The quad dock is shipped with a user manual It is critical that this man ual be reviewed for additional information and updates The Quad Dock permits each of four docked 7535 7530 hand helds to communicate with a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet network at greater than 2Mbps It also provides sufficient power to operate and fast charge the batteries in the 7535 75305 1 8 1 Installation The quad dock should be located away from excessive dirt dust and contaminants The ambient temperature must fall between 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F The 7535 7530 internal charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range For maximum performance it is recommended that the quad dock be operated at room temperature from 18 C to 25 C 64 F to 77 F The quad dock can consume up to 3A 120VAC or 1 5A 240VAC Ensure that the mains circuit supplying the unit is adequate especially if several docks are being powered from the same circuit After unpacking the unit e Visually inspect the unit for any damage e Install the IEC power cord and apply power A green indicator in the lower right corner of the front panel lights up to indicate that power is present e Attach a CATS RJ45 network patch cable supplied between your network and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the doc
44. depth x 10 6 270mm length e 3 03 77mm width x 1 70 43mm depth at grip area Weight With std battery std radio 34 oz 950g amp std internal scanner With pistol grip add 4 3 oz 125g Operating System e Microsoft Windows CE NET Version 4 2 Processor And Memory 400 MHz XScale PXA255 Processor 32KB instruction 32KB data cache On board RAM 128MB SDRAM On board RAM 64MB FLASH e 11 1V Lithium Ion Standard Battery reduced in freezer applications Optional extra life battery up to 17hrs reduced in freezer applications e Quick swap packs e Advanced Smart Battery with gas gauge Runs off battery wall adaptor or cigarette lighter Built in fast charger 2 hrs e System backup during battery swap 15 min e week real time clock backup External Ports Tether port with one RS232 serial port decoded scanner printer undecoded scanner port USB host port power out Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 349 Chapter 8 Specifications 7530 Hand Held Computer Specifications Docking station port with one RS232 serial port including diagnostics USB device port USB host port Power in out Internal Expansion Slots One SDIO MultiMediaCard slot e One Type II Complact Flash slot e One Type III Extended PC Card slot Environmental Standard Operating Temperature Range 10 C to 60 C 14 F to 140 F Freezer Operating Temperature Range 30
45. field are TESS ANSI and None Use the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to scroll through the options The Title 4 field needs a name that is meaningful to the operator In addi tion TESS and ANSI applications require unique titles so that several different sessions of TESS and ANSI can operate simultaneously These titles will appear in startup Display Menu Each session will have its own set of parameters e To display the Settings menu for your application position the cursor on Settings and press F1 the NEXT key Before you can access the Settings menu you must first complete the Name and Type fields Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 267 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application ANSI Settings 6 19 1 ANSI Settings r 04 Ansi Range Auto Term t N see text Terminal 1 1 1024 Host Conn see text Screen see text Xmit Modes see text Kbd Modes see text Edit Modes see text Serial see text Host Char Set see text Anchor View N see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters Additional ANSI information is documented in ANSI Emulation on page 236 Auto Term L Note Refer to Group on page 268 for additional instructions When this parameter is set to Y a unique number is assigned for the current ANSI session If Auto Term is set to
46. lt S1 gt lt S2 gt lt P gt data lt P gt data lt S1 gt lt P gt data lt S2 gt and lt P gt data lt S1 gt lt S2 gt Prefix lt P gt Suffix S12 And Suffix 22 A prefix and or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing When you double tap on these parameters a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255 Delete Char Set ECls Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character Set ECIs Extended Channel Interpretations also known as GLIs from its buffer before transmission Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 165 Chapter 5 Configuration Code 39 When this parameter is enabled the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 bar codes containing Character Set ECIs even when the ECI Protocol is disabled ECI Decoder Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations ECIs supported by the scanner This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data 5 10 3 3 Code 39 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39 Enable Trioptic Code 39 Note Trioptic Code 39 and Full ASCII should not be enabled simulta LT n
47. w in Lx 4 Desktop id B Security gt lt PEN Programs gt ter Shortcuts io x E ua amp Settings W Control Panel E ng p 2 Help Network HO O run E Taskbar Control Panel The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware the operating system and the shell If your 7535 7530 is running with the Psion Teklogix Tekterm application or another application additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel Network And Dial Up Connections The Network and Dial up Connections window allows you to configure the 7535 radio or execute an existing configuration Refer to Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit on page 22 for radio setup details Taskbar And Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the taskbar choosing which options will be displayed Refer to Customizing The Taskbar on page 71 for additional details about this option 80 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Run 4 4 6 Run Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can enter the name of the program folder or document you want to open or launch Type the name of a program folder or document and Windows will open it for you Bla i 0 Figure 4 14 Run Dialog Box 4 4 7 Shutdown The Shutdown menu includes the following options Suspend War
48. worldwide offices 4 wrap auto 283 Wraparound 3 5 Write Error Code WEC 305 X xa transmitted acknowledgements 242 xi transmitted initialize messages 242 X Increment 267 xm transmitted messages 242 Xmit Count 276 Xmit Enter 282 Xmit key 278 Xmit Modes 276 279 Xmit Wait 277 x origin 285 300 xr retransmissions 242 Y Y N parameters enabling and disabling 245 248 Y Increment 261 yorigin 285 300 1D internal scanner 56 132 col font 274 2D DataMatrix 1 86 2D imager scanner 57 2D Maxicode 186 2D Micro PDF 417 176 186 2D PDF 417 176 186 2D QR Code 186 2D Raster Expand Rate 64 2D Raster Height 7 64 2D RSS Code 77 187 2D Scanning Mode 164 2D UPC Half Block Stitching 172 2392 Telnet See Emulation 2392 Telnet 300 3274 Telnet See Emulation 3274 Telnet 303 36 key keyboard alpha keys accessing 43 uppercase letters creating 43 5250 emulation keys 229 5250 Telnet See Emulation 5250 Telnet 305 58 key keyboard 42 7 bit parameter 277 7530 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual approvals 35 specifications 349 7535 approvals 348 off line 235 specifications 347 80 col font 274 802 IQ connection ANSI 269 802 IQ connection TESS 286 802 IQ v1 protocol Auto Radio Addr 253 802 10 v2 318 802 1X authentication enabling 27 802 11b Direct Sequence 351 802 11b radio configuring 22 9010t connection TESS 286 Index Psion Teklogix 7535 75
49. 0 2 Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Deine b 2 9 Display Internet c SS gt e Options Keyboard Mouse Network anc Dial up Co 2 A P Owner Password PC gt i Figure 5 44 Dialing Icon Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 127 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 9 The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited according to your network carrier specifications Dialing Properties ok Location Work y New Remove Local settings are Area code fa25 Tone dialing Country Region f O Pulse dialing Disable call waiting dial E Dialing patterns are AAA Local Long Distance International G 1FG 9 011 EFG iX Figure 5 45 Setting Up Dialing Properties Once you ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier require ments press lt ENTER gt to save your changes 10 Atthis point you ll need to return to the Control Panel and choose the Network and Dial up Connections icon 11 In the network connection window the new network configuration in this case GPRS Network is displayed Choose the new icon He eat Aon 21 a C Make New USB Cable Connection di Figure 5 46 GPRS Network Connection 128 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone This onscreen messa
50. 169 179 EAN 8 156 169 179 EAN 8 Zero Extend 69 EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 27 Echo Mode 280 ECI Decoder 66 Edit extent 283 editing 276 Edit Modes 283 edit modes TESS 230 empty entry fields 297 Vi Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Emulation 2392 Telnet 300 AIAG Character 307 Barcode Character 307 Clear Entry Fields 301 Command Region Up Down Left amp Right 302 Enable Alarm 302 Features 301 Fixed Field Overhd 302 Passthru Printing 307 Send CR with FKEY 300 Serial IO Character 302 3274 Telnet 305 BRK for Attn 304 Features 304 FKEY0 39 305 Fujitsu Host 303 Intl EBCDIC 303 IP for SysReq 303 LU Name 304 LU Name Enabled 304 Null In Fields 303 5250 Telnet 305 Features 307 FKEY0 39 307 Intl EBCDIC 306 LU Name Enabled 306 LU Name Prefix 306 Nulls In Fields 306 Remap Underline To 306 Term Type 306 WEC Write Error Code 305 Emulation 300 emulation keys field advance tab 229 field backspace 229 field exit 229 home 229 tab field advance 229 emulation keys IBM 5250 229 Enable Alarm 302 Enable Bookland UPC EAN 171 Enable CC AB 178 Enable CC C 178 Enable Cellular Protocol 44 Enable Power Saving 7 47 Enable RSS Expanded 77 Index Enable RSS Limited 177 Enable RSS 14 177 Enable SNMP 196 Enable TLC 39 78 enabling disabling Y N parameters 245 248 Encryption Bluetooth Controls 7 9 End ANSI 284 Enh Edit Mode TESS 299 ENTER key 237 completing a data field 229
51. 2 time out periods before channel switching begins Important Fast switch speed is most effective where coverage areas are largely overlapping If the coverage areas barely overlap have dead spots or if the 7530 frequently operates on the fringe of cov erage this parameter should be set to Slow Channel Selection Enabling Manual Select allows you to set the channel search order the 7530 will use if communication quality drops and channel switching is required If this parameter is enabled the 7530 uses the channel switching lists specified in the Manual Switch Table If this parameter is disabled unchecked the hand held uses a standard algorithm to decide which channel it should switch to in the event of poor channel quality Warning Itis not recommended that the Manual Select parameter be used without a clear understanding of how to order the channel sequences for optimum performance Manual Switch Table Tap on the Set Switch Table button to display the Manual Switch Table dialog box Channel List Edit Channel List Figure 5 66 Manual Switch Table 142 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab This feature is used rarely It is used when the order of channel switching needs to be tightly controlled The values in the Channel column are completed for you with the enabled channels when this dialog box is opened For each co
52. 20 cm between the device and the product to reduce the risk of interference If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place turn off the WORKABOUT PRO and contact your cardiologist for assistance X Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Approvals And Safety Summary px In August 1996 the Federal Communications Commission FCC of the US adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio fre quency energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters The design of this product complies with the FCC guidelines and those standards To main tain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines if you wear the Workabout Pro on your body use the supplied or Psion Teklogix approve carrying case If you do not use a body worn accessory ensure the antenna is at least 1 5 cm from your body when transmitting Use of non approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines Emissions Information For Canada This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations To prevent radio interference to the licensed ser vice this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Afin d v
53. 7530 Radio Traffic LED Function Charge LED Behaviour Charge in progress LED displays solid yellow colour Cell temperature out of range for charge LED flashes yellow Unable to charge battery LED displays solid red colour Charge circuit failure LED flashes fast red Table 3 1 Charge LEDs If the charge fails refer to the charger troubleshooting sections in Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories beginning on page 321 for helpful details 3 7 1 2Radio Traffic LED The upper left LED on your unit flashes either yellow or green to indicate when the radio transmits and receives data IL Note Keep in mind that while the standard 802 11b radio supports the trans mit receive LED not all radios support this function Function Nadio Traffic LED Behaviour Radio Transmit LED flashes yellow Radio Receive LED flashes green Table 3 2 Transmit and Receive LEDs 3 1 1 5 Scan LED Successful scans are indicated in two ways with a scan LED and with an audio tone Function can LED Behaviour Scan in progress LED displays solid red during scan LED displays solid green after decode Off when scan ended Unsuccessful scan LED flashes red Table 3 3 Scan LED 3 1 1 4 User Application LED This indicator is available for user loaded custom Windows CE NET applications Refer to the 7535 7530 SDK Manual for details about this LED Neither Windows CE NET nor Tekt
54. 802 11 supports two subtypes of network authentication services Open and Shared Under Open authentication any wireless station can request authentication The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station Under Shared authentication each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802 11 wireless network communications channel Network Key This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point To assign a Network key Highlight The key is provided automatically and uncheck the checkbox to disable this option Wireless Properties ok x Network name SSID EVA C This is an ad hoc network Encryption WEP iv Authentication open y Disable this option to Networkkey i23 s access Network Key amp Keyindexw f Key Index fields gt key is provided automatically al 5 Figure 2 10 Accessing Network Key And Key Index Key Index This field is used to identify the WEP key Entera value from 1 to 4 26 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic C
55. Append Enter causes an lt ENTER gt code to be appended to the bar code The ENTER code completes the entry of the bar code and moves the cursor to the next field Append FO When enabled set to Y this parameter causes an F0 code to be appended to the bar code The F0 code completes the entry of the bar code data in the field 296 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Mixed AIAG When this parameter is enabled set to Y AIAG labels are always accepted and processed even if mixed with keyboard input The AIAG label can replace the partially entered keyboard data If this parameter is disabled AIAG labels are rejected if field entry is in progress Rjct if Alpha When the cursor is in a numeric field and Rjct if Alpha is enabled set to Y bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected Beam Lockout When enabled set to Y this parameter disallows scanner use when the current session is in LOCK H mode 6 92 1 Fields 05 Fields Range Field Order Y Y N Enter To FO Y Y N Enter On Arrow Y Y N Video see text All Fld Video Y Y N Default Font 17x30 see text Entry Mode field see text Open Fky Only N Y N Ign Bcode fld N Y N Enh Edit Mode N Y N Valid Numerics see text Field Order This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields The next f
56. BKSP Key 42 DEL CLR key Local Echo mode ANSI 281 Delete Char Set ECIs 765 desktop connection remote 89 Dev Attr 277 device attribute requests 237 device attribute string 277 Device Name changing 122 dialogue box using 82 digit check digit 156 159 160 161 175 number system 1 58 159 Dim For backlight 96 Disable Beep 293 Disable kbd 282 disabling enabling Y N parameters 245 248 disconnecting ESC Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 270 Discrete 2 0f 5 161 175 180 Discrete 2 of 5 175 Disp controls 283 display Anchor Column 3 3 Anchor Line 3 3 Anchor View 285 300 appearance colour scheme 97 backlight 95 backlight adjusting 45 Brightness 3 5 contrast control panel 95 contrast adjusting 45 Display Properties 94 Display Shift 260 Field Scroll 288 ICH DCH controls 283 Line Scrolling 315 moving 261 Origin Scroll 288 Panning 37 5 positioning 288 split screens 261 Use Increment 26 video attributes 274 275 298 viewport mapping 3 2 Wraparound 3 5 X Increment 267 Y Increment 267 display contrast adjusting 45 displaying TESS version number 233 Display Menu selecting a TESS session 228 Display menu 243 Display Properties 94 Display Shift 260 docking device icons 52 docking station uploading data using 63 Dot Time 53 163 182 double click appending characters to a decoded bar code 191 scanner trigger 191 Double Tap stylus settings 1 3 DUN service Bluetooth 7 8 E EAN UCC 128 156 168 EAN 13 156
57. Bin A El Internet Explorer n OpenTT Figure 4 3 The Taskbar 70 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Using The Taskbar The 7535 7530 is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen It displays icons through which you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit If the hand held is attached to a charger cradle docking station or PDM an associated icon is displayed In addition the taskbar displays the application s currently running on your unit and the security level assigned to your 7535 7530 The taskbar also displays active modifier keys lt SHIFT gt ALT lt CTRL gt lt BLUE gt and lt ORANGE gt Keys that have been locked on are displayed in uppercase letters For example if you press the lt CTRL gt key twice to lock it on it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar 4 3 2 1 Using The Taskbar Using the stylus tap on the indicator you want to view the battery icon for example to display a dialog box listing the current battery capacity information On the keyboard e Press lt BLUE gt 0 to display the Start Menu Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu and then press the lt RIGHT gt arrow key to display the sub menu Choose System Tray in the sub menu e Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you d like more information Press ENTER
58. CATS RJ45 network patch cable shipped with the combo dock between your network and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the dock A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is established A user application needs to be loaded onto each 7535 7530 that utilizes the combo dock for communication With the network connected and this application loaded the combo dock is ready for use 1 1 2 Using The Combo Dock e Gently slide the 7535 7530 into the cradle portion of the combo dock until lightly latched The 7535 7530 detects combo dock and displays the appropriate icon The battery charge LED lower right LED on the 7535 7530 lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery Interaction with the 7535 7530 while in the combo dock is a function of the user application software used to communicate with the host network 1 1 3 Network Access The combo dock includes a dedicated USB to Ethernet converter This USB converter appears as a USB slave to the 7535 7530 USB host controller The 7535 7530 automatically detects insertion into a combo dock and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB Ethernet converter See Network Addressing on page 334 for details about network addressing issues with the combo dock 332 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Troubleshooting 1 1 4 Troubleshooting
59. CR LF character 282 Enter on Arrows 298 Local Echo mode ANSI 267 newline mode ANSI 281 Xmit Enter 282 Enter On Arr 298 ENTER Pmpt ANSI Telnet Settings 270 Enter To FO 298 ENT Key 316 entry fields 228 empty fields 29 Function keys 299 hidden match 29 Ign Bcode_fld 299 video attributes 274 275 298 visible match 290 Entry Mode 299 entry mode 299 EOB chars 279 EOL chars 279 Erasure Mode 283 Error Accept 54 ESC Key 42 ESC Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 270 Exit 259 Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP 27 E1022 1D imager specs 363 F Fast Converge Imager 52 Fcursor mode 230 features 7530 12 7535 7 Features 2392 Telnet 301 Features 3274 Telnet 304 Features 5250 Telnet 307 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual vii Index FETM 278 fh forward host number 242 field advance 229 field advance key function 229 field backspace 229 field backspace key function 229 field exit key function 229 Field mode 230 Field Order 297 fields Arrow mode 280 auto tab fields 228 bar code only fields 228 completing a data field 229 298 Enh Edit mode 299 entry fields 228 291 field advance tab 229 field backspace 229 field exit 229 Field Order 297 Field Scroll 288 Field Size 754 fixed fields 228 hidden match 29 home 229 Ign Bcode_fld 299 insert mode 282 299 match fields 228 replace mode 282 299 serial I O fields 228 Serial In Out 294 size 154 tab field
60. Data Profile OK X Name Fido 1 APN Password amp 59 Prompt user for password y Figure 5 102 Creating A New Profile The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles Also the name cannot be Default When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened a proposal for a unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field If a manually configured profile has a secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered the password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead In this case you will be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated the Connect Data button in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected Activate When this button is chosen the selected profile becomes the active profile Activation is possible only if the Enable automatic configuration checkbox is unchecked Reset The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 211 Chapter 5 Configuration Security Configuration Advanced IP Show Data Profile Ey Show Advanced IP Name APN n _ al Advanced IP Figure 5 103 Assigning IP Information The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Pr
61. Disable kbd N Y N DEC Cursor Keys cursor mode see text Arrow mode This parameter determines whether arrow keys move the cursor within a field or between fields When set to field pressing an arrow key causes the cursor to move to the next field in the direction of the arrow When set to cursor pressing the LEFT and lt RIGHT gt arrow keys move the cursor within the current field Echo Mode This parameter selects echo mode for the 7535 7530 The available modes are Local Host and Smart Local Host Smart In this mode any character entered using the keyboard is displayed before being sent to the host Certain keys cause additional action at the 7535 7530 as shown in Table 6 4 on page 281 In this mode the hand held computer sends all keyboard entries to the host and displays only data received from the host This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host computer The 7535 7530 displays all printable characters on the screen before sending them to the host The hand held com pares the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed on the page and fixes the display if the host echoes are different The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25 Any additional characters are sent to the host but not displayed When the 7535 7530 is in insert mode smart echo is disabled
62. Does Not Light When Battery Installed 329 7 6 Combo Charger 2 aa e a a a e E 329 7 61 Installation 2222s 330 7 62 Operator Controls 22e 330 7 6 3 Using the Combo Charger With The 7535 7530 330 7 6 4 Charging The Spare Battery o o 330 7 6 5 Charge Indicators 2 e 331 7 6 6 Troubleshooting ee 331 71 3 COMBO DOCK si se tsk Boe dc eae ee hy Goh ee AA 332 TAL Installation LA eee a A Aen ee xe os 332 7 7 2 Using The Combo Dock 22e 332 413 Network ACCESS oe o des uer eg eos dote dee bed 332 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 321 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 7 74 Troubleshooting e e e 333 TS Quad DOCK ze Ge A A Ue A 333 7 8 1 Installation doa ore usus pex RO OR 9 oe Se ten 333 7 8 2 Indicators And Controls 0 eee eee 334 7 8 3 Using The Quad Dock o 334 7 8 4 Network Access leer 334 7 8 4 1 Network Addressing 0 000002 ee 334 7 8 5 Battery Charging ues Ro a ae ed ey ob 334 7 8 6 Troubleshooting e 335 7 8 6 1 Network Link Unsuecessful 335 7 8 6 2 7535 7530 LED Does Not Light When Docked 335 7 9 Portable Docking Module PDM o o 335 7 10 Bluetooth Peripherals llle 338 7 11 The 7535 7530 Picker Cradle llores
63. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the hand held s display Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display fL Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 273 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen of Cols This parameter defines the logical page width in characters used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the display Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display IL Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Default font This parameter determines the default font that appears when the 7535 7530 memory is reset e Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the available options 80 col font 132 col font These parameters are used to set the font size on the screen if the default font is not acceptable An escape sequence must be sent from the host before a hand held can switch to either 80 col font or 132 col font e Use the RIGHT or lt LEFT gt arrow keys to scroll through the size options for these parameters Video 06 Video Range Bold NONE see text Blink BLNK see text Reverse REV See text Underline ULIN see text The possible attributes
64. Field Size Char Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 6 Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 Field Size Char Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 7 Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 8 Postal Australian Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Australian Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 184 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Postal Japanese 5 10 5 9 Postal Japanese Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Japanese Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 10 Postal Korean Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Korean Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 11 Postal PlaNET Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal PlaNET Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 12 Postal PostNET Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal PostNET Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 13 Postal Royal Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Royal Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 185 Chapter 5 Configuration 2D DataMatrix 5 10 5 14 2D DataMatrix Enabled Set this p
65. First enable the Use Increment parameter set it to Y X Increment determines the number of columns spaces the screen pans when the lt BLUE gt key is locked on and the LEFT or lt RIGHT gt arrow key is pressed Y Increment determines the number of rows lines the screen pans when the UP or DOWN arrow key is pressed when the lt BLUE gt key is locked on Assign a value to the X Increment and Y Increment parameters To pan the screen contents e Press the BLUE key twice to lock it on It will be displayed in upper case letters BLUE in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen Press the RIGHT LEFT UP or lt DOWN gt arrow key Pressing the lt LEFT gt arrow pans the screen to the right pressing the RIGHT arrow pans the screen to the left and so on Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 225 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications Once you re done e Unlock the BLUE key 6 4 1 Using The Task Manager To Switch Between Applications To display the Task Manager screen Inthe Start Menu tap on Shortcuts followed by Task Manager If you re using the keyboard e Press BLUE lt 0 gt to display the Start Menu Highlight Task Manager and press lt ENTER gt or Type the underlined alpha character in this case the letter f Task Manager Active Tasks NETWLAN1
66. Hand Held Computer User Manual 99 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard One Shot Modes Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7535 7530 keyboard backlight Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity ON Time The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on when a unit is not in use 5 5 2 3 Keyboard One Shot Modes e Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the One Shots tab Keyboard Properties OK x Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros One Shot Modes V Orange Key M Blue Key Figure 5 9 Keyboard One Shot Properties When these options are enabled the lt ORANGE gt and lt BLUE gt keys only remain active until the next key is pressed If the One Shots options are disabled the checkbox is left blank the lt ORANGE gt and lt BLUE gt keys are locked on when pressed only once they remain on until they are pressed a second time to unlock them L Note Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on When the ORANGE and BLUE keys are locked on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays them in uppercase characters BLUE KEY and ORANGE KEY If these keys are dis played in lowercase characters in the taskbar you ll know that the Blu
67. If unauthorized access to the device is a concern the Require PIN on resume checkbox should be checked In this case the PIN is not stored whenever a PIN is required you will be prompted to enter an appropriate value 5 2 5 3 Network Configuration fL Note Network configuration is not available with CDMA modems In the main Wireless WAN window Tap on the Tools menu and choose Network By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agreement You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour For example you may want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available Abroad you may find that an available network does not have GPRS roaming agreements In this case you ll need to manually select the network which you know to support GPRS roaming Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable automatic network select in the Network dialog box When automatic network selection is disabled you must select a network manually Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings Scanning for available networks is a lengthy operation a progress bar is shown while the scan is active For every network th
68. Inthe Display Properties dialog box open the Backlight tab Display Properties ok Appearance j ON threshold move right to turn on off on Intensity dns bright Bright For 30 seconds y Dim For 30 seconds y When using external power keep the backlight always ON Sin i OF Figure 5 4 Display Backlight Properties fL Note Backlight changes take affect immediately You do not need to reset the unit ON Threshold The 7535 7530 is equipped with an ambient light sensor This sliding bar allows you to determine how dark the ambient light needs to be before the backlight turns on Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7535 7530 backlight Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity and sliding it to the right raises the intensity Bright For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity when a unit is not in use Dim For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity dimmed backlight when a unit is not in use 96 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Display Appearance External Power Checkbox When you select the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON the backlight remains ON at the configured intens
69. Shot Mode 00 ON Threshold 96 99 Open Fky Only 299 order of fields in TESS screen 297 Origin Scroll 288 Output 193 output input fields serial port 294 Output Tmo 3 P pages of Cols TESS 287 of Columns ANSI 274 of Pages ANSI 273 of Rows ANSI 273 of Rows TESS 288 positioning 288 queuing mode 236 reprinting 234 size shape 274 Pages Saved TESS 288 Panning 37 5 parameters Alpha parameters 245 248 numeric 245 248 saving changes to 249 string entry 245 246 249 Y N boolean 245 248 Parameter Scanning 7 63 Parity 189 190 310 Passthru Printing 30 Password ANSI Telnet Settings 271 Password Echo ANSI Telnet Settings 271 Password Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 271 PDF internal scanner scanning PDF internal 57 period ASCII decimal equivalent 29 peripherals defining connections 308 picker cradle 338 installing cable 339 powered 10 55 VDC 338 powered 12 VDC 338 Xii Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual unpowered 338 picker cradle See a so Picker Cradle 338 PIN Bluetooth Controls 1 8 pinouts C PINs Bluetooth devices 1 9 pins enabling for printing 292 pistol grip installing on 7535 19 pitch scanning 362 pivot viewport 3 2 pocket PC compatibility 89 Polling 745 polling values testing 146 Poll Timeout Polling 745 Port scan see parameters 312 Port ANSI Telnet Settings 270 Port TESS Connection Type 287 Port 802 1Q v2 3 8 port pinouts C 7 Por
70. The value assigned to the Reverse parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Reverse TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal All Fld Video Usually the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry field When this parameter is enabled set to Y the entire field including blanks takes on the video attributes Some systems use this option to identify empty entry fields with reverse video 298 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Default font This parameter determines the default font that appears when the memory is reset e Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the options Entry Mode Entry Mode parameters allow you to select a data entry mode The modes are insert replace field and fcursor TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement on page 230 describes these modes in detail Open Fky Only When this parameter is enabled set to Y the screen is open for function keys only and the cursor is not positioned When this parameter is disabled the screen is open for data entry and the cursor is placed in the first field if it exists Ign Bcode fld When this parameter is enabled set to Y fields that were defined as bar code only accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code rea
71. This command is sent to the host in place of the standard mechanism used to send the attention key press to a host using Telnet LU Name Enabled If enabled set to Y this parameter allows the 7535 7530 to negotiate a specific device name for itself LU Name The value assigned in this field is used when the LU Name Enabled parameter see above is set to Y The current terminal number is appended to the name to generate a unique device name for example LUA 00001 Features 3274 Telnet 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region Right 0 0 80 These parameters are identical to those described for 2392 Telnet Refer to Features 2392 Telnet beginning on page 301 304 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application FKEYO 7 FKEY8 15 FKEYL6 23 FKEY24 31 And FKEY32 39 m 06 FKEYO 7 FKEYO ENTER FKEY1 F1 FKEY2 F2 FKEY3 F3 FKEY4 F4 FKEY5 F5 FKEY6 F6 FKEY7 F7 Emulation The sub menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 7535 7530 function keys 5250 Telnet Emulation r 05 Emulation Range WEC Rem
72. a Password Prompt Password Echo When this parameter is set to Y the host will echo data back to the hand held after receiving a Password Login Failed When the hand held unit receives this string it assumes that the login attempt has failed and returns to the Enter Pmpt Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 271 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Func Key Remap Setting this parameter to Y enables the hand held to use remapped function keys Each function key has a default string associated with it When a function key is pressed the corresponding default string is sent to the host The Func Key Remap table allows these function key character sequences to be redefined 07 Func Key Remap F1 1B 4F 50 00 00 00 00 F 2 1B 4F 51 00 00 00 00 F3 1B 4F 52 00 00 00 00 F28 1B 5B 34 32 7E 00 00 F29 1B 5B 34 33 7E 00 00 F30 1B 5B 34 34 To change values Highlight the function key you want to remap e Either type new values or press the lt LEFT gt or lt RIGHT gt arrow key to change the values e Use the stylus or press the TAB key to move through the string of values Arrow Key Remap Setting this parameter to Y allows the hand held to use remapped arrow key strings Each arrow key has a default string associated with it When an arrow key is pressed the corresponding default string is sent to the host The Arrow Key Remap
73. a UI User Interface to notify the operator that the RFID device is currently active since there is no physical indicator from the reader e Provides a UI to allow the operator to modify various text conversion settings IL Note The UI User Interface for this application is a single system tray icon The icon changes when the RFID device is active and also indicates a successful or unsuccessful scan In addition it displays a scanning bar code indicator during the read process e Caches a short list of previously read tags to make it easier for the operator to repeat the output to keyboard buffer process 58 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals Scanning A Bar Code e Turn the hand held on Wait until the unit has booted up completely e Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger The beam expands covering the bar code to properly scan it The scan beam and a warning indicator are visible until a successful decode is achieved or three seconds have elapsed The SE923 scanner is not equipped with a targeting dot y 3 9 Connecting Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals Tethered peripherals such as scanners and printers connect to the hand held computer with a quick release circular connector When a peripheral is connected to the hand held the unit detects the peripheral and loads the necessary
74. advance 229 transmit on 229 video attributes 274 275 298 visible match 290 Fields parameters for TESS Settings 297 Fill Chr 297 Fixed Field Overhd 302 fixed fields 228 F Keys function keys 316 FKEY0 39 305 307 Flow Control 5 0 Follow Cursor 315 font Default Font 274 299 Font Change 259 Font Override 266 fonts changing screen fonts sizes 225 Foreground amp Background Colour Override 276 289 Foreground amp Background Default Colour 266 Format Effector Transfer Mode FETM 278 form feed CTRL L 281 forward host number fh 242 forward remote number fr 242 fr forward remote number 242 Frequency Table Radio tab 149 Fujitsu Host 303 Full Ascii 753 Full ASCII decoded scanner 167 Func Key Remap ANSI Telnet Settings 272 Function Keys 221 softkeys 223 36 key keyboard 221 223 58 key keyboard 7535 221 63 key keyboard 7530 222 7530 222 7535 221 Function keys 237 ANSI equivalents 237 auto reply mode 29 completing a data field 229 entering data 299 executing procedures from the local menu 235 FKEY0 39 3274 Telnet 305 FKEY0 39 5250 Telnet 307 Label F1 F4 changing 275 288 Open Fky Only 299 seriall O 295 G GATM Guarded Area Transfer Mode 279 Good Scan Beep 192 GPRS bluetooth 124 Group ANSI Auto Term 268 286 GSM GPRS 202 215 H hand strap installing on 7535 78 helpdesk 4 hidden fields match 297 H Match Chr 291 viii Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand
75. appears when a parameter value has n been changed and has not yet been saved 6 2 2 Macro Keys Important Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 101 for details about creating macros 7535 7530 hand helds are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys like the ENTER key the lt BKSP gt key any function key and arrow key and so on Alphanumeric Keyboard Macro Keys Alphanumeric keyboards 7535 58 key and 7530 63 key have twelve macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt These keys are colour coded in orange print above alpha keys lt O gt to lt Z gt To access a macro key e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key from O to Z For example To access macro key lt M1 gt press ORANGE lt O gt To access macro key lt M2 gt press lt ORANGE gt lt P gt and so on Numeric Keyboard Macro Keys Numeric keyboards 36 key 7535s and 37 key 7530s are equipped with six macro keys MI to lt M6 gt Macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M2 gt are directly accessible in the bottom row of the keyboard a key combination is not required Macro keys M3 and M4 are colour coded in orange print above macro keys lt M 1 gt and M2 To access MG press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by M1 e To access M4 press lt ORANGE gt M27 Macro keys M5 to lt M6 gt are c
76. as follows 04 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs AB e Press ENTER 262 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Moving Between Split Screens To display the split screen on the 7535 7530 e Press lt CTRL gt lt DOWN gt arrow 6 18 1 2 Moving Between Split Screens To move the cursor from one pane in a split screen to the next e Press lt CTRL gt lt RIGHT gt or LEFT The cursor moves in order from the left most pane to the right and from the top most pane to the bottom 6 18 1 3 Toggling Between Full amp Split Screens To toggle between a split and full screen format e Press lt CTRL gt lt DOWN gt arrow The application displayed when toggling from a split to a full screen format is determined by the cursor location in the split screen For example if the cursor is in the pane of a split screen in which the TESS application is displayed and lt CTRL gt lt DOWN gt is pressed to display a full screen the TESS application will be displayed in the full screen 6 8 1 4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card When a screen is split the application displayed in each pane is fixed in the View IDs parameter Using an asterisk in the View IDs parameter indicates that a particular pane in the split screen is not fixed to any particular application and can be changed as required For example suppose you want to split the screen into two vertica
77. as is to the port without any remapping Disable Beep Setting this parameter to Y disables the beep generated by the o G and TESS commands Keep in mind that Error and Scan beeps are not disabled Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 293 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features Serial r 06 Serial Range Serial Port Any Available See text Serial Out Y Y N Serial In N Y N SI mode see text SI prefix 10 0 255 SI suffix 13 04 255 SI CRC N Y N SI Fkey 0 044255 SO prefix 10 0 255 SO suffix 13 0 255 SO CRC N Y N Serial Port TESS print commands control the transfer of data to and from the serial and printer ports on the 7535 7530 At the 7535 7530 computer the value assigned at the Serial Port parameter ranks which port the TESS print command will identify and use as the first to fourth port The allowable options are Any Available 1st Serial 2nd Serial 3rd Serial 4th Serial and Disabled Serial Out This parameter enables serial port output fields Serial In This parameter enables the serial port input fields If enabled set to Y the TESS application has exclusive use of the serial port Acceptance of data in a SI field is determined by the SI prefix and suffix SI mode The possible values for this parameter are field the default and command When the SI mode is set to field data received through the serial port is displayed in
78. assigned to the Initial RTT parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations Once the 7535 7530 begins transmitting and receiving data this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions and acknowledgements Protocol Type Protocol Type is used to identify the Ethernet packet frame type sent by the 7535 7530 The default value 2457 assigned to this parameter identifies the Teklogix 802 IQ protocol Ethernet packet frame types The Protocol Type ID should only be altered if the default value is already being used to specify another application Ethernet frame type AN Important Ifyou change the value assigned to Protocol Type ID ensure that all 7535 7530s and 9150s in your system use the same number 6 16 System Parameters m 03 System Keyboard gt Audio gt Pwr Mgmt Ctrl Panel User Permissions gt Window Properties Auto Start Y 254 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Keyboard 6 16 1 Keyboard 04 Keyboard Macro Ctrl Panel Indicators Y Softkeys Y Ctrl Panel gt 6 16 1 1 Macro Control Panel Highlight Macro Ctrl Panel and press lt F1 gt or double tap on this option to display the Macros tab in the Keyboard Properties dialog box Keyboard Properties OK Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros Macro Key
79. auto tab fields 228 Auto Term ANSI 268 286 Auto wrap 283 Aztec 187 B backlight display 95 intensity 45 keyboard 45 backspace CTRL H 28 backup profile creating Total Recall 730 backup profile restoring Total Recall 135 Bad Scan Beep 792 bar code AIAG 297 appending to 155 157 191 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual connecting bar code reader 323 decodes required 753 decoding edge to edge 153 displaying type of bar code 192 external bar code reader 323 parameters 150 187 prefix character 155 157 Security 153 stripping characters 155 157 158 suffix character 155 157 symbologies Codabar 159 172 180 184 Code 11 7 60 180 Code 128 155 168 183 Code 39 153 154 183 Code 93 159 173 181 184 Discrete 2 0f 5 161 175 180 EAN 13 756 169 179 EAN8 158 169 179 IATA 2of5 162 Interleaved 2 of5 160 173 180 184 MSI Plessey 161 174 181 UPCA 158 169 179 UPCE 159 170 179 Barcode Character 301 bar code only fields 228 bar code reader applications 352 external specs 353 external scanner operation of 323 integrated scanner operation of 53 internal or integrated 353 batteries capacity dialogue box 1 0 charge time required 323 chargers 38 charging 17 cycles 323 gauge 51 installing 37 38 installing in 7535 21 power saving scheme dialogue box 110 removing 37 run time maximizing 60 safety precautions 323 specifications 7530 1900mAh 371 specifications 7530 2400mAh 37
80. be overcharged 1 6 4 Charging The Spare Battery e Install the battery with the latch facing towards the rear of the charger slide it between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place The LED for the slot lights up immediately A solid yellow LED indicates the battery is being charged A flashing yellow LED indicates that the battery temperature is outside the acceptable charge range between 5 C and 39 C 41 F to 102 F A fully discharged battery normally takes between 1 5 and 4 hours to charge When the battery capacity reaches 75 the LED flashes green When the battery is at full capacity the indicator turns solid green 330 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual The combo charger stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Charge Indicators there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge slot The 75 charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge a quick charge often takes less than one hour 1 6 5 Charge Indicators The spare battery charge slot has an associated tri colour LED indicator on the lower right area of the front panel LED Behaviour Charge Status Off No battery detected in the slot Solid green Battery is fully charged Flashing green Battery is charged to 75 capacity Solid yellow Charge in progress Battery temperature outside the cha
81. button in the Devices tab or you can skip this step and try to connect to the device first Important The remote device must have authentication enabled otherwise the PIN authentication will fail Highlight a device click on the Set Pin button and type the PIN You will receive a message either that the PIN has been successfully validated or that it has been rejected If the PIN has been validated an asterisk appears in the PIN column in the Devices list box indicating that this device has a PIN set Once a PIN is entered it is saved in the registry To remove the PIN e Choose Set PIN and press lt ENTER gt Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 119 Chapter 5 Configuration The Servers Tab m If the 7535 7530 attempts to connect to a remote device that has Authentication enabled and does not have a required PIN set an Authentication Request dialog box appears Enter the PIN and tap on OK to connect the devices 5 6 2 The Servers Tab Cal i s 41450 Figure 5 33 The Server Tab The Bluetooth connection is initiated from your 7535 7530 to the remote device therefore the 7535 7530 is called the client and the remote is called the server The Servers tab displays the server profiles that can be activated in your 7535 7530 There is currently one server profile available Serial Tap on the checkbox to activate the server and it will display the assoc
82. by the values specified in the X increment and Y increment parameters X increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view The value assigned here doesn t take effect until Use Increment is set to Y Y increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view The value assigned here doesn t take effect until Use Increment is set to Y 6 18 1 Split Screen 04 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs A This parameter allows you to split the display view so that more than one application screen can be displayed at the same time The split screen parameters Type and View IDs are used to tailor the screen view for your needs Type And View IDs The Type parameter determines how a screen will be split The 7535 7530 supports up to four application screens The View IDs parameter determines which application screens will be displayed in each pane of the split screen Moving Between Split Screens on page 263 describes how to move the cursor from one split screen to the next Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 261 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Splitting And Displaying Screens 6 18 1 1 Splitting And Displaying Screens Before splitting the screen you need to determine which applications should appear in each pane of the split screen The avai
83. charged discharged and then charged again before use Jf the battery is fully discharged and charged on a regular basis recalibration should not be necessary When the hand held is switched off it goes into a low power suspend state but continues to draw a small amount of power from the battery This should not be an issue unless the unit is left in suspend state for more than a week in this case the battery should be removed Batteries left unused for durations of more than one or two months should be fully charged discharged and then charged again before use This recali brates the gas gauge and allows the internal electronics to determine the actual capacity of the battery Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 61 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Storing Batteries 3 10 1 Storing Batteries Long term battery storage is not recommended If storage is necessary Always try to use a first in first out approach to minimize storage time Lithium Ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures Store bat teries at temperatures between 0 C and 20 C Always charge batteries to 40 to 60 before storing them Batteries can be damaged by an over discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit To minimize storage degradation recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60 every 4 or 6 months to prevent
84. concrete Figure 8 7 E1022 Decoded 1D Imager Scanner Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 363 8 9 5 1 Chapter 8 Specifications Depth Of Field E1022 Depth Of Field E1022 Bar Code Width Max Distance ie panig m mm mil cm inch cm inch 0 1 16 2 6 4 23 0 9 0 0 2 8 23 001 9 0 26 4 10 4 0 3 12 26 2 10 3 36 0 eS 0 5 20 34 5 13 6 49 2 19 4 1 40 49 2 19 4 49 2 19 4 Figure 8 8 E1022 Depth Of Field 8 9 6 Symagery X5303 Imager Parameter SE X5303 Optics 1 3 megapixel 1280 x 1024 Field of View at 6 inches 10 3 in x 8 2 in Pitch Angle 45 Skew Angle 45 Ambient Light Total darkness to 100 000 lux full sunlight Minimum Contrast 10 Targeting Center locating 623 nm LED Decode Software Suites and Symbologies Supported Linear Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII UPC A A2 A5 UPC E E2 E5 EAN 8 13 JAN I20f5 Code 128 Codabar NW7 RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded RSS 14 Truncated PDF417 plus as above PDF417 microPDF417 Composite CC A CC B CC C image capture and signature capture Matrix plus as above Data Matrix QR Code Maxicode Aztec Code Planet Postnet Royal Mail 4SCC 4 State postal codes from Australia Canada Japan Korean Post 3of5 Power Supply Requirements 2 5 5 5 V DC compatible with direct powering from a lithium cell 364 Ps
85. decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 1 to 55 Check Digit Verification When this parameter is enabled the integrity of a Code 39 symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms L Note Only those Code 39 symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are decoded when this parameter is enabled Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must to enabled Full ASCII If this parameter is enabled the characters 9o and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 167 Chapter 5 Configuration Code 128 Decode Performance If this parameter is enabled one of three decode levels can be chosen in the Decode Performance Level parameter Decode Perf Level This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or aggressiveness for Code 39 symbols Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation this is useful when scanning very long and or truncated bar codes Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of betwe
86. determined by symbol length and scan angie Figure 8 3 SE 923HS Decode Zone Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 359 Chapter 8 Specifications SE 1524ER Extended Range Scanner 8 9 4 SE 1524ER Extended Range Scanner Parameter SE 1524ER Light Source Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Scan Rate 35 5 scans sec bi directional Scan Angle 13 5 0 7 Scan Patterns Linear Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25 absolute dark light reflectance mea sured at 650 nm UPC EAN Code 128 UCC EANI28 RSS Code eybologics 39 Code 93 1 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI Laser On Time Aim Duration Power Mode Trigger Programmable Mode Bi directional Redundancy Symbology Parameters types lengths Data formatting Serial Parameters Beeper Tone Scan Angle 12 position ZIF connector Symbol Standard SSI Interfaces Interface with logic level serial data communications plus trigger beeper and decode LED signals Ambient Lab Artificial 450 ft candles 4 844 Lux Sunlight 4 000 ft candles 86 112 Lux Operating Temperature 22 to 140 F 30 to 60 C chassis temperature Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Input Voltage 3 3 VDC 10 Scanning Current 210 mA typical 240 mA max Eomer Motor on Current 150 mA typical 170 mA max Standby Current 60 uA Shock 2000 G Table 8 6 SE 152
87. e Diod i eig s 318 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 219 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Tekterm Application 6 1 The Tekterm Application Tekterm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers The 7535 7530 includes unique features that support Tekterm a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers 6 Additional Keyboard Functions In addition to the standard keyboard functions see The Keyboard on page 40 Tekterm supports function keys softkeys and macro keys 6 2 1 Function Keys And Softkeys The 7535 7530 is equipped with a series of function keys each of which is defined in the application software Depending on the type of keyboard on your hand held 58 key or 36 key 7535s and 63 key or 37 key 7530s the number and location of the function keys on the keyboard varies slightly 6 2 1 1 7535 Function Keys 58 Key Keyboard Function Keys The 7535 58 key keyboard is equipped with thirty function keys Function keys FI to lt F6 gt are located across the top of the keyboard and are directly accessible akey combination is not required Function keys lt F7 gt to lt F30 gt are colour coded in blue print above the alpha keys and are accessed using a key combination lt BLUE gt followed by the appropriate alpha key
88. e ees an a a ed ae as ae beatae 179 SLOAI6 BANS sit srt ce tea 8 m rr Rae das 179 5 10 4 7 UPC EAN Shared Settings 179 5 10 4 8 Interleaved20f5 22222 0000004 180 5 10 4 9 Discrete20 5 180 5 10 4 10 Codell eA 180 SADA 11 Godabar lt a ede eR RS 180 5 10 44 T2 Code 93 io erste ta wee e T Sec WS 181 5 10 4 13 MSI Plessey 2A 181 3 10 5 Im agets e ud ete BOE ehe ed Bere ege En a ae s 181 5 10 5 1 Options Imager llle 182 5 10 5 2 Code 397 a ee tek e RUE de WU ern 183 10 5 3 Code 128 ye v dues d EN dex us 183 S 10 5 4 UPE EAN oros ur Rod E a eus decr AE A 183 1035 5 CodabaE i 5s os chk en tette eure es 184 5 10 5 6 Code 93 os cre Poe Oe ES PE 184 5 10 5 7 Interleaved20f5 222r 184 5 10 5 8 Postal Australian llle 184 5 10 5 9 Postal Japanese llle 185 5 10 5 10 Postal Korean ee a 185 5 10 5 11 Postal PlaNET 185 5 10 5 12 Postal PostNET 185 5 10 5 13 Postal Royal 185 5 10 5 14 2D DataMatrix llle 186 5 10 5 15 2D Maxicode e 186 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 87 Chapter 5 Configuration 5 10 5 16 2DPDF 417 ees 5 10 5 17 2D Micro PDF 417 llle 5 10 5 18 2DQR Code llle 5 10 5 19 2D RSS Code llle 3 10 5 20 AZ T edere Rom do Se Batch 5 10 5 21 Composite lll
89. entry field pressing the RIGHT arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead If you ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right To add another ASCII character in the string entry field next to the one you ve already chosen Type a numeric character for example type the number 7 e Next press the lt BKSP gt key 246 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters and select another character Entering Information In A String Entry Field In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter you can also type text in a string entry field Type the required text in the string entry field including letters numbers and symbols Press lt ENTER gt to save the text Entering Unicode Values Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium To enter a UnicodeTM value for one time use e Press and hold down the ALT key while typing a four digit decimal value that represents the Unicode character you want to display Release the lt ALT gt key AN Important Ifyou have a set of Uni
90. from the base station the 7530 channel quality decreases If the channel quality falls to below 46 the unit begins searching for a new channel A value from 1 to 200 can be assigned to this parameter Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 145 Chapter 5 Configuration Power Tab Late TX Limit The value entered for this parameter measured in milliseconds sets the maximum allowable deviation time from the start of a response window during which an 7530 can make a transmission After this threshold the transmission will not be attempted and the 7530 will try again at the next opportunity For example suppose this parameter is set to 5 From the beginning of the response window the 7530 can be up to 5 milliseconds late sending a transmission Beyond this threshold the transmission is not attempted The hand held waits for the next opportunity The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 and 10 the default value is 2 Test Polling Values Tap on the Test Polling Values button to test the polling values indicated in this dialog box without committing them to memory To commit the new polling values to memory e Tap on the OK button the dialog box is closed and the new values are saved To discard the new values and retain the existing values e Tap on the X button at the top of the dialog box 5 9 4 Power Tab Info Channel Protocol Power Radio v Enable Power Saving Idle Poll L
91. in the menu with which you want to work 72 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE The Desktop E o My Internet Computer Explorer Figure 4 5 Start Menu If you re using the keyboard e Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item and press ENTER or If the menu item has an underlined character e Type the underlined alpha character for example to display the Power Info dialog box type the letter p 4 4 1 The Desktop Choosing the Desktop option from the Start Menu displays the 7535 7530 desktop Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 73 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Security Settings 4 4 Security Settings Choosing the Security option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can define the access level for the 7535 7530 Supervisor or User Security Level Supervisor Password m Set Password Configure Figure 4 6 Security Levels Assigning The Supervisor Security Level The security level is represented by an icon in the shape of a lock in the taskbar The security levels define the options accessible to the operator in the Start Menu and the taskbar By default the security level is set to User restricting access to only the most basic Start Menu items To allow access to all the Start Menu and taskbar options Inthe Security Level dialog box select the radio button next to Supervi
92. is disabled set to N the key that causes the hand held to transmit is not sent to the host as part of the transmitted data When enabled set to Y the key that causes a transmission is sent after the page data has been sent to the host This parameter applies only to block mode FETM When the Format Effector Transfer Mode FETM parameter is disabled set to N Format Effectors are inserted in data sent to the host or included in data when transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the Format Effectors are not inserted into the data sent to the host and are not included in the data transferred to the console or serial ports 278 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes GATM When the Guarded Area Transfer Mode GATM parameter is disabled set to N only unguarded data is transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y both guarded and unguarded data can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports MATM When the Multiple Area Transfer Mode MATM parameter is disabled set to N only the selected area containing the cursor can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y all selected areas can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports This mode is s
93. is not running and the Enable driver checkbox is checked the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is closed using the OK button fL Note When the driver is not running no network status or signal strength can be displayed Since all currently supported GSM modems are automatically detected the Enable automatic port detection checkbox should always be checked If this checkbox is not checked a serial port can be selected manually This experimental feature allows the driver to be used with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an external GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through Bluetooth An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115 2kbit s 8bit no parity and hardware flow control 214 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Modem Information 5 12 5 5 Modem Information Modem Info E Type GSM GPRS IMSI 302370121598076 Phone 14165551212 Home Ra Figure 5 105 Modem Data The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited they only display information about the 7535 7530 modem If the network operator has not programmed a user s phone number into his SIM the Phone field remains empty If the main menu shows an error status at least partial modem information may be available Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 215
94. is shipped with a user manual It is critical that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 329 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Installation 1 6 1 Installation Keep the combo charger away from excessive dirt dust and contaminants The combo charger will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F It is recommended that this charger be operated at room temperature between 18 C and 25 C 64 F to 77 F for maximum performance After unpacking the unit e Visually inspect the charger for possible damage e Install the IEC power cord and apply power A green LED in the lower right corner of the front panel lights to indicate that power is present The charge LED flashes momentarily at powerup The charger is now ready for operation 1 6 2 Operator Controls The combo charger has no operator controls or power switch 1 6 3 Using the Combo Charger With The 7535 1530 e Gently slide the 7535 7530 into the cradle portion of the combo charger until lightly latched An icon is displayed indicating that the 7535 7530 is properly installed in the combo charger The battery charge LED on the 7535 7530 lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging may begin It is safe to leave the 7535 7530 in the combo charger cradle while it is not in use the battery will not
95. it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit If this parameter is set to Two Check Digits it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 154 for details 5 10 2 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled the Mod 10 check digit is calculated This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit ITF Check If this parameter is enabled the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated 160 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration MSI Plessey Include Check If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 154 for details 5 10 2 12 MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Plessey One Check Digit If this parameter is enabled it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit Include Check If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 154 for details 5 10 2 13 Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled the Mod 10 check digit is calculated This calculation is the same as th
96. laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT PSION TEKLOGIX INC FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFI CATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT PSION TEKLOGIX INC HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND MS HAS RELIED UPON PSION TEKLOGIX INC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all faults THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCU RACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WAR RANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON MS Note on Java Support The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manu
97. mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following operator injury operator visibility obstruction operator distraction and or poor ease of egress for the operator Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consider ation especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables If you are unable to obtain suitable advice contact Psion Teklogix for assistance see Appendix A Support Ser vices And Worldwide Offices Note also that for better protection the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access In addition for safety reasons only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle and securely tighten the hex and wing screws The most effective way to mount the picker cradle is to use the four 8 32 threaded inserts on the rear of the unit Bolts must not extend more than 10mm 3 8 into the cradle To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable leave a 4 clearance at the bottom of the cradle Leave a 7 minimum clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the hand held Also remember to leave at least a 3 clearance at the sides of the cradle to allow acti
98. option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon and the security level These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide additional information Choose Shortcut System Tray When System Tray is chosen the taskbar icons become accessible To display the dialog box attached to an icon e Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon for example the security icon e Press ENTER to display the security level dialog box 78 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Shortcuts Cyde Tasks When Cycle Tasks is selected and the Task Manager is not open you can cycle through active applications To cycle through your active applications e Choose Shortcuts Cycle Tasks or Press ALT TAB The Task Manager The Task Manager allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task To display the task manager window Tap on Shortcut Task Manager or Press ALT lt ESC gt Active Tasks NETWLAN1 Switch To End Task mo mes gt 5lto i OF Figure 4 12 Task Manager Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 79 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Settings 4 4 5 Settings The Settings sub menu includes the following settings Control Panel Network and Dial up Connections and Taskbar and Start Menu E c My Internet Computer Explorer
99. or ignored e Double tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options Highlight an item and tap on OK When Addendum is set to Disabled the scanner does not recognize an addendum If this parameter is set to Optional the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists appends it to the main bar code When the parameter is set to Required the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Prefix Suffix Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialog box resets the data to zero Suffix Char This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialog box resets the data to zero Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added ISLA Note The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character For example if lt BKSP gt is pressed the usual action for that key is per formed If your hand held is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emu lation applicatio
100. ouo serve Pd a TEE a a 120 5 6 3 Outgoing Tab 2 2 22 121 5 6 4 Active Com Tab 122 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 85 Chapter 5 Configuration 5 6 5 The Properties Tab 2 2 2 20 0 002 eee ee ee 123 5 6 6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 00 4 124 Sof Total Recall coria ets eae he VERD coe too Se ps 130 5 7 1 Creating A Backup Profile 130 5 7 2 Restoring A Profile o 135 5 8 IPv6 Support 22s 136 5 9 Narrow Band Radio Setup 7530 Only 137 O Tabs 20x hE m fae ey ete in Da Hs I ae 137 3 9 2 Channel T b 4 eer ede diet Dike the rode 140 5 9 3 Protocol Tabe s iut 42a ae OE EE aaa 144 3 9 4 Power Mabe sive etre Ble water epus Rm HT QUT pleri 146 5 9 5 Radio Tab Xica Aw et dy A REI Se Y MR 147 5 10 Scanner Properties Setup oaa 150 5 10 17 BarGodes ye 4a eo acd Bag ee ede a IA PU RENS 150 5 10 2 Non Decoded Scanners 2 0000005 152 5 10 2 1 Non Decoded Options 153 5410 22 Code 39 ove EA ee hese et p RO gees 153 5 10 2 3 Code 128 2 oS wk Se Ee de asus 155 5 10 24 EAN 13 ien Ro heck Bee deg bad dor P Rus 156 35 10 2 5 BAN a ok Ree x eue aas 158 5 10 2 6 UPCGA vete vr el 158 3 10 2 7 UPCE esi etate rer pre 159 5 10 2 8 Codabar ss v ae RR RE 159 5 10 2 9 Code93 ee 159 5 10 2 10 Code llanta oe rA eR RV 160 5 10 2 11 Interleaved20f5
101. press lt ENTER gt at the time of connection ESC Prompt This string indicates that the user can press the lt ESC gt key to terminate a connection attempt before the connection is established Auto Login Auto Login Range Login Prompt gin see text Login see text Password Prompt word see text Password see text Password Echo Y Y N Login Failed incorrect see text The Auto Login parameters are used to define whether or not the hand held will attempt to log in automatically The Auto Login sequence is as follows 1 Host sends Login Prompt 2 Hand held responds with Login 3 Host sends Password Prompt 270 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn 4 Hand held responds with Password Host may send password echo 6 Hand held ignores password echo if Password Echo is set to Y otherwise skip to step 7 7 Hand held looks for Login Failed in next transmission from host 8 Login successful or Login failed and return to step 1 Login Prompt When the hand held receives the string assigned to this parameter it will respond with Login Login The hand held responds with this string when it receives a Login Prompt Password Prompt When the hand held receives this string it responds with a Password Password The hand held responds with this string when it receives
102. pressing F2 To adjust the display contrast e Press the BLUE key twice to lock it on and then press F1 o to darken the display or F2 Ij to lighten the display e Once you ve successfully adjusted the display contrast remember to press the BLUE key again to turn it off fL Note 3 6 3 Calibrating The Touchscreen If your 7535 7530 touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item use the Stylus Properties Contrast settings are optimized for the maximum readability However if the display jitters or flickers consider adjusting the contrast at power up dialog box in the Control Panel to recalibrate the screen e Inthe Control Panel choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Proper ties window ET x x Y Owner Password PC Connection E y Y Power Regional Remove ings Programs El Wi SNMP Teklogix Scanners System Volume amp Wireless Sounds WAN ES gt 0 9 20 Am Figure 3 6 Stylus Icon 46 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 7535 7530 Indicators e Select the Calibration tab and then choose the Recalibrate button Double Tap Calibration Options responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate Recalibrate B If y
103. programmable in the same manner as the keyboard macros For example this string can be used to automatically send the username and password when logging into the host Refer to Macro Control Panel beginning on page 255 for additional details about macros 1 bit When this parameter is disabled set to N the hand held computer transmits 8 bit controls When enabled set to Y the hand held transmits 7 bit controls This parameter applies to character mode block mode and media copy mode Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 277 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Block Mode 06 Block Mode Kbd lock Xmit key FETM GATM MATM SATM TTM EOL chars EOB chars KKZZZZZ All modes in this section affect the data stream sent to the host computer the serial port and the console port These modes apply to the Block mode Local Editing and the Media Copy function unless otherwise noted Consult the Teklogix ANSI Terminal Programmer s Manual for more information Kbd lock When this parameter is disabled set to N the 7535 7530 does not lock the keyboard after a block mode transmission When enabled set to Y the keyboard is locked after a transmission The application program must unlock the keyboard by resetting the Keyboard Action Mode KAM using the Reset Mode RM or Enable Manual Input EMI controls Xmit key When this parameter
104. quad dock and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB Ethernet converters 1 8 4 1 Network Addressing Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses there is generally no correlation between these addresses and a specific 7535 7530 hand held The host application uses standard TCP IP protocol to name locate and communicate with a specific 7535 7530 on the network If a link is established between a hand held and a host the application on the host and on the 7535 7530 must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the hand held is removed from the dock and the link is interrupted 1 8 5 Battery Charging The quad dock supplies DC power to enable the 7535 7530 internal fast charger Charge status is displayed on the hand held charge LED see Charge LED on page 48 Battery charging continues whether the unit is switched on or off Normally it takes between 1 5 and 4 hours to fully charge the 7535 7530 internal battery 334 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Troubleshooting 1 8 6 Troubleshooting The indicators applications and drivers required to use and monitor the docking station are installed on the 7535 7530 no indicators or applications are present on the docking station itself 7 8 6 1 Network Link Unsuccessful If a network link fails the 7535 7530 application alerts the operator that the link was unsucces
105. retrofitted later by an authorized Psion Tek logix service depot Service offices are listed in Appendix A Support Ser vices And Worldwide Offices Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 343 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 7535 Hand Held Computer Specifications 347 8 2 7530 Hand Held Computer Specifications 349 83 Radio Specifications o e 351 84 Internal Scanner Port 2 ee 352 8 5 Bar Code Applications e 352 8 6 RFID Applications 2 2 ees 352 8 7 Internal Scanners 2 ee 353 8 8 External Scanners 2 2222 len 353 8 9 Internal Scanner Specifications o o oo o e 353 8 9 1 SE 1200 High Performance amp Long Range Specs 354 8 9 2 SE 1200 Advanced Long Range amp SE 2223PDF Specs 355 8 9 2 1 DecodeZones ee 356 8 9 3 SE 1224HP SE1200WA amp SE 923BS 357 8 9 3 1 DecodeZones e e AEE EAE aaa E R 358 8 9 4 SE 1524ER Extended Range Scanner 360 8 9 4 1 DecodeZones o o y A E a ee 361 8 9 5 Intermec E1022 Linear 1D Imager Scanner 363 8 9 5 1 Depth Of Field E1022 364 8 9 6 Symagery SX5303 Imager o 364 8 9 6 1 Depth Of Field SX5303 365 8 10 External Scanner Specifications 366 8 10 1 PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs
106. tab e Inthe P Information tab tap on the Configure button e Display the Name Servers tab al X5 Figure 2 13 Name Servers Tab The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers The format for these fields is 72 598 HHH HHH Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 29 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Advanced Features 2 3 3 Advanced Features To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box Tap the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab This window lists the available preferred networks Advanced Wireless Settings ok x Iz Use Windows to configure my wireless settings networks HERR will be given to networks at the top of this list Q Section A Up Down Delete Properties rj pd conne connect to non preferred networks Networks to access ar available y aX Figure 2 14 Advanced Settings 2 3 1 Rearranging Preferred Networks The 7535 7530 attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialog box in sequence beginning at the top of the list If you need to rearrange this list of networks move networks up and down in the list Move the cursor into the networks list and In the networks list highlight the network that you want to move up or down in the list e To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward tap on the Up or Down button 2 3 3 2 Deleting A Pref
107. the PATON REYS appropriate direction lt SHIFT gt lt RIGHT gt arrow Moves the cursor to the next unprotected area lt SHIFT gt lt LEFT gt arrow Moves the cursor to the previous unprotected area lt DEL gt Deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves cursor one position to the left lt CLR gt Erases the data in an area and moves the cursor to the first position in the area Table 6 3 Function Of Keys In Block Mode 238 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Working With Sessions 6 7 5 Working With Sessions AN Important Use only lowercase letters when entering commands at the TCP gt prompt 6 1 5 1 Establishing A New Session e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a At the TCP gt prompt e Type tel in lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address e Press lt ENTER gt e Log in as usual to begin working with the new session 6 1 5 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions To list the current sessions e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a At the TCP gt prompt e Type sess in lowercase letters and press ENTER To move to another session e Atthe TCP gt prompt type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session number to which you want to move e g Type sess 2 to move to session 2 e Press lt ENTER gt 6 1 5 3 Closing A Session To close a session e Pre
108. the serial input fields If you are using serial input fields make sure the SI mode parameter is set to field When SI mode is set to command data received by the serial port is transmitted as Passthrough data to the host fL Note Command mode is supported by SDKs but not by emulations 294 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features SI prefix This parameter determines the start of message character on serial input Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character A value of 0 zero indicates no prefix SI suffix This parameter determines the end of message character on serial input Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character A value of 0 zero indicates no suffix SI CRC This parameter enables or disables CRC validity check on serial input When enabled set to Y a packet is rejected if the CRC is not valid Also when this parameter is enabled set to Y each time a DLE P 0x10 character is encountered in the serial input it is removed and the character following it will be replaced with its 1 s complement SI Fkey This parameter allows you to choose the function key you want appended to the serial input For example entering a value of 1 appends lt F1 gt to serial input A value of 0 zero disables this parameter a suffix is not added Note
109. the screen is transmitted Replace mode In a left justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last character in the string in this case the lt BKSP gt key erases the charac ter to the left of the cursor In a right justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned The remaining characters are then shifted to the left of the cursor and the cursor is shifted to the right by one position If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most character position of the field the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased it remains in the right most position in the field When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty that is any pre filled data is not displayed Pressing the lt BKSP gt key in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep The lt BKSP gt key can delete data pre filled by the host application If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted 232 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application TESS Status Message Ina left justified field the lt BKSP gt function erases the character on which the cursor is positioned un
110. this parameter to on to enable Codabar Field Size Char Refer to page 154 for details 180 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 93 5 10 4 12 Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 Field Size Char Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 4 13 MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Plessey Field Size Char Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 Imager Scanner Properties ok x Barcodes Options Translations Scanner ers Options Code 39 Code 128 UPC A UPCE Codabar disabled Code 93 disabled Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled Postal Australian disabled Postal Japanese disabled Postal Korean disabled To change a setting press space right arrow or 3 SAMA Figure 5 78 Imager 4 E E F Tap on the Scanner dropdown menu and choose Imager Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 181 Chapter 5 Configuration Options Imager 5 10 5 1 Options Imager Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of between 0 and 3000 A value of 0 disables the t
111. through special characters 246 key function description 245 249 Strip Leading 7 55 157 Strip Trailing 7 55 158 sts session status 242 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual xix Index XX stylus touch pen using 67 Stylus Properties 1 3 Double tap stylus sensitivity 1 3 sub menus accessing 244 247 Suffix 765 suffix serial I O 295 suffix serial I O 295 Suffix Char 155 157 Supervisor security level 74 Supp Redundancy Code 128 77 Supplementals UPC EAN 7 71 supportservices 4 Suspend Shutdown menu 82 Suspend State SX5303 2D imager specs 364 symbologies IATA 2 of 5 162 symbologies bar code 150 displaying type of bar code 192 Sync Delay Polling 145 System parameters Tekterm 254 system tray 78 T tab CTRLI 267 tab field advance 229 tab vertical CTRL K 281 TAB Key 42 Tab stop mode 283 target dot duration of 753 163 182 taskbar onscreen indicators battery gauge 5 docking devices 52 modifier keys 50 narrow band radio signal quality 52 security level 52 tethered device 52 Wireless WAN 53 802 11 radio signal quality 57 using 70 task manager 79 TCP Direct connection 269 286 Teklogix security level 74 Tekterm 227 Telnet connection 269 286 Telnet connection ANSI 269 terminal Terminal ANSI 268 Terminal ANSI 268 Terminal TESS 286 Terminal ANSI Telnet Settings 270 Terminal 7535 mac displaying 241 Term Type 306 TESS 227 Hof Cols 287 Hof Rows
112. to Scanning Techniques on page 55 When a label is scanned successfully the 7535 7530 will beep if configured appropriately and the scan LED will flash Occasionally the bar code labels are poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read properly In this case use the keyboard to enter data from the label 1 2 Batteries L Note Battery specifications are detailed beginning on page 371 7535 7530s operate with Lithium Ion batteries the 7535 with a high capacity 1900 mAh battery pack and the 7530 with either a high capacity 1900 mAh battery pack or an extra capacity 2400 mAh battery 1 1 1 Lithium lon Battery Safety Precautions A Important Itis critical that this safety information be reviewed and that all warnings be strictly followed e Warning BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and must be returned to Psion Teklogix for proper disposal All used batteries must be forwarded to one of the following offices Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 323 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Lithium lon Battery Safety Precautions Psion Teklogix Inc Psion Teklogix Corp 2100 Meadowvale Blvd 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd Mississauga Ontario Suite 500 Canada Erlanger Kentucky L5N 7J9 USA 41018 Psion Teklogix S A La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France e Warning TO PREVENT the battery from leaking acid generating heat or exploding adh
113. to default values When this button is pressed a screen appears asking if you re sure you want to return all parameters to their default values e Tap on the Yes button to return values to their default settings L Note This button does not default the radio parameters set under the Radio tab 5 9 Channel Tab Narrow Band Radio 2 Jo xJ Info Charnel Protocal Power Redio Channel Number zl v Y Power Up Channel Chamel Enable List Chama Seatch Spaed C Slo Fast Channel Selection E Marudi Select Set Sitch Table Figure 5 64 Channel Tab Channel Number This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the 7530 The allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 20 The default value is 1 L Note The Channel Number dropdown menu displays only the channels that have been enabled in the Channel Enable List 140 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab Power Up Channel When this parameter is enabled checked the 7530 begins communicating on the channel specified in the Channel Number parameter when the unit is powered up This setting may prevent the migration of 7530s to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites If this parameter is disabled unchecked the unit will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was powered off Channel Enable List e Tap on the Channel Enable L
114. to display the appropriate dialog box 4 3 2 2 Customizing The Taskbar To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require Inthe Start Menu choose Settings and then Taskbar If you re using the keyboard e Press lt BLUE gt 0 zero to display the Start Menu e Highlight the Settings option highlight Taskbar in the sub menu and press ENTER Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 71 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE The Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed Taskbar and Start Menu OK General Advanced Auto hide Show Clock Show active app Show Start button Sa gt Salto i OF Figure 4 4 Taskbar And Start Menu Settings Tap the stylus on the items you want to activate or deactivate The check mark indicates active items If you re using the keyboard Highlight the options you want to activate and press the lt SPACE gt key to select them A check mark indicates active items 4 4 The Start Menu Note Some of the Start Menu items may be disabled based on the 7535 7530 s lm current security settings The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application To display the menu e Press BLUE 0 zero Note If the Windows Start button is displayed tap on the Start button in the taskbar Tap on the item
115. types of connections 802 IQv2 9010t TCP Direct or Telnet Keep in mind that choosing Telnet allows the hand held to communicate directly with the host Settings IL Note The Settings sub menu is not available when 802 10v2 is selected as the Conn Type In addition this sub menu varies depending on which option you ve selected Telnet or 9010t Telnet Settings Range Host See text Port 23 0 32767 Terminal Type VT220 see text Enter Prompt Press ENTER to connect see text ESC Prompt Press ESC to cancel see text Auto Login N Y N Func Key Remap N Y N Arrow Key Remap N Y N 9010t Settings Range Host see text Port 9999 0 9999 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 269 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format HHH HHH or a host name if DNS is used Port Port specifies the 9010t TCP Direct or Telnet port number The default 9010t port number assigned is 9999 the maximum allowable value The default Telnet port number assigned is 23 with a maximum allowable value of 32767 Terminal Type Terminal Type is used to inform the server of the type of terminal the hand held is emulating This information is used by the server alone and has no affect on the 7535 7530 ENTER Pmpt This string indicates that the hand held is waiting for the user to
116. when it is not detected during the scan The PIN column indicates whether you have a PIN password set for the device At this point you can either query for services or set the PIN for each device Once you highlight a device in the list box both the Services and Set PIN buttons become available Services A discovered device may display several service profiles that it can use to communicate and you will want to activate the type you need Supported profiles that can be activated include DUN Dial Up Networking service Printer serial service and LANPPP LANAccessUsingPPP service ASync ActiveSync is another available profile e To start the service scan highlight a device in the Devices tab list and then click on the Services button or double click on the device entry fL Note If the remote device is out of reach or turned off it can take a consider able amount of time for the Services dialog box to appear it may appear to be frozen Once the device s service profiles are displayed in the Services list box Highlight the service to be activated e Press lt SPACE gt or right click to display the Activation menu The Activation menu contains four options Activate Authenticate Outgoing and Encrypt Once the service is successfully activated the assigned port if applicable will appear in the Port column of the Services list box You can choose to use BSP or COM as the port name BSP is the latest Micros
117. window colour scheme on the unit desktop 90 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons gt Keyboard Keyboard Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated char acters It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity Jo Volume amp Sound Volume amp Sounds c Mouse e Owner Owner Allows you to adjust the volume of the sound emitted to indicate events like warnings key clicks and screen taps This option also allows you to tailor sounds wave files emitted from your unit 2 Mouse Properties For units equipped with touchscreens this icon allows you to customize the sensitivity and speed of the stylus double tap Provides fields in which you can specify owner information A Notes tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up Network ID tab information is used to access network resources This information should be provided by your System Administrator a Password Password e EN Power Power Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit Once assigned password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place Refer to Security Settings on page 74 for details Displays battery pack power status Alternately battery status can be ac
118. 0 Operating RFID Scanner Modules e Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger When the scan button or trigger is pressed a red oval shaped light the framing marker is displayed Centre the framing marker in the field either in the centre of the bar code you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to be scanned Illumination LEDs will flash and a picture of the bar code s is taken 3 8 1 Operating RFID Scanner Modules The RFID module is a short range device Configuration is not required for the RFID reader AN Important For successful reads the distance from the hand held to the RFID tag varies depending on the type of tag Reading An RFID Tag e Turn the hand held on Wait until the unit has booted up completely e Position the scanner window of the 7535 7530 no more than 1 centimetre from the tag Depending on the type of tag you are reading you may actu ally need the 7535 7530 scanner window to touch the RFID tag To test how the unit reads and writes RFID tags a demonstration application has been provided The demo application RfidReader is located in the Windows folder This demo application performs the following tasks Loadsthe internal RFID device driver and displays driver device information Reads the in range tag data when the scan trigger is pressed e Converts the tag data to text format and outputs the text to the keyboard buffer Provides
119. 1 Recording A Macro Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key You can type text and numbers and you can program the function of special keys into a macro e When you ve finished recording your macro sequence press the key sequence lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt ENTER gt or choose the Stop Recording button A new screen displays the macro sequence you created The Save Macro button is highlighted e Press lt ENTER gt to save your macro L Note Ifyou want to discard the macro you ve just created highlight the Discard Macro button and press ENTER Executing A Macro To execute a macro e Press the macro key to which you ve assigned the macro For example if you created a macro for macro key 1 press lt M1 gt to execute the macro 102 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Unicode Mapping Deleting A Macro To delete a macro e Inthe Macros tab highlight the macro number you want to delete e Choose the Delete Macro button 5 5 2 5 Unicode Mapping Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Unicode Mapping tab a U 0061 b U 0062 Y c U 0063 5n i OF Figure 5 12 Unicode Mapping The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and lt CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt states to Unicode values This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value For example the sampl
120. 12 5 3 Network Configuration 2 5 12 5 4 Driver Mode Configuration s 5 12 5 5 Modem Information 88 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Remote Desktop Connection 5 Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is a 7535 7530 application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the 7535 7530 Windows CE NET device Refer to the following website for step by step information about setting up this connection http www microsoft com WindowsXP pro using howto gomobile remotedesktop default asp 5 2 Pocket PC Compatibility The 7535 7530 supports the AYGShell API set that allows Pocket PC compatible applications to run on the hand held Windows CE NET 4 2 is designed to include application programming interface API compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in units running Windows CE NET 4 2 The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 based applications and Windows CE NET 4 2 based devices http msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us dncenet html WINCENET_CEPCC_App asp 5 3 The Control Panel The Windows CE NET Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you can set a variety of system wide pr
121. 2 specifications 7535 371 Index battery charger safety instructions 325 326 battery pack 323 325 battery safety 323 326 battery See also batteries 323 Baud 89 190 310 Baud Rate Modulation 148 beacons received rb 242 beacon timeouts bt 242 Beam Lockout 297 beeper adjusting volume 53 description of beep conditions 53 volume adjustment using the BLUE key 53 bell CTRL G 281 Bi Direction Redundancy 64 Binary print 292 BKSP DEL Key 42 BKSP DEL Key TESS sessions BKSP key behaviour in 231 TESS sessions DEL key behaviour in 232 BKSP DEL key BKSP DEL key ANSI 287 blinking video attribute 275 298 Block Cursor 267 block mode ANSI 238 278 279 Bluetooth radio changing device name 122 device service profiles 1 8 ISM band 116 PINs for devices 119 radio configuration 116 129 Bluetooth setup 1 6 GPRS setup 124 peripherals 338 Bluetooth specs 351 bold video attribute 274 298 Bootloader Shutdown menu 82 bootnum 802 1Q 241 802 IQ displaying 241 Bright For backlight 96 Brightness 5 5 Brk for Attn 304 BSP Bluetooth Controls 123 bt beacon timeouts 242 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual iii Index Buffer 3 ca cellular address 242 cable diagrams C calibrating touchscreen 46 114 cellular address ca 242 Cellular Radio Address 44 Center Bar Code Only Imager 782 CH Bluetooth Controls 1 9 changing password Start Menu security 76 changing softkey labels Label F1 F
122. 20 2 Port Parameter Settings The parameters for the Tether Port Console Port PR RS232 and PR Tether are identical r 04 Settings Range Character Set see text Baud 9600 see text for range of baud rates Data Bits 8 6 8 Parity none none odd even mark space Stop Bits 1 1 1 5 2 Flow Ctrl None None Software Hardware Both Buffer 512 1 2048 Retries 3 1 100 Input Tmo 2 1 100 Output Tmo 5 1 100 Shared N Y N Test N Y N Character Set These menus define the character set for the 7535 7530 port Important When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed a right arrow character is used as a substitute r Char Set ISO N IBM Y DEC N Misc N This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer In this menu the Y or N are used to visually guide you to the selected character set For example in the sample menu above the Y next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 309 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Port Parameter Settings Choosing A Character Set To choose a character set Position the cursor on the appropriate item for example ISO and press lt F1 gt to display the character set options e To activate a character set press the RIGHT or lt LEFT gt arrow key to s
123. 288 All Fld Video 298 Append Enter 296 Append F0 296 Applications menu 267 BKSP key behaviour 23 Blink video attrib 298 Bold video attrib 298 Colour Override 289 configuration 228 Conn Type connection type 286 Cont Nxt Fld 296 CTRL commands 230 cursor movement in edit modes 230 DEL key behaviour 232 Disable Beep 293 displaying version number 233 Display menu using 228 edit modes 230 Enh Edit Mode 299 Enter On Arr 298 Enter To FO 296 299 Entry Mode 299 Fcursor mode 230 Field mode 230 Field Order 297 Field parameters 297 Host Connection Type 287 Ign Bcode fld 299 Insert mode 230 Kbd Locked 295 keyboard lock 293 matching fields via data stream 290 milestone 293 modes edit 230 multiple sessions 267 number of columns in screen 287 number of rows in screen 288 Pages Saved 288 Port 287 query command 288 Remap Passthru 293 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Replace mode 230 resetting a TESS session 234 Reverse video attrib 298 running multiple sessions 228 selecting asession 228 settings 285 300 status message 233 switching between hosts 292 Terminal 286 Tests 291 Valid Numerics 299 video attributes 298 802 IQ connection 286 9010t connection 286 TESS Settings character attributes 289 character sets choosing 290 Connection Type Telnet amp TCP Direct 286 Fields parameters 297 Scanner parameters 296 screen settings 287 Test 3 1
124. 3 SCAN 42 SHIFT 4 softkeys 223 SPACE 42 TAB 42 keyboard mapping Scan See 3 6 Keyboard Properties 98 99 backlight 99 one shot mode 00 key function field advance tab 229 field backspace 229 field exit 229 home 229 tab field advance 229 Key Index assigning 26 Key Repeat tab 98 keys alpha keys 36 key keyboard 43 emulation keys IBM 5250 229 transmit key 278 L Label F1 F4 275 288 labels changing softkey Label F1 F4 275 labels changing softkey Label F1 F6 288 LANAccessUsingPPP service Bluetooth 118 Laser On Time 63 Late TX Limit Polling 746 launching DOS 243 Parameters menu 243 Tekterm 243 Lcl Process 235 293 LED charge 48 functions 7535 47 receive 49 scan 49 transmit 49 LED Scan See Brightness 3 5 LF CR CTRLJ 281 LF character 282 Newline 282 Linear Decode 72 Linear Security Level 763 Line Offset 3 3 Line Scrolling 3 5 LITERAL key F5 223 Lithium Ion batteries installing 38 removing 38 local editing mode ANSI 238 276 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Local echo mode 280 menu 235 procedures 235 process 235 293 Save on Reset 295 Location 195 LOCK B message 234 288 locked keyboard 278 293 locked 7535 292 LOCK H message 234 288 lock time decreasing with queuing mode 236 Login ANSI Telnet Settings 27 Login Failed ANSI Telnet Settings 27 Login Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 271 Lower ANSI Host Char Set 284 Low Level screen Narrow
125. 3 9 Input 793 input bar code only fields 228 bar code reader 323 I O fields 294 Input tmo 377 insert mode 282 299 Open Fky Only 299 Output tmo 3 replace mode 282 299 serial O 295 serial I O fields 228 Serial In Out 294 Input Panel control panel 93 Input Tmo 377 Insert mode 230 insert mode 282 299 installation hand strap 18 pistol grip 19 integrated scanner option 53 Intensity 7035 backlighting 96 00 Interleaved 2 of 5 160 173 180 184 Internet Explorer 77 Intl EBCDIC 303 306 IP address assigning 28 IP for SysReq 303 ISBT 128 68 ISM band Bluetooth radio 1 6 ITF Check Discrete 2 of 5 symbology 161 ITF Check IATA 2 of 5 symbology 162 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual ix Index X ITF Check 12 of 5 symbology 160 I2of5 Short Code 753 K Kbd lock 278 Kbd Locked 295 Kbd Modes 280 282 keyboard compatibility with VT220 ANSI keyboard 237 DEC Cursor Keys 282 disabling the keyboard 282 function keys 237 Kbd modes 280 282 key repeat 98 99 lock 278 293 lock messages 234 one shot mode 700 36 key keyboard 43 58 key 42 Keyboard Tekterm 255 keyboard backlight 45 keyboard keys 40 ALT 42 arrow keys 4 BKSP 242 CTRL 42 DEFAULT key F3 223 DEL 42 ESC 42 function keys accessing 22 222 LITERAL key F5 223 macro keys 101 224 255 modifiers 40 navigating using the keyboard 67 NEXT key F1 223 one shot mode 700 PREVIOUS key F2 223 SAVE key F4 22
126. 30 Hand Held Computer User Manual xxiii
127. 338 7 11 1 Picker Cradle Mounting Recommendations 339 7 11 1 1 Mounting Template o o 339 7 11 2 Wiring Guidelines o o e e 339 7 11 3 Using The Picker Cradle 0 o 340 7 11 4 Maintaining The Picker Cradle 340 7 11 5 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles 340 7 11 6 Powered Cradle Installation o 341 7 11 6 1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle 342 7 11 7 The Port Replicator llle 343 322 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories External Bar Code Readers 1 External Bar Code Readers 7 1 1 PowerScan Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners f IM Note Refer to PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs on page 368 and eee PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs on page 366 for detailed specifications The 7535 7530 supports Psion Teklogix PowerScan industrial bar code scanner with standard long range and extra long range options To connect this scanner to the 7535 7530 attach the device to the tether port at the upper right side of the 7535 7530 Before using the bar code reader you may need to change some parameters Review your Power Scan Programing Guide PSC for details 1 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader Note For helpful scanning tips refer
128. 35 7530 the value assigned at the Primary Port and Secondary Port parameters determines which port the ANSI print command will identify and use as primary and secondary The allowable options are Any Available Ist printer 2nd printer 3rd printer 4th printer Ist Serial 2nd Serial 3rd Serial 4th Serial and Disabled Async In When this parameter is enabled set to Y the serial async port is ready to receive input at all times Start End These parameters specify the start and end characters of input received from the serial async port 6 19 1 7 Host Char Set The Host Char Set menu allows you to specify a character set in the Lower and Upper character tables r 05 Host Char Set Lower ASCII ISO IR 006 Upper DEC Multinational When an 8 bit set is selected from the Lower character set the Upper character set will change to the same value The Upper character set cannot be altered until a non 8 bit value is assigned for the Lower character set To choose Lower and Upper character sets Position the cursor on the Lower or Upper parameter and press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to display the character set options 284 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Anchor View Press F4 to save your selection to memory AN Important W
129. 4 Charger PAN Figure 5 23 Charger Tab Tapping in the checkbox next to Allow Battery Calibration allows the battery to be recalibrated only when necessary if the unit is inserted in a Combo Docking station 5 5 45 Card Slots This tab enables or disables power to individual CF PC Card and SDIO slots in the unit eth Zw d Figure 5 24 Card Slot Activation Remember to tap on the Apply button and then tap on OK to save your changes 112 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Stylus Properties 5 5 5 Stylus Properties L Note Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit If your screen appears to require recalibration contact your supervisor Inthe Control Panel choose the Stylus icon File View 7 X Regional SNMP Settings Storage Stylus System Manager M Jo Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp Scanners Sounds somo Figure 5 25 Stylus Icon 5 5 5 1 Setting Double Tap Sensitivity e Inthe Double Tap tab follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen Stylus Properties Double Tap Calibration Options Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between taps Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon doesn t change adj your settings using the grid above Ba
130. 4 275 288 Channel Enable List 747 Channel List editing 43 Channel Number 40 Channel Selection 42 Channel Switch Speed 4 Channel Tab Narrow Band radio 140 Character parameters TESS 289 characters appending to bar codes 155 157 Char Set choosing TESS 290 cycling through 246 decimal values of 29 EOB chars 279 EOL chars 279 Lower ANSI 284 prefix 155 157 stripping 155 157 158 suffix 155 157 Upper ANSI 284 character set Tether Console PR RS232 PR Tether Ports 309 Character Sets Host Char Set 284 character sets choosing in TESS 290 Lower ANSI 284 Upper ANSI 284 charger descriptions of 39 safety instructions 325 326 charging battery 17 Char Set TESS 290 Check Digit 160 check digit 156 159 160 161 175 Check Digit One 7 61 175 Check Digits MSI Plessey 175 Check Digit Verification 767 Check Digit Verification 12 of 5 174 Clear Entry Fields 507 Click Data scanner double click 797 Click Time scanner double click 191 CLR DEL key Local Echo mode ANSI 28 CLR Key 316 CESI Editing 173 Codabar 159 172 180 184 Codabar 172 Code 11 160 180 Code 128 155 183 Code 128 168 178 Code 128 Emulation 1 76 Code 32 Convert To 766 Code 32 Prefix 166 Code 39 153 154 Code 39 166 178 Code 93 159 173 181 184 Code 93 173 cold reset 32 Cold Reset Shutdown menu 82 Colour Override 276 289 Column Offset 3 3 columns number of in ANSI screen 274 number of in TESS screen 287 COM Blu
131. 4ER Scanner Specifications 360 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Decode Zones 8 9 4 1 Decode Zones w in cm i Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C 12 30 5 d on high quality symbols cappa t ES 8 203 h M sni 4 102 3 o SE 1524 j t EUNT o o f mas c 4 102 20k 7 5 mil 4220 M M 8 203 F J i 12 305 e ads 10 mil 340 i 15 mil d 5 0 n0 50b 20ml 195 0 K Lt et ee e in O 20 40 60 80 100 em o 50 8 101 6 152 4 203 2 254 0 Depth of Field w in cm 4 Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C 72 182 9 t on iality symbols A oh pets som MEM e 4 1219 h A s 24 510 o SE 1524 SS n n a mm 0 0 f a ERSS 610 24 61 F 48 1219 i 55 mil 72 1829 15 0 180 0 d 70 mil reflective 1367 0 il 100 mil reflective 542 0 FET AA TA in 0 120 240 360 480 600 cm o 304 8 609 6 9144 1219 2 1524 0 Depth of Fieki Near range determined by degree of reflectivity and width of bar code Figure 8 5 1524ER Decode Zone B Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 361 Chapter 8 Specifications Decode Zones Pitch Pitch Angle Scanner SS d Jo Side View Scan Beam HE co Scanner Ez y D ML 1 Top View pi a Barcode Surface NAM Scan Pattern EL Fi Specular Dead Zone 8 29 T rV Scanner L Side View Scan Beam Ba
132. 5 symbology 161 Mod 10 Check 12 of 5 symbology 160 Mod 43 Check 754 moving the display 261 288 MSI Plessey 161 174 181 msk message mask 242 multiple ANSI sessions 267 applications 267 hosts 235 TESS sessions 267 Multiple Area Transfer Mode MATM 279 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual xi Index N Name 97 name servers assigning 29 Narrow Band radio 137 Channel tab 140 Info tab 137 Low Level screen 139 Power tab 146 Protocol tab 144 Radio tab 147 statistics screen 137 narrow band radio signal quality 52 Narrow Band radio RA1001 specs 351 network Ad Hoc 25 connection monitoring 62 control panel settings 3 7 infrastructure 25 Network addresses 317 network authentication Shared Mode 26 Network Key assigning 26 Newline 282 NEXT B message 235 236 NEXT H message 235 236 NEXT key F1 223 Next X 293 NOTIS Editing 73 Null In Fields 303 Nulls In Fields 306 number of columns ANSI 274 of columns TESS 287 of pages ANSI 273 of rows ANSI 273 of rows TESS 288 Terminal ANSI 236 268 Terminal TESS 228 number system digit 56 159 numeric fields Rjct if Alpha 297 numeric parameters 245 248 numeric parameters minimum maximum limits to 245 248 O Off amp On buttons 20 39 offices list 4 off line 7535 using local procedures 235 offset viewport 3 2 On amp Off button 20 39 One Check Digit 761 175 one dimensional internal scanner 56 One
133. 5 About The 7530 Hand Held Computer ls 1 5 1 The 7530 Hand Held Computer s 1 5 2 Regulatory Labels o Hat 2 Basic Checkout Preparing The 7535 7530 For Operation 2 1 1 Equipment You Need To Get Started 2 1 2 Charging The Battery 0 2 1 3 Attaching Carrying Accessories 00 2 2 Powering Up The 7535 7530 2 22 ee 2 2 1 Installing The Battery And Switching The Hand Held On 2 3 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit 2 3 1 Assigning An IP Address o o 2 3 2 Name Servers Tab llle 2 3 3 Advanced Features 222 leen 2 4 Checking The Scanner llle 2 5 Using Microsoft ActiveSync o o 2 6 Calibrating The Touchscreen o Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS i ii Contents 2 7 Resetting The Hand Held llle eod 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Features Of Ihe 7535 2 4 Ge a ea a e RS 3 Features Of The 7530 pe 4 suck eke ty a Pe ee 3 3 The Battery outage a A A ae oR s 3 5 1 Battery Salety e g see Me eR UR ee Pe eee UR 3 3 2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack 333 Battery Chargers 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 00 eee 3 4 Switching The Hand Held On And Off 3 WhesKeyboard s as a sak woe eR a ms 3 5 1 Modifier Keys 2222s 3 522 The
134. 50 ft candles 4844 Ambient Light PUO pus Sunlight 8000 ft candles 86112 Lux Operating Temperature 22 to 131 F 30 to 55 C chassis temperature 22 to 140 F 30 to 60 C 100 duty cycle Storage Temperature 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing 5 to 95 noncondensing Power Input Voltage 5 0 VDC 10 5 5 VDC 10 Input Current 72 mA typical 230 mA typical Standby Current 50 WA max 6 5 mA max Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 355 Chapter 8 Specifications Decode Zones Parameter SE 1200ALR SE 2223 PDF Shock 2000 G 2000 G Output Power peak 1 35mW 0 86mW Table 8 2 SE 1200ALR SE 2223 PDF Scanner Specifications 8 9 Decode Zones Bar Code Read Distance i Advanced Performance Long Range Long Range Min Max Min Max Min Max 5 mil 3 0 4 5 7 5 mil 3 0 8 5 10 mil 2 5 12 5 13 0 17 5 15 mil 2 5 18 5 8 5 33 5 20 0 1 50 0 20 mil 2 5 20 5 9 5 38 5 30 0 60 0 40 mil 3 0 29 5 9 5 79 5 30 0 98 0 115 0 55 mil 3 5 35 5 9 5 89 5 27 0 Table 8 3 Decode Zones HP LR And ALR Raster Laser Scanner Bar Code Read Distance PDF Bar Codes 2223 Min Max 6 5 mil 2 5 6 5 10 mil 2 5 9 5 15 mil 25 15 5 Table 8 4 Decod
135. 6 7 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 6 7 4 Block Mode Local Editing 6 7 5 Working With Sessions e 6 8 The Radio Statistics Sereen o lll lll 6 9 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu 6 10 Working With Menus o e e 6 10 1 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus 6 10 2 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 6 10 3 Saving Changes To Parameters ln 6 10 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual v Contents 6 11 Resetting The 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer 249 6 12 The Parameters Menu 2n 250 6 12 1 Security Settings lll 250 6 13 Display Options eia px A e S D Eme n i 251 6 14 More Parameters 22s 251 6 15 Radio Parameters 22e 252 6 16 System Parameters 22e 254 6 16 1 Keyboard ici ad a p cm arg 255 6 16 2 AudiQ x AE Bea eee EE m x cem ates D 257 6 16 3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel llle 258 6 16 4 User Permissions llle 258 6 16 5 Windows Properties 2 2 e e 259 6 16 6 Auto Start es 259 6 17 Scanner Control Panel 2 2 2 ee ee eee 260 6 18 View Manager ee 260 6 18 1 Split Screens cose EE a 261 6 18 2 Custom Characters UnicodeTM 0 264 6 19 Applications sa 22s 267 6 19 1 ANSI Settings 2
136. 6 MHz 496 512 MHz Rx Sensitivity 110 dBm 19 2 kbps 4 level FSK Data Rates 4800 bps 9600 bps 19 2 kbps Bluetooth Radio SDI O form factor Transmit Power OdBm max 9dBm min Frequency Range 2 400 2 4835 RX Sensitivity 72dBm typ 75dBm max Data Rate 784Kbps Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 351 Chapter 8 Specifications Internal Scanner Port 0 4 Internal Scanner Port Compatibility Symbol SE 1200HP 1D non decoded standard range SE 1200LR 1D non decoded long range SE 1200ALR 1D non decoded advanced long range SE 1200 WA non decoded wide angle SE 2223 PDF decoded raster SE1224 1D decoded with fuzzy logic pro cessing SE 923 1D short range decoded with RFID SE 1524 ER decoded with fuzzy logic pro cessing extended range Intermec E1022 decoded Linear 1D imager scanner Symagery SX5303 2D imager 8 5 Bar Code Applications nternal 1D and 2D scan engines standard wide angle long and extra long range and fuzzy Extended range logic internal scan engine Supports decoded and undecoded tethered scanners Internal 1 3 mg pixel CMOS image capture scan engine 8 6 RFID Applications Internal combo laser scanner RFID engine Multi protocol a HF Tethered UHF reader writer Multi protocol support RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only Psion Teklogix RFID File System Multi protocol support 352 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 8 1 I
137. 64 6 18 2 2 Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window 265 6 19 Applications c id ena A ee Rem EU em S 267 6 19 1 ANSISetings 22e 268 6 19 T 1 Host COMMS s seo Ie A aee aes 269 6 19 1 2 Sereen Suam I Ree eru gue ert DAS 273 6 19 1 3 Xmit Modes uui os a RS 276 6 19 1 4 KbdModes o o e 280 6 19 1 5 Edit Modes o o 283 NS oed EHE LR 284 6 19 1 7 Host Char Set a e a ar anae a i ii 284 6 19 1 8 Anchor View 22A 285 6192 TESS Settings 2 uos cedent erede Re Rode d 285 6 19 2 1 Host Confi v ue a ee ae x RT EE 286 6 19 22 Sereen s re d ve a BE Manip ee ES 287 6 19 23 Characters a a aia b E a g e E 289 OAD DA TESS i ni dd ee E a des 291 6 19 25 Features uo a dex aie 292 6 19 2 6 Scanners ariana a Vb RASA E NL 296 6 19 2 1 Fields ick e ere e eoe 297 6 19 2 8 Anchor View dase ue siga 222A 300 6 19 2 9 Emulation 2 0 2 0200002 a A ees 300 6 20 Ports Tether And Console llle 308 6 20 1 Peripheral Port Options llle 308 6 20 2 Port Parameter Settings 309 6 20 3 Port Scan See Parameters o 312 6 20 3 1 Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 312 6 20 3 2 Scan See Keyboard Mapping 316 6 2 T ONSDWOTIS see eee eret m S Lex ms ek ee SR Ut ele 317 6 21 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings llle 317 6 21 2 802 10 V2 c 5 uk A eet euo e
138. 7530 2 2 oo llle 64 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE 4 1 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 67 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus 67 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard 67 4 2 Working With Files Folders And Programs 68 43 TheStartup Desktop 22e 69 4 3 1 TheDesktoplcons socor acs 9o e 70 4 32 The Taskbar 000 due ek ew ee ee aa 70 44 The Start Menu le 72 44 1 The Desktop i uuo REX ge e ee e 73 4 4 Security Settings 2222 74 44 3 PrOgFams op od oe dopo rho Glee se ek Rhe E d e a ee ess 77 444 Shortcuts a ee 78 4 4 SCtINGS A UR hanes 80 44 6 RUM rec sabe Man ath a as ne tpa ume ue pes 81 44 7 Shutdown 222 81 4 5 Using A Dialog Box 2 o sse 82 aper 5 Configuration z X3 5 4 5 5 5 6 Remote Desktop Connection 2l 89 Pocket PC Compatibility o 89 The Control Panel 222A 89 Control Panel Icons o o o oo 90 Basi Setup O REP ERE eee A A NINOS X 94 5 5 1 Display Properties llle 94 5 5 2 Keyboard Properties 2l 98 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties 108 5 5 4 Power Management Properties ls 109 5 5 5 Stylus Properties llle 113 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment e 115 Bluetooth Set p oa he bie ok DE PARU 0 ed 116 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held
139. 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual May 18 2005 Part No 8100063 A ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System PS LON TEKLOGIX Copyright 2005 by Psion Teklogix Inc Mississauga Ontario This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc is issued in strict confidence and is not to be reproduced or copied in whole or in part except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured goods and services Furthermore this document is not to be used as a basis for design manufacture or sub contract or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc All trademarks are the property of their respective holders Return To Factory Warranty Psion Teklogix warrants a return to factory warranty for a period of one year In some regions the warranty exceeds this period Please contact your local Psion Tek logix office for details For a list of offices see Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with altered or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details Service When requesting service please provide information concerning the nature of the failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurr
140. 7535s and 7530s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions The backlight switches on when a key is pressed and the ambient light is below the set threshold A light sensor on the front of the hand held determines the ambient light level On some displays the contrast can also be adjusted to further improve character visibility 3 6 1 Adjusting The Display Backlight The behaviour of the display backlight the ambient light threshold below which the backlight will become active and the intensity of the backlight can be specified in the Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel L Note Refer to Display Backlight on page 95 for details about the Display Properties dialog box 3 6 2 Adjusting The Contrast fL Note In addition to the manual adjustments described in this section the dis play contrast can also be adjusted using the Windows CE NET Control Panel Refer to Display Backlight on page 95 for details about this dialog box Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 45 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Calibrating The Touchscreen The display contrast can be adjusted from the unit keyboard using the BLUE key and function keys F1 and F2 Pressing F1 o darkens the display and o lightens the display Keep in mind that adjusting the contrast on a colour display is much less pronounced than on a monochrome display
141. 94 Display Properties ok Appearance Backlight I ON threshold move right to turn on off on Intensity dak 3 J bright Bright For 30 seconds y Dim For 30 seconds y When using external power keep the backlight always ON Owner Password gt Balt i Figure 6 5 Display Properties 6 14 More Parameters The More Parameters sub menus contain the Tekterm parameters and can only be accessed with the proper security password either a Supervisory or a Teklogix password Refer to Security Settings on page 74 for details Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 251 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Radio Parameters g Warning Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties Generally parameters are configured for each site during installation A LA Note Parameters can also be remotely modified using SNMP Refer to SNMP ERIT Simple Network Management Protocol Setup on page 194 for details e At the startup Display menu type a to display the Parameters menu 01 Parameters Range More Parameters See page 251 Security Supervisor See page 250 Display See page 251 To open the More Parameters menu e Double tap on More Parameters
142. A 41018 Tel 1 859 371 6006 Fax 1 859 371 6422 Email salesusa psion com INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES see also www psionteklogix com Psion Teklogix S A La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Tel 33 4 42 90 88 09 Fax 334429088 88 E mail tekeuro psion com A 2 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual APPENDIX B RD7950 InteGRaTED UHF RFID READER 7535 ONLY The RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader is an EPC compliant 900MHz RFID reader available for the 7535 hand held computer only This RFID reader is compat ible with EPC Class 0 0 and Class 1 as well as the ISO 18000 6 B protocol B I Installation To install the RD7950 in the 7535 hand held computer first attach the pistol grip Pistol Grip RD7950 i gn Screw Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual B 1 Appendix B RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only Installation Attaching The Pistol Grip Note A Phillips head screwdriver is required Do not use adhesives such m as Loctite to secure the screws These chemicals may damage the plastic casing The pistol grip is attached to the back ofthe 7535 hand held computer using the four threaded inserts in the upper part of the 7535 casing Four black 74 40 Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory Note Prior to installation make certain the trigger mechanism is securel
143. Addr is set to N the value entered in the Radio Address parameter is used Refer to Radio Address in this section for details about manually assigned radio addresses Important Ensure that all 7535 7530s grouped in the system use the same addressing process that is if you choose to use automatic radio addressing use this addressing process for all units operating in the same system If you choose to assign radio addresses manually using the Radio Address parameter use this process for all units in the same system Radio Address The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the 7535 7530 over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each hand held computer Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 253 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application System Parameters Initial RIT Round Trip Time Round trip time is the elapsed time between a hand held computer transmission and an access point acknowledgement Each 7535 7530 continuously adjusts the accept able round trip time calculating the average elapsed time over a number of trans missions If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated the computer will resend the transmission Because 7535 7530s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions a starting point or Initial Round Trip Time is required The com puter uses the time
144. C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 C to 60 C 40 F to 140 F Humidity 5 95 H non condensing Humidity in freezer temperatures 5 96 H non condensing Rain And Dust Resistance EC 529 classification IP67 Drop Durability 6 drops from 6 5 2m and 26 drops from 5 1 5m Total 32 drops to concrete Cradle shock 30g in each axis Cradle vibration 1 5g RMS PSD 4Hz 500Hz Freezer Option Heated scan window to reduce fogging Internal heat control to optimize low temperature performance and battery life Triple Cell Lithium Ion batteries for extended freezer operation 350 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Radio Specifications Approvals Safety UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No950 LVD EN60950 EMC FCC Part 15 Class B EMC Directive Class B Laser IEC 60825 1 2001 Class 2 EN60825 1 Note this product will carry the CE Mark 8 3 Radio Specifications 802 11b Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Transmit Power 100mW max for USA 50mW max for EU countries Frequency Range 2 400 2 474 for USA Canada 2 400 2 484GHz for EU Channels 1 to 11 for USA Canada 1 13 for EU countries Data Rates 1 2 5 5 and 11Mbps MIOOI Narrow Band Radio 7530 Only Psion Teklogix Proprietary Narrowband Modulation 2 4 level FSK Type III PC Card Form Factor Transmit Power IW or 0 5W Frequency Range 403 422 MHz 419 435 MHz 435 451 MHz 450 470 MHz 464 480 MHz 480 49
145. Code 39 Enable 766 PC A Check Digit 169 PC A Preamble 70 PC EAN 4 71 183 PC EAN Shared Settings 179 PC E Check Digit 70 PC E Preamble 70 PC E1 Check Digit 170 PC El Preamble 70 Verify 153 1D internal 56 2D DataMatrix 186 2D Maxicode 186 2D Micro PDF 417 176 186 2D PDF 417 176 186 2D QR Code 86 2D Raster Expand Rate 64 2D Raster Height 764 Cee cm aaa Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual xvii Index 2D RSS Code 77 187 2D Scanning Mode 64 2D UPC Half Block Stitching 72 Scan Result 792 Scan Result Time 7 92 Scan See keyboard mapping 3 6 parameters setting 312 317 port settings 308 serial number 316 viewport mapping 312 screen stylus using to navigate 67 touch pen using 67 Windows CE navigating 67 Screen parameters ANSI 273 TESS 287 screens of Cols ANSI 274 of Cols TESS 287 of Rows ANSI 273 of Rows TESS 288 Anchor View 285 300 Display Shift 260 Field Scroll 288 moving between fields 280 297 Origin Scroll 288 page size shape 273 287 positioning 288 splitting view of 261 Type and View IDs Split screen 26 Use Increment 261 x and y origin 285 300 X Increment 261 Y Increment 261 Screen Switch 258 scrolling Field Scroll 288 Origin Scroll 288 Security 153 Security Level 772 security level icon 52 Security Settings 74 changing password 76 configuring taskbar 76 level 74 Supervisor 74 Teklogix 74 User 74 security settings 250 defa
146. Computer User Manual iii Contents 5 6 1 The Devices Tab 2n 36 2 The Servers Tadeo E ae te eat es 36 3 Outgoing Tab din deck dex Ro ge ee a ce Cs 5 64 Active Conn Tab llle 5 6 5 The Properties Tab 5 6 6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 5 7 Total Recall o Re BO a RE E 5 7 1 Creating A Backup Profile 5 72 Restoring A Profile o SS IPV6 SUPPO cx co A oreet eie 5 9 Narrow Band Radio Setup 7530 Only FLT TaD e nue mm AE bes Sce Ese ded ts 592 Channel Tab 2222s 5 9 3 Protocol Tab i4 och ek Aaa dng GRE SD ur ES SIA Power Tabs is coat od rae o s Wages Ru e RS 5 95 Radio Tabs amp eR ES ERES Td 5 10 Scanner Properties Setup o 5 10 L Bar Codes 5 iaceat do aen me HUE A 5 10 2 Non Decoded Scanners o 5 10 3 Decoded Internal Scanners 5 10 4 Decoded Intermec ISCP o DLO Maser id A A a a RSS 5 10 6 Decoded External o 5 10 7 Options Tab iia da PEU a 5 10 8Translations 2222s 5 11 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Setup Sd Contact Tab rat eom ehe sedet pets me de S12 Communities Tabs ve ERR ER A ENS 5 11 3 Trap Destination Tab ee ee ee 5 11 4 Permitted Hosts Tab 5 12 Wireless WAN 45 24 e e ge a vC d 5 12 1 Taskbar Icons
147. DEL No 7530 Handheld This label is affixed below the scanner window Figure 1 11 Laser Warning Label Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 13 Chapter 1 Introduction Regulatory Labels MODEL No 7530 Handheld Figure 1 12 LED Radiation Warning Label 14 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Basic CHECKOUT 2 1 Preparing The 7535 7530 For Operation oo e 17 2 1 1 Equipment You Need To Get Started o o 17 2 1 2 Charging The Battery 2n 17 2 1 3 Attaching Carrying Accessories 0200000 0s 18 2 1 3 1 Attaching The Hand Strap 18 2 1 3 2 Attaching The Pistol Grip 19 2 2 Powering Up The 7535 7530 ra 2 r ee E 20 2 2 1 Installing The Battery And Switching The Hand HeldOn 21 2 3 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit 22 2 3 1 Assigning An IP Address 000000004 28 2 3 2 Name Servers Tab cubus VR EE a a BARS 29 23 3 Advanced Features s x Lum ee a ENSE E 30 2 3 3 1 Rearranging Preferred Networks 30 2 3 3 2 Deleting A Preferred Network 30 2 3 8 3 Changing Network Properties 31 2 4 Checking The Scanner 2 2 a 31 2 5 Using Microsoft ActiveSync laaa ee eee 31 2 6 Calibrating The Touchscreen 0 000002 eee 32 2 7 Resetting The Hand Held o 32 Psion Tekl
148. Data is transmitted as soon as the function key has been appended 0 prefix This parameter determines the start of message character on serial output Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character A value of 0 zero indicates no prefix 0 suffix This parameter determines the end of message character on serial output Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character A value of 0 zero indicates no suffix Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 295 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scanner 0 CRC When this parameter is enabled set to Y a CRC16 value is appended to the serial output message Also when this parameter is enabled set to Y for each control character in the serial output stream a DLE is inserted to precede that character The control character is replaced with its 1 s complement 6 19 2 6 Scanner 05 Scanner Range Cont Nxt Fld Y Y N Append Enter Y Y N Append FO Y Y N Mixed AIAG N Y N Rjct if Alpha N Y N Beam Lockout N Y N Cont Nxt Fld This parameter only applies to string entry data When enabled set to Y this parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the field length to continue in the next field If ContNxtField is disabled set to N OFF data will flow into the next field Append Enter When enabled set to Y
149. E gt twice displays BLUE KEY in the taskbar Battery Gauge The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides a visual indication of the remaining battery power The icon acts as a meter that is either full at three quarter level half quarter level or empty When the battery level is low approximately 15 minutes from empty a warning window pops up When the battery power is completely depleted a final warning window indicates that the 7535 7530 will be powered down If the 7535 7530 is using external AC power an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar al 4 4 q ad gt Full 15 50 25 Empty AC Connection Battery Charge The battery charge icon is displayed in the taskbar when the hand held battery is being charged 802 11 Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer filled bars within this icon al dl dal dd dd Ce Y Good Weak No Radio Reception Reception Link Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 51 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Onscreen Indicators nnil Narrow Band Radio Signal Quality A Increasing radio signal quality is represented by vertical bars within this icon aM a nn n oW Good Weak No Radio Reception Reception Link Tethered Devices When a peripheral is attached to the tether port and activated an associated icon appears in the taskbar ll v d TE Scanner USB Device RFID Serial Device Scan See
150. ED indicates whether or not your scan is successful The LED behaves as follows Scan In Progress scan LED displays solid red colour e Successful Scan scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended e Unsuccessful scan scan LED flashes red A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan While the scanner beam is active the onscreen message states SCANNING If the scan is successful the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan button or pistol trigger is released Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 55 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Troubleshooting 3 8 3 Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working investigate the following Is the unit on Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand held you are using Check any other parameters that affect the scan ning procedure or the bar code Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code Check that the bar code is within the proper range Does the hand held display the warning without scanning This suggests a hardware problem in the hand held Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code Once the scan beam has stopped check the scanner window for dirt or fogging 3 8 4 Operating One Dimensional ID Internal Laser Scanners Turn the hand held on Wait until th
151. FORMATION about chargers and docking stations refer to Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories beginning on page 321 For battery safety refer to Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions beginning on page 323 All batteries must be charged before use The battery can be charged with a variety of chargers These include 38 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Switching The Hand Held On And Off 6 Unit Gang Charger Model HU3006 charges up to six Lithium Ion batteries at one time e Portable Docking Module Model HU4001 or HU1005 and HU3220 charges the 7535 7530 battery with the battery installed in the unit e Combo Charger Model HU3002 a desktop charger that charges the internal battery along with a spare battery pack e Combo Docking Station Model HU4002 operates as both a charger and a docking station Operating as a charger both the battery installed in the computer and a spare battery can be charged simultaneously e Quad Docking Station Model HU4004 can charge the battery of up to four hand helds inserted in the docking station while transferring data through an Ethernet connection e Powered Cradle 7535 Model HU1010 7530 Model CV1010 can charge the hand held with the battery installed in the hand held It can take from 1 5 to 4 hours to charge a battery The unit s intelligent charging system protects the batte
152. Held Computer User Manual home key function 229 host multiple hosts 235 selecting a host 235 switching between hosts 292 Host ANSI Telnet Settings 270 Host TESS Connection Type 287 Host Char Set 284 Host Connection ANSI 269 TESS 286 Host echo mode 280 host select CTRL h 234 host terminal number of session tn 242 I O fields 228 IATA 2of5 162 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 229 ICD DCH controls displaying 283 Idle Poll Limit 747 IEEE radio configuring 22 Ign Bcode_fld 299 imager E1022 1D imager specs 363 SX5303 2D imager specs 364 imager 2D scanner scanning 2D 57 imager parameters 181 Include Check 756 158 159 161 162 Include Check Discrete 2 of 5 symbology 161 Include Check Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology 161 Include Chk 754 158 160 Include Country 156 Include Number Sys 758 159 Include Sym Code 128 155 incrementing parameters 245 248 Indicators 255 indicators battery gauge 5 docking devices 52 LED functions 47 modifier keys 50 narrow band radio signal quality 52 onscreen 50 scanner message 56 57 58 59 Index security level 52 status area 227 task bar 70 tethered device 52 Wireless WAN 53 802 11radio signal quality 51 inf usbstor installing D 4 usbstor updating D 2 wceusbsh installing D 4 wceusbsh updating D 2 Info Tab Narrow Band radio 37 Infrastructure network 25 initialized messages transmitted 802 IQv1 xi See xi transmitted initialize messages 242 Initial RTT 254
153. KOYSei 9 a m ER Boe qus Duk MU RE eas 3 5 3 Alphanumeric Keyboards 58 Key And 63 Key 3 5 4 Numeric Keyboards 36 Key And 37 Key 3 5 5 The Keypad Backlight 3 6 The Display minig oe BP e e EE RR ke ek es 3 6 1 Adjusting The Display Backlight 3 6 2 Adjusting The ContraSt 3 6 3 Calibrating The Touchscreen IT 7535 1530 Indicators i d tb a 3 TE EEDS o5 5o exea Rede da re d PET A 3 72 Onscreen Indicators lel 3 73 Audio Indicators less 3 8 Internal Scanners 22222 le 3 8 1 Scanning Techniques 3 8 2 Scan LED Indicators o 3 83 Troubleshooting 3 8 4 Operating One Dimensional 1D Internal Laser Scanners 3 8 5 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scanners 3 8 6 Operating Internal Two Dimensional 2D Imager Scanners 3 8 7 Operating RFID Scanner Modules 3 9 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 3 10 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time 3 10 1 Storing Batteries 2 2 ee eee 3 11 Monitoring The Network Connection Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Contents 3 12 Uploading Data In A Docking Station ls 63 3 13 General Maintenance een 63 3 13 1 Caring For The Touchscreen o o o 63 3 13 2 Cleaning The 7535
154. Low Level tab to display the Low Level statistics screen Statisties x Protocol Low Level 4lvl 19200 450 20 2 RxOk O RxHd 0 RxBd O RxEr 0 RxOv 0 TxOk 0 PE OLED SU Col 0 TxD 0 Figure 5 63 Low Level Statistics Screen Table 5 2 defines the elements of the Low Level statistics screen Statistic Description RxOk Message buffers discarded due to lack of available receive buffers RxHd Message headers successfully received RxBd Message bodies successfully received RxEr Message buffers received with detected errors RxOv Number of transmitted messages complete application messages TxOk Message buffers successfully transmitted TxEr Message buffers which failed to transmit CD Number of carrier detect changes detected Coll Number of collisions detected TxD Actual difference in time in RTC ticks between when the most recent trans mit with timestamp was scheduled to start and when it actually started TxMD Maximum Tx D value Rx X Number of extra characters received for last received message due to delay in host reporting back actual body size RxMx Maximum Rx X value MChg Number of completed mode changes Table 5 2 Low Level Statistics Descriptions Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 139 Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab Default All Parameters Tap on the Default all Parameters button to return all registry parameters
155. MS TAH Figure 5 58 Performing The Backup Choose the Backup To Flash or Storage Card button to start the process and create a profile 5 7 2 Restoring A Profile To manually restore a profile Choose Restore Selected Profile from the dropdown menu and choose the Profile Name displayed in the drop down box fL Note You can also manually restore an auto restore profile located in flash or a storage device Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 135 Chapter 5 Configuration IPv6 Support 5 8 IPv6 Support The IPv6 Support icon in the Control Panel allows you to activate IPv6 network support on your unit This internet protocol specification version 6 supports 128 bit IP addresses replacing version 4 File View x Bluetooth Certificates Date Time i Device Properties 3 Dialing i Input Panel Internet Keyboard Options 2 Mouse Network and Owner Figure 5 59 Pv6 Support Icon Choose the IPv6 Support icon to display the associated dialog box IPv6 Support ok x Enable IPv6 Support Enable IPv6 network support by checking the box below Note that if you change this setting your device wil reset to activate the change Figure 5 60 IPv6 Support Tab e Choose the checkbox next to Enable IPv6 Network Support to enable this internet protocol 136 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Narrow Band R
156. Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes L3 ifthe first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 L4 ifthe first codeword is 908 or 909 L5 ifthe first codeword is 910 or 911 176 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration 2D RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 17 2D RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology Enable Setting this parameter to on enables 2D RSS Code scanning capability Enable RSS 14 RSS 14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half Stacking the code reduces the bar code length and providing the nominal height of the code is maintained it can be omni directionally scanned Enable RSS Limited RSS Limited is restricted in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs global trade item number that begin with either a 0 or a 1 It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni directionally Enable RSS Expanded RSS Expanded uses the same application identifiers as UCC EAN 128 codes but they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high reducing the length of the symbol while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored RSS Expanded code can be omni directionally scanned Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 18 Composite Important To successfully read this type of bar code the two typ
157. Minimum 300 cycles with no degradation below 70 of nominal capacity 11 1V nominal 8 25V mn to 12 6V max 1P3S 3 series connected cells Prismatic 12 6V 0 09V 1 5 hr Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 371 Chapter 8 Specifications 7530 2400 mAh Lithium lon Battery Pack 8 14 7530 2400 mAh Lithium lon Battery Pack Technology Capacity Charge Temperature Discharge Temperature Storage Temperature Charge Cycles Voltage Cell Configuration Cell Type Max Charge Voltage Fast Charge Time Lithium Ion Li Ion 2400 mAh nominal at 300mA discharge 20 C to 8 5V minimum 2000 mAh nominal at 300mA discharge at 20 C to 8 25V 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 C 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 C Storage at elevated temperatures not recommended Minimum 300 cycles with no degradation below 70 of nominal capacity 11 1V nominal 8 25V mn to 12 6V max 1P3S 3 series connected cells Cylindrical 12 6V 0 09V 2 5 hr 372 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual APPENDIX A SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its custom ers worldwide These services include technical support and product repairs A I Technical Support Technical Support for Mobile Computing Products is provided via e mail through the Psion Teklogix customer and partner ex
158. Nand radio 139 Low Power Timeout 63 LU Name 304 LU Name Enabled 304 306 LU Name Prefix 306 L1 Set Length 67 L2 Set Length 767 M MAC address access point controller 247 MAC address 7535 241 Macro keys accessing 224 executing a macro 102 103 Macros menu accessing 101 255 recording and saving 101 36 key keyboard 7535 224 37 key keyboard 7530 224 58 key keyboard 7535 224 63 key keyboard 7530 224 maintenance 7535 63 Manual Radio Address Cellular Radio Address 144 Manual Switch Table 7 42 mapping keyboard Scan See 3 6 mapping viewport 3 2 match fields 228 MATM 279 Max Gain Imager 183 Max Illumination Imager 783 Max Integration Imager 783 Media Copy ANSI 278 Index memory resetting 249 menu local 235 Menu mode taskbar switching between apps 226 menus working with 244 message mask msk 242 messages enabling disabling next message 293 LOCK B 234 288 LOCK H 234 288 NEXT B 235 236 NEXT H 235 236 RESET Press Enter 227 Scan Indicator 92 scanner warning message 192 Scan Result 792 TESS status message 233 messages retransmitting 802 IQv1 xr See xr retransmissions 242 messages received rm 242 messages transmitted xm 242 milestone 293 Mixed AIAG 297 mnemonics ANSI 283 mode serial I O 294 Model 7000 Brightness 3 5 modifier keys 40 locking 41 One Shot Mode 00 unlocking 4 Modulation Baud Rate 48 Mod 10 Check 54 162 Mod 10 Check Discrete 2 of
159. Network Management Protocol is the protocol used to monitor and manage devices attached to a TCP IP network y Bluetooth Bluetooth Device Provides options for Bluetooth radio setup It also provides the capability to Properties use a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone as a data modem to exchange infor mation with other Bluetooth devices and provide network access 22 e Input Panel Input Panel Provides the framework for a Soft Input Panel SIP should you need to design your own SIP Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 93 Chapter 5 Configuration Basic Setup ls Total Recall Total Recall Provides access to a backup and restore utility to maintain applications and settings over cold reboots R py Support IPv6 Support Refers to a new Internet Protocol specification version 6 that has been published to use 128 bit IP addresses replacing version 4 e Wireless WAN Herm Provides access to technology like GSM GPRS and CDMA which allows wide area networking capability such as internet browsing via GSM GPRS I Narrow Band Radio for 7530 units only es This icon is displayed only if a Narrow Band radio is installed in the 7530 It provides access to the Narrow Band setup screens 5 5 Basic Setup 5 5 Display Properties Inthe Control Panel choose the Display icon File View gt x Device Dialing Displa Input Panel 9 mnm gt Internet IPv6 Keyboard Opt
160. Note Ifthe 7535 7530 is not in local edit mode the ENTER arrow lt CTRL gt and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Count parameter setting 276 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Xmit Wait This parameter determines the length of time the 7535 7530 collects keystrokes before transmitting them to the host This value is specified in increments of one 10th of a second i e a value of 10 represents 1 second If 0 zero is selected the computer transmits only according to the Xmit Count parameter fL Note If the 7535 7530 is not in local edit mode the ENTER arrow lt CTRL gt and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Wait parameter setting Dev Attr This string entry parameter specifies a device attribute string This string can be up to 16 characters long The computer sends this string to the host when it receives a DA or DECID control The example shown in the Xmit Modes screen sample on page 276 is the device attribute sent to a VAX identifying the Psion Teklogix hand held computer as a VT220 terminal This parameter may or may not be set depending on the requirements of the host computer Auto Answer This string can be up to 30 characters long and is sent by the 7535 7530 as a reply to an ENQ character from the host The Auto Answer string is
161. OR ITS SUBSIDIARIES AFFILIATES OR SUP PLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFIT LOST DATA OR DOWNTIME COSTS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS LICENSE THE USE INABILITY TO USE OR THE RESULTS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE WHETHER BASED IN WARRANTY CONTRACT TORT OR OTHER LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBIL ITY OF SUCH DAMAGES In no event shall MDC s total liability to you for all damages exceed the price paid for the license to use the Software regardless of the form of the claim Government End Users If the Software is supplied to the United States Government the Software is classified as restricted computer software as defined in clause 52 227 19 of the FAR The United States Government s rights to the Software are as provided in clause 52 227 19 of the FAR Controlling Law and Severability This License shall be governed by the laws of the United States and the State of New Hampshire As to any dispute relating to this License or the Software you further agree to jurisdiction and venue in the Federal and State Courts located in the State of New Hampshire If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion thereof to be unenforceable the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and effect Acknowledgement Your use of any software produced by MDC is based only on your acknowledgement that you
162. Re 4 7993 7330 Features 3 ue te den das QoS Ru E Sene RC IS qe 4 About The 7535 Hand Held Computer llle 7 1 4 1 The 7535 Hand Held Computer o o 8 1 4 2 Regulatory Labels o 10 About The 7530 Hand Held Computer 12 1 5 1 The 7530 Hand Held Computer o o 12 1 5 2 Regulatory Labels 22 13 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About This Manual 1 1 About This Manual This manual describes how to configure operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix 7535 and 7530 hand held computers While the function of these units is generally identical any differences are clearly described in this manual Chapter 1 Introduction provides a basic overview of the 7535 7530 hand helds Chapter 2 Basic Checkout describes the steps required to get the 7535 7530 ready for operation Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 describes the 7535 7530 features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery This chapter also provides a description of the keyboard how to navi gate in Microsoft Windows CE how to use the internal scanner and so on Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE describes the Microsoft Windows CE desktop and how to use it This chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Windows CE NET window selecting and opening icons files folders and working with a Windows di
163. Result When this parameter is enabled the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed When the trigger is released this information is cleared from the screen can Indicator When this parameter is enabled the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated Scan Result Time sec The value assigned to the Scan Result Time sec parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen Time is measured in seconds and a value of 0 zero disables the parameter When you choose this option a dialog box appears where you can enter a value IL Note To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger Good Scan Beep And Bad Scan Beep These parameters determine whether or not the 7535 7530 emits an audible scanner beep when a good successful scan or a bad unsuccessful scan is performed Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled the input barcode and the modified translated output bar code are logged in the file Flash Disk ScanLog txt Keep in mind that if the Scan Log File is enabled there is a slight performance effect when pe
164. SB devices 7 DC Power In Same as pin 4 Nn Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual C 1 Appendix C Port Pinouts Battery Contacts 9 10 11 12 Docking Station Id Identifies device attached to the docking station Resistor between this pin and ground Ground USB Device Minus When terminal operated as a USB device USB Device Plus When terminal operated as a USB device Ground 3 Battery Contacts These contacts represent right to left numbering with the docking port pointing toward you and the battery contacts facing upward l Ze 3 Battery Plus SMBUS CLK Battery ID Identifies battery type 2 cell 100K resistor to Battery Negative 3 cell 10K resistor to battery Negative SMBUS Data Battery Negative C4 7535 USB Cable PN 1010099 USB CABLE ASSY Part Number 1010099 USB BM JB5 C 2 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix C Port Pinouts 7535 USB Cable PN 1010057 C5 1535 USB Cable PN 1010057 Cable JB5 DE9 Straight Through Part Number 1010057 Male DE9 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual C 3 APPENDIX D USB SETUP APPLICATION D I USB Setup The USB Setup application PN 1000997 is used to update a Windows PC so that it can connect to a Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 System Requirements e Windows 2000 or XP e ActiveSync 3 5 or later The two driver classe
165. SS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTER RUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED FURTHERMORE LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY LICENSOR OR AN LICENSOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE IV Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual License Agreement DEFECTIVE YOU AND NOT LICENSOR OR AN LICENSOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTA TIVE ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORREC TION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THE TERMS OF THIS DISCLAIMER DO NOT AFFECT OR PREJUDICE THE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CON SUMER ACQUIRING LICENSOR PRODUCTS OTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSE OF A BUSINESS NEITHER DO THEY LIMIT OR EXCLUDE ANY LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PER SONAL INJURY CAUSED BY LICENSOR S NEGLIGENCE Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY LOCAL LAW INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL LICENS
166. Sequence 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 El Record Macro Delete Macro n a Figure 6 6 Macro Dialog Box Important Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 101 for detailed A instructions about creating macros Important For information about using the macro keys you ve created refer to Macro Keys on page 224 6 16 1 2 Indicators When the Indicators parameter is enabled set to Y onscreen indicators are displayed to indicate the operating condition of the 7535 7530 Refer to Onscreen Indicators on page 50 for a list of possible indicators Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 255 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Softkeys 6 16 1 3 Softkeys Enabling setting to Y the Softkeys parameter displays softkey labels at the bottom of the screen to indicate the function of each softkey To block the display of softkey labels set this parameter to N Softkeys are function keys which are programmed to execute specific actions when pressed Refer to Table 6 1 on page 223 for a list of softkey labels 6 16 1 4 Ctrl Panel This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the BLUE and lt ORANGE gt keys Keyboard Properties OK sel Repeat Backight One Shots Macros Enable character repeat Repeat delay Long Short OCP j
167. TRAPS Enabling Enable Authentication TRAPS allows authorization traps to be sent when a failure is detected e g an SNMP message received with a bad community name 5 11 3 2 Adding A Destination To add a new destination e Choose the Add button gt 5 ilis Is Figure 5 93 Adding A Trap Destination Type a destination in the text box provided and press lt ENTER gt Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 199 Chapter 5 Configuration Changing A Destination 5 1 3 3 Changing A Destination To change an existing trap destination Highlight the destination you want to alter in the Trap Destination tab and then choose the Change button i Manager i y 4 3 Saw i OF Figure 5 94 Changing A Destination e Make the changes to the destination and press lt ENTER gt to save the changes 5 1 34 Removing A Trap Destination To remove a trap destination Inthe Trap Destination tab highlight the destination you want to delete e Choose the Remove button A Delete Confirmation screen is displayed To remove a destination choose the Yes button or If you decide not to remove the destination choose the No button 200 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Permitted Hosts Tab 5 11 4 Permitted Hosts Tab For security reasons the Network Administrator may want to restrict SNMP node acc
168. Test Polling Values 146 Test Squelch Radio tab 148 tethered device connecting and disconnecting 59 taskbar icons 52 Tether Port settings 188 Baud 789 Data Bits 189 Parity 189 Stop Bits 1 89 tether port settings 308 threshold setting backlight 96 99 timeouts beacon bt 242 tn host terminal number of session 242 Total Recall backup profile creating 130 backup profile restoring 135 touch pen using 67 touchscreen recalibration 46 114 stylus using 67 touch pen using 67 Transfer Termination Mode TTM 279 transmissions waiting in queue TXQ 243 Transmit Check Digit 12 of 5 174 Transmit Check Digit MSI Plessey 175 Index Transmit Code 1D Char 65 transmit LED 49 transmitted acknowledgements xa 242 transmitted initialized messages xi 242 transmitted messages xm 242 transmitting data 276 278 282 298 transmit on entry field 229 trigger double click 797 Trioptic Code 39 Enable 66 troubleshooting tips scanning 56 TTM 279 turning 7535 off 20 turning 7535 on 20 TxQ messages waiting to be sent 243 typ data stream type 242 Type 261 typing in upper case 291 U UCC 128 Code 128 156 underline ASCII decimal equivalent 29 video attribute 275 nicode values entering 247 PCA 158 169 179 PC A Check Digit 7 69 PC A Preamble 7 70 PCE 159 170 179 PC EAN 771 183 PC EAN Shared Settings 179 PC E Check Digit 70 PC E Preamble 770 PC E1 Check Digit 770 PC E1 Preamble 770
169. XXX ICOO00000000 X O1NYCA1028 AL TOSHIBA Bluetooth Model SD BT2 RA4010 FCC ID CJ6MSDBO1 MSDBO1 c E SS PSION Teklogix Inc Model 7535 Handheld Terminal This product contains intel 802 1 1b LAN CF Card Model WCF2011BEWW RA2010 CI TOSHIBA Bluetooth Model SD BT2 RA4010 TEO C IO Figure 1 17 Radio Labels PSION Mississauga Ontario MASTERS Made in Canada Model 7535 12345678 Figure 1 8 Manufacturer s Label g Warning Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 11 Chapter 1 Introduction About The 7530 Hand Held Computer 1 5 About The 7530 Hand Held Computer The 7530 is a ruggedized Windows CE NET based hand held computer It is designed to withstand the harshest mobile environments including cold environments like freezers ports and yards It supports wide area mobile applications and is built using industry standards based software and hardware components making it easy to integrate existing or future site infrastructures 1 5 1 The 7530 Hand Held Computer Figure 1 9 7530 With 37 Key Keyboard 12 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Regulatory Labels Scanner Window Tether Port Docking Port Figure 1 10 7530 Scanner Window Tether Port And Scanner Window 1 5 2 Regulatory Labels MO
170. a 297 rm received messages 242 round trip time rt 242 rows number of in ANSI screen 273 number of in TESS screen 288 rt round trip time 242 Run Start Menu 7 S safety instructions battery charger 325 326 scanner 53 safety warning scanner 53 SATM 279 SAVE key F4 223 Save on Reset 295 Scan Data Format 1 65 Scan Indicator 792 SCAN Key 42 Scan Log File 192 scanner aiming target dot duration 153 163 182 Append Enter 296 Append F0 296 appending data 797 Auto Exposure Imager 782 Aztec 187 Bad Scan Beep 792 bar code appending datato 9 bar code applications 352 Index Bi Direction Redundancy 7 64 Center Bar Code Only Imager 82 Check Digits MSI Plessey 175 Check Digit Verification 167 174 Click Data appending data 9 Click Time double click 797 CLSI Editing 1 73 Codarbar 1 72 Code 128 168 178 Code 128 Emulation 176 Code 32 Prefix 766 Code 39 166 178 Code 93 173 Composite 177 187 Cont Nxt Fld 296 Conv UPC E To UPC A 770 Conv UPC E1 To UPC A 171 Convert To Code 32 166 Convert To EAN 13 74 decoded 1 52 decoded external 188 Console Port 790 Tether Port 188 decoded internal 762 decoded Intermec ISCP 178 Decode Perf Level 768 Decode Performance 7 68 Delete Char Set ECIs 765 disabling the scanner 282 Discrete 2 of 5 175 Dot Time 753 163 182 double click 797 EAN 8 Zero Extend 69 ECI Decoder 66 Enable Bookland 777 Enable CC AB 1 78 Enable CC C 178 Enable RSS Expand
171. a network GPRS not available The current network does not support GPRS GPRS not allowed The modem is not allowed to use GPRS on the current network e g no GPRS roaming agreement between network a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place It is also possible that you do not have a sub scription for GPRS at all The remaining error states are permanent SIM is missing The SIM card is missing After the SIM has been inserted a warm boot may be required SIM failure The SIM card is permanently disabled e g because the wrong PUK has been entered too many times A new SIM is needed Modem failure The modem did not respond to commands as expected If a warm boot does not clear this condition the modem may need to be replaced NDIS error An internal software error has occurred If a warm boot does not clear this condition Psion Teklogix technical support may need to investigate further Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 207 Chapter 5 Configuration Tools Menu 5 12 5 Tools Menu The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional advanced setup features ox x Network Fido Signal Status Rx bytes sd mons Figure 5 100 Tools Menu 5 12 5 1 Data Connection Configuration Data Configuration oK Enable automatic configuration y Enable automatic connect y Ache pre Select profile Figure 5 101 Data Configuration If the Enable auto
172. adio Setup 7530 Only 5 9 Narrow Band Radio Setup 7530 Only Keep in mind that the Narrow Band icon is only visible in the 7530 Control Panel lt when a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit Note too that this radio is not available for 7535 hand helds e Inthe Control Panel tap on the Narrow Band Radio icon 5 9 1 Info Tab In the Narrow Band Radio dialog box the Info tab displays information about the radio it cannot be edited Narrow Band Radio OK Info channel Protocol Power Radio 450 470 Ch Spacing kHz 25 000 PLL Step kHz 6 250 Power W 1 0 Serial Number 570003 ICIS Data Psion Teklogix Inc RA1001 Narrowband Radio DSP 0 3 FPGA 0x1B Default all Parameters Figure 5 61 Narrow Band Information The Power information in this screen indicates the power of the radio installed in the unit 0 5 or 1 0 W The Serial Number is the identifier for the radio and is used by the protocol when the Auto Radio Address parameter is enabled The CIS Data Card Information Structure is manufacturer information describing the PC Card installed in the 7535 7530 DSP x x FPGA OxNN indicates the firmware revision of the radio s DSP x x and FPGA 0xNN where x x and NN represent actual revision numbers Statistics Screen Tap on the Statistics button to display the Protocol Statistics screen Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Man
173. age disappears and the RD7950 is powered down Note Refer to RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only on page 369 for read and write specifications Warning This portable RF transmitting device has been tested and found to comply with FCC and IC RF exposure require ments with the maximum SAR of 0 xx Watts Kg with body tissue The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co located in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual B 5 APPENDIX C PORT PINOUTS C Tether Port Pinout The tether port connector incorporates multiplexed undecoded scanner decoded scanner RS232 serial and USB interfaces In order for it to operate a special wiring scheme is needed If you have a need to create cables for the tether port contact a Psion Teklogix representative and request document 1010032 Instruction Tether Port Termination Attempting to interface to the tether connector without follow ing this document may cause damage to the 7535 7530 or the tethered device C Docking Station Connector 24 6 8 10 12 135 7 911 Ext 5V Switched Used by external peripherals 5V 1A max RX Data Console receive pin TX Data Console transmit pin doce 9 ES DC Power In External power adapter plus input 7535s operate at 13 18V and 7530s operate at 14 5 18V USB Host Minus For connecting USB devices 6 USB Host Plus For connecting U
174. allation The gang charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit PN 1010039 or it can be operated on a flat surface Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt dust and contaminants The ambient temperature must be in the range 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range For maximum performance it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature a temperature range between 18 C to 25 C 64 F to 77 F The charger can consume up to 2A 120VAC or 1A 240VAC Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading especially if several chargers are being powered from the same circuit After unpacking the unit e Visually check the charger for damage e Install the IEC power cord and apply power A green indicator in the lower right lights to indicate power is present All charge indicators flash momentarily at powerup to indicate that the charger is ready for operation If you choose to wall mount the charger follow the instructions packaged with the mounting bracket kit Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity 1 5 2 Operator Controls The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch 1 5 3 Charge Indicators Each battery charge slot is equipped with a tri coloured LED to indicate the charge sta
175. alog box Chapter 5 Configuration provides a description of the Windows CE NET Control Panel and how to use it to configure the 7535 7530 along with the scanners attached to the hand held and so on Chapter 6 Tekterm Application describes TESS and ANSI operations This chapter also provides descriptions ofthe Tekterm parameters Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your 7535 7530 hand helds Chapter 8 Specifications details radio hand held computer and battery specifications Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices provides helpdesk phone numbers and provides web based information to help you search for worldwide office addresses and phone numbers Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Text Conventions Appendix B RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only describes how to install and enable the RD7950 RFID reader Appendix C Port Pinouts includes 7535 7530 pinouts Appendix D USB Setup Application provides detailed instructions on USB setup 1 2 Text Conventions IM Note Notes highlight additional helpful information AN Important These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment g Warning These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury equipment damage or da
176. alues should only be changed by qualified Psion Teklogix personnel These parameters represent internal units used by the Symagery imager The Auto Exposure parameter automatically adjusts the Max Gain Max Integration and Max Illumination parameters to produce the best bar code read Keep in mind that Auto Exposure must be set to on in order for these parameter values to be automatically adjusted Double tapping on any of these parameters displays an associated dialog box in which an allowable range is displayed Max Gain 357 to 7920 Max Integration 0 to 65535 Max Illumination 0 to 7 5 10 5 2 Code 39 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 39 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 3 Code 128 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 128 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 4 UPC EAN This parameter allows you to enable the following UPC Universal Product Code and EAN European Article Numbering bar codes UPC A UPC E UPC E1 UPC 8 EAN 13 Bookland EAN 13 and Bookland EAN Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC EAN bar codes Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 183 Chapter 5 Configuration Codabar Addendum Refer to Addendum on page 157 Prefix Suffix Refer to page 157 for details 5 10 5 5 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar
177. ameter to on to enable Code 93 Set Length LI And Set Length L2 Lengths for Code 93 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 55 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 12 Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 173 Chapter 5 Configuration MSI Plessey Set Length LI And Set Length L2 Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosin
178. ameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases e An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords A very large site has their own APN Such connections always have to be configured manually e A customer has subscribed for a static IP address By definition this must be configured manually Important For CDMA IXRTT automatic configuration is not available connections must be configured manually Under APN the packet service access number must be entered typically 777 In the following section all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection such as APN user name password DNS server addresses etc are referred to as a profile Every profile is identified by an arbitrary unique name The profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted A sample dialog box is presented in Figure 5 101 on page 208 The Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 209 Chapter 5 Configuration Data Connection Configuration Default profile uses parameters from a built in database The home network the network that issued the SIM is used for the database look up While there can be many configured profiles only one profile can be active at any time If connection profiles are configured manually the Enable automatic configuration checkbo
179. ansmission Because 7535 7530s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions a starting point or Initial Round Trip Time is required The 7535 7530 uses the time assigned to the Initial RTT parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations Once the 7535 7530 begins transmitting and receiving data this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions and acknowledgements Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 319 PERIPHERAL DEVICES amp Ma 7 7 1 External Bar Code Readers ee ee ee ee 323 7 1 1 PowerScan Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners 323 7 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader 323 diz Batteries s s oe voe teer BN Ew aer VO dispo eo Ros Rex 323 7 2 1 Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions 323 7 3 Important Charger Safety Instructions o o 325 TA Chaigets E EE A doo et BOR t ae eas 326 TS Gans Charger Je vist nex Rose S aei SE UR Xie 326 7 5 DTnstallationi s a GAG REY eder BS MS 327 7 5 2 OperatorControls ee 327 7 5 3 Charge Indicators a 327 7 5 4 Charging Batteries 222A 328 7 5 5 Troubleshooting 2 eA 328 7 5 5 1 Excessive Charge Duration 328 7 5 5 2 Indicator Flashing Red 329 7 5 5 3 Power LED Does Not LightUp 329 7 5 5 4 Indicator
180. ap Underline to Intl EBCDIC Nulls in Fields Term Type Virtual Dev Enable Virtual Dev Prefix Features FKEYO 7 FKEY8 15 FKEY16 23 FKEY24 31 FKEY32 39 Advisory None N Y IBM 5251 11 N gt gt gt gt gt gt see text see text Y N Y N see text Y N see text see text see text see text see text see text see text WEC Write Error Code This parameter determines the type of WEC used If set to advisory a TESS advisory message is generated when the host sends a WEC command to the 7535 7530 Otherwise if set to screen text the hand held locks the keyboard and displays the error message contained in the WEC command on the screen at the line specified by the host In this case the 7535 7530 must be unlocked manually using the function key mapped to RESET Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Remap Underline To This parameter allows you to remap the underline cursor to blink bold or reverse Intl EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled set to Y the international EBCDIC character set is used swapping the positions of the and characters Nulls In Fields Setting this parameter to Y allows null characters e g hyphens or periods to fill in empty entry fields Term Type The value assigned for this parameter IBM 5555 001 or IBM 525 1 11 indic
181. ar code being accepted Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code but also improve the reliability of the decoded bar code Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge to edge bar codes Code 93 Code 128 UPC EAN Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting 5 10 2 2 Code 39 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 39 or off to disable it Full Ascii If this parameter is enabled the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 153 Chapter 5 Configuration Code 39 Include Check If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data AIAG Strip Ifthis parameter is enabled the AIAG data identifier is removed from each decoded Code 39 label The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the Code 39 start character It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character This identifier defines the general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code L Note Ifyour unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix TESS application th
182. arameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode The value represents the number of the function key not the ASCII decimal equivalent After sending this key the unit locks and waits for the host to unlock the 7535 7530 To disable AutoRep Fn set the AutoRep T O parameter to zero Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 291 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features AutoRep 1 0 This parameter determines the time in seconds between the 7535 7530 unlocking and the next transmission of the function key specified by the above parameter A value of zero disables auto reply mode 6 19 2 5 Features 05 Features Range Printer Y Y N Binary print N Y N Queuing Y Y N Lcl Process Y see text Send Mile N Y N Next X N Y N Kbd Locked N Y N Remap Passthru N Y N Disable Beep N Y N Serial see text Printer This parameter enables and disables the pins in the serial port used for printers or other external devices Binary print When this parameter is enabled set to Y the page displayed on the 7535 7530 computer is spooled as is except for trailing white space removal When disabled set to N each line of the page displayed on the hand held is preceded by a linefeed LF and followed by a carriage return CR Queuing This parameter enables and disables queuing mode see Queuing Mode on page 236 It also enables TESS proc
183. arameter to on to enable 2D DataMatrix Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 15 2D Maxicode Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D Maxicode Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 16 2D PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D PDF 417 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 17 2D Micro PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D Micro PDF 417 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 18 2D QR Code Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D QR Code Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 186 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration 2D RSS Code 5 10 5 19 2D RSS Code Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D RSS Code Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5200 Aztec Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Aztec Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 5 21 Composite A composite symbol includes multi row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Composite bar code scanner AN Important To successfully read this type of bar code the two types of symbologies included in the composite must be enabled In addition Center Bar Code Only must be disabled
184. arget dot Center Bar Code Only Note This parameter must be disabled when reading Composite bar codes When more than one bar code is visible in a single snap shot this parameter allows you to specify that only the centre image within the imager framing marker be read When this parameter is set to on the target dot is pointed at the centre image and only that image is returned Auto Exposure AN Important This parameter value should only be changed by qualified Psion Teklogix personnel It should be left at the default value on Setting this parameter to on allows the imager to make automatic gain integration and illumination adjustments based on ambient light before capturing the bar code If the adjustment is insufficient further adjustments are made automatically before another image is captured Fast Converge Note Auto Exposure must be set to on in order for this parameter to function Keep in mind that while this parameter can improve imager performance Fast Converge increases battery power consumption Setting this parameter to on speeds the Auto Exposure process It allows the imager to rapidly snap a number of bar code capture attempts while finding ideal values for gain integration and illumination 182 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 39 Max Gain Max Integration And Max Illumination AN Important These parameter v
185. as that assigned through the Password control panel applet Refer to Control Panel Icons on page 90 To assign a password Choose a security level and enter the existing password in the Password field e Select the Set Password button A dialog box labelled Password Properties is displayed e Type the new password in the Password text box Inthe Confirm Password text box retype the new password Configuring Security Choosing the Configure button displays the Configure Security dialog box Configure Security OK E Supervisor User 7 Allow Teklogix Security Level Figure 4 9 Configuring Security This dialog box allows you to determine which security levels will have an associated icon displayed in the taskbar By default a security icon is not displayed for user level security 76 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Programs 4 4 3 Programs Choose Programs to display a sub menu of options E 2 My Internet Computer Explorer internet Explorer A BY Microsoft WordPad Pa y shutdo SJ Remote Connect Windows Explorer Figure 4 10 Program Sub Menu This sub menu allows you to choose ActiveSync and Command Prompt and you can access the Internet Explorer installed applications e g Open Tekterm Remote Desktop Connection or Windows Explorer ActiveSync This option allows you to connect to another device usin
186. at is found the network name country status and numeric network identifier MCC MNC Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code is displayed L Note Your home network operator will need to let you know which other net works have roaming agreements Even when a network is listed with an Available status it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers GPRS A status of Forbidden indicates that the network cannot be used If you choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement the status in the main WWAN dialog box changes to Emergency calls only No net work found GPRS not available or GPRS not allowed Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 213 Chapter 5 Configuration Driver Mode Configuration 5 12 54 Driver Mode Configuration Enable driver y Enable automatic port detection y Select port EPRS Maden GPS Figure 5 104 Driver Mode By default the Wireless WAN driver is enabled the Enable driver checkbox is checked The driver must be disabled in order to use the modem for anything other than GPRS e g dial up data fax or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for development testing approvals etc If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box is chosen If on the other hand the Wireless WAN driver
187. ata directly to the 7535 7530 serial port This option is most commonly used for printing AIAG Character This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of the AIAG character A value of 0 zero disables this feature When a bar code data is scanned the 7535 7530 searches for AIAG fields on the current page that can accept the bar code data The application program distinguishes an entry field as AIAG by preceding the field with this special mode character which indicates the existence of AIAG fields Barcode Character Barcode input only fields are special entry fields that only accept input from a bar code reader The application program identifies a barcode input only entry field by preceding the field with a special character Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 301 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of the barcode input only character A value of 0 zero disables this feature Serial 10 Character Serial I O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output to a serial port The application program distinguishes this field as Serial I O by preceding the field with a special character If this character precedes a fixed field the data will be sent to the 7535 7530 s serial port If it precedes an entry field the field accepts data from the hand held s s
188. ates the type of terminal to report during the Telnet negotiations It determines how the AS 400 host treats the terminal IBM 5251 11 is a standard 5250 terminal IBM 5555 001 is a Korean language terminal Virtual Dev Enabled If enabled set to Y this parameter allows the 7535 7530 to negotiate a specific device name for itself Virtual Dev Prefix The prefix assigned in this field is used when the Virtual Dev Enabled parameter see above is set to Y The current terminal number is appended to the prefix to generate a unique device name You can assign up to 10 upper case alphanumeric characters in this field 306 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Features 5250 Telnet m 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region Right 0 0 80 These parameters are identical to those described for 2392 Telnet Refer to Features 2392 Telnet beginning on page 301 FKEYO 7 FKEY8 15 FKEYL6 23 FKEY24 31 And FKEY32 39 p2406 EKEYO 7 gt FKEYO ENTER FKEY1 F1 FKEY2 F2 FKEY3 F3 FKEY4 F4 FKEY5 F5 FKEY6 F6 FKEY7 F7 The sub menus attached to these
189. ative impact on overall system throughput To minimize the impact on the backbone 802 11b network Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates such as printers and scanners Bluetooth peripherals are configured by choosing the Bluetooth icon in the Control Panel Refer to Bluetooth Setup on page 116 for information about setting up your Bluetooth devices for communication In addition review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the 7535 1530 host 7 11 The 7535 7530 Picker Cradle The 7535 7530 picker cradle is a highly ruggedized single station dock Although it provides quick insertion and removal the cradle holds the 7535 7530 securely even when operated in high vibration environments such as vehicles not equipped with suspensions The7535 7530 base picker cradle can be outfitted with two options a power module and a port replicator Psion Teklogix also supplies a range of standard mounts for the hand held picker cradles and the 7535 7530 picker cradle is compatible with all of them 338 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Picker Cradle Mounting Recommendations 1 41 1 Picker Cradle Mounting Recommendations e Warning Before mounting a picker cradle in a vehicle there are a number i of operator safety issues that require careful attention An improp erly
190. ble tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 175 Chapter 5 Configuration 2D PDF 417 Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 1 to 12 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 15 2D PDF 417 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables PDF 417 two dimensional 2D coding Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 16 2D Micro PDF 417 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables 2D Micro PDF 417 bar code scanning Micro PDF 417 is a multi row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF 417 Code 128 Emulation When this parameter is enabled the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF 417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols If Code 128 Emulation is enabled the following Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes Cl ifthe first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 C2 ifthe first codeword is 908 or 909 CO ifthe first codeword is 910 or 911 If Code 128 Emulation is set to off the
191. box is used in conjunction with 802 1x authentication to enhance 7535 7530 security Stores My Certificates Lists the certificates trusted by you Figure 5 29 Certificates Dialog Box For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client side devices 7535 7530s refer to the following website www microsoft com windows2000 techinfo planning walkthroughs default asp Security Services TN Note When importing certificates the 7535 7530 only recognizes cer files Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 115 Chapter 5 Configuration Bluetooth Setup 5 6 Bluetooth Setup Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks PAN The technology is based on a short range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2 4 GHz When two Bluetooth equipped devices come within a 5 meter range of each other they can establish a connection Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio based link it does not require a line of sight connection in order to communicate Note T he Bluetooth radio card uses an internal antenna e n the Control Panel choose the Bluetooth Device Properties icon to display the Bluetooth Control screen x 0 PE i Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Input Panel 9 n gt Internet IPv6 Keyboard Options Support gt e Q Mouse Network and Owner
192. cessed through the taskbar Additional tabs allow you to determine suspend states specify a suspend threshold and determine whether or not a battery that requires it can be recalibrated This dialog box also allows you to activate card slots Refer to Power Saving Schemes on page 110 for details Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 91 Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons 4 Regional Settings Regional Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the hand held screen along with the format of numbers currency time and date for your region E Remove Programs R Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit To remove a pro emove gram select it and then click on the Remove button 3 Stylus Stylus Adjusts how Windows CE NET recognizes your double tap as slow or rapid successive taps In the Calibration tab you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate button and following the directions on the screen a System System Displays system and memory properties In the Memory tab you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory XL Dialing Dialing Specifies dialing settings including area code country code dial type and the code to disable call waiting You can store multiple patterns for exam ple Work Home and so on using this dialog box Certificates Certificates A public key is tran
193. ching The Hand Held On And Off 39 3 5 Th Keyboard uu sea esee REB anm XS durs 40 3 5 T Modifier Keys vu aa rS 40 3 5 1 1 Activating Modifier Keys 41 3 5 1 2 Locking Modifier Keys 41 35 2 The Key S o s ae el tarts ah d n pec AC ee hy pe Bysshe es HAIR LV Rs 41 3 5 3 Alphanumeric Keyboards 58 Key And 63 Key 42 3 5 4 Numeric Keyboards 36 Key And 37 Key 43 3 5 5 The Keypad Backlight cles 45 36 The Display ec oe med y rito RU ge en Res seve RSS 45 3 6 1 Adjusting The Display Backlight ls 45 3 6 2 Adjusting The Contrast llle 45 3 6 3 Calibrating The Touchscreen llle 46 3 7 1535 7530 Indicators 5 gente IRR ged tes OR 47 3 TT BED S ins eee rs te tete on Peters e tout ee 47 SL Charge LED s 2 4 ux xx eR 48 3 7 1 2 Radio Traffic LED a a a a a 49 3 L T3 ScambBD avoue a ar a aa 49 3 7 1 4 User Application LED 49 3 7 2 Onscreen Indicators o 02 000 2b e 50 3 73 AudioIndicators 2e 53 3 7 3 1 Adjusting The Beeper Volume 53 3 8 Internal Scanners 2 ee 53 3 8 1 Scanning Techniques 0 00200 enn 55 3 8 2 Scan LED Indicators 2 0008 55 3 83 Troubleshooting 2 0 22er 56 3 8 4 Operating One Dimensional 1D Internal Laser Scanners 56 3 8 5 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scan
194. choose any additional alpha characters unlock the lt ORANGE gt again and end alpha selection Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters From A Range Of Keys If you plan on choosing alpha characters from a number of different keys you are not required to press the Accept lt gt gt key after each alpha selection The lt gt gt key is only required when you are choosing more than one alpha character from the same key e g a b and c from the 2 key 44 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 The Keypad Backlight 3 c Suppose you want to type the letters a d and g These alpha characters are accessed from the numeric keys 2 3 and 4 e With the lt ORANGE gt key locked on press 2 to type the letter a e Press 3 to type d and press 4 to type the letter g To end alpha selection unlock the lt ORANGE gt key 3 5 9 The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE NET Control Panel The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog box Refer to Keyboard Backlight on page 99 for details about this option fL Note Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only 3 6 The Display
195. cking Port Figure 3 4 Back Of 7530 3 3 The Battery The hand held operates with a Lithium Ion battery pack Preparing the unit for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in the 7535 7530 3 3 1 Battery Safety AN Important Before attempting to install use or charge the battery pack it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the section entitled Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions beginning on page 323 3 3 2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack E Note TURN OFF THE HAND HELD BEFORE REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK Ifyou do not turn the hand held off before removing the battery it may be necessary to reboot the unit Any active sessions may be lost Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 37 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Battery Chargers Removing The Battery Pack e If your unit is equipped with a hand strap unhook it from the base of the battery e Press down the release tab at the top of the battery and slide the battery out Installing The Battery Pack To install the battery pack e Slide the battery pack with the contoured plastic facing you into the 7535 7530 Click the battery into place Figure 3 5 Installing The Battery Pack e Ifyour computer is equipped with a hand strap insert the hook at the end of the hand strap into the slot at the base of the battery 3 3 3 Battery Chargers Important FOR DETAILED IN
196. cle it s a good idea to pull up on the 7535 7530 to be certain that it is secure Toremove the 7535 7530 press firmly on one of the knobs on either side of the cradle until it releases You do not need to press both knobs 1 1 4 Maintaining The Picker Cradle Two latches in the cradle hold the 7535 7530 firmly in place Although these latches are designed for at least 80 000 cycles they will wear over time and will no longer lock the 7535 7530 securely in the cradle For replacement parts and instructions contact Psion Teklogix see Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices Partial disassembly is required 1 1 5 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles e Warning Voltages exceeding 60V DC are considered hazardous For powered cradle installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage ensure the powered cradle power connector is mounted in a dry location on the vehicle or that the connector is insulated with an appropriate waterproof material after installation The connector must also be installed out of the vehicle operator s reach Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a hazardous situation resulting in serious injury or death Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 60VDC require special consideration 340 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual a Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Powered Cradle I
197. code values that you use frequently you may want to create and save them in a pop up window so that you can access them whenever necessary Refer to Custom Charac ters Unicode on page 264 for details 6 10 2 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 6 10 2 1 Sub Menus The character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub menu Displaying Sub Menus To display a sub menu Tap the stylus on the menu item with the sub menu you want to display Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 247 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Numeric Parameters Returning To The Previous Menu e Ifthe softkey labels are visible at the bottom of the screen tap the stylus on the PREV previous softkey label e Ifthe softkey labels are not visible you ll have to press F2 the PREV function key 6 10 22 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video To decrease the numeric value tap the stylus on the left side of the number To increase the numeric value tap the stylus on the right side of the number Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it for example a preset range of 1 through 10 If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1 the incorrect value will be rejected the original value for this parameter if any will be displayed 6 10 2 3 Y N Parameters Y N param
198. con and press ENTER to launch the highlighted icon IL Note If the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons the desktop may not be selected Press BLUE 0 zero to display the Start Menu and select Desktop Now the desktop will be in focus and the arrow keys will high light the icons Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 69 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE The Desktop Icons 4 3 1 The Desktop Icons The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way as those displayed on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows My Computer Choosing this icon displays the contents of your 7535 7530 computer If you re not sure how to work with the files folders and programs displayed refer to Working With Files Folders And Programs on page 68 Recycle Bin This option temporarily stores items that were deleted allowing you to either permanently delete or restore these items Internet Explorer Choosing this icon launches Internet Explorer a standard Windows CE NET version Keep in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the Internet Options and the Network and Dial up Connections icons in the Control Panel Remote Desktop Connection This option allows your 7535 7530 to communicate with a remote desktop PC Remote Desktop Connection on page 89 provides a website with step by step instructions 4 3 2 The Taskbar gr My Computer C Recycle
199. containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 6 to 55 Check Digits Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One or Two check digit s If this parameter is set to One it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit If Check Digits is set to Two it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits L Note If Two check digits is selected an MSI Plessey Check Digit Algorithm must also be selected See page 9 88 Transmit Check Digit If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the bar code data Check Digit Algorithm When the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected an additional verification is required to ensure integrity Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose the algorithm to be used MOD 10 MOD 11 or MOD 10 MOD 10 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 14 Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 Set Length LI And Set Length L2 Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Dou
200. ction Type Telnet amp TCP Direct 269 Screen settings 273 AP Controller mac displaying 241 App parameter 288 appearance display colour scheme 97 Append Enter 296 Append FO 296 appending to bar codes characters 155 157 191 Applications ANSI Settings 268 285 character attributes TESS 289 Character Sets TESS 290 Fields parameters TESS 297 Host Conn ANSI 269 Host Conn TESS 286 menu Applications 267 Scanner parameters TESS 296 Screen parameters ANSI 273 Screen parameters TESS 287 TESS Settings 285 300 Type and Title 267 approvals 7530 including scanner 357 7535 including scanner 348 ar acknowledged remote number 242 Arrow Key Remap ANSI Telnet Settings 272 arrow keys 237 completing a data field 229 298 cycling through special characters 246 Enh Mode using 299 moving the cursor 4 Arrow mode 280 Arrows 316 ASCII decimal equivalents of characters 29 Full Ascii 753 matching fields 290 Async In 284 attributes video 274 275 298 audio indicators adjusting volume 53 description of beep conditions 53 volume adjustment using the BLUE key 53 Authentication Bluetooth Controls 1 9 authentication network Shared Mode 26 Auto Answer 277 Auto Exposure Imager 1 82 Auto Login ANSI Telnet Settings 270 Auto Radio Addr 253 318 Auto Radio Address Cellular Radio 144 Auto Radio Address Cellular Radio Address 144 AutoRep Fn function key sent to host 291 AutoRep T O 292 Auto Start 259
201. d All chargers and docking stations are described in Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories beginning on page 321 Important For 7535 hand helds updating software to PCON version 100835C1 or later automatically resets the battery s parameters The battery gauge will display 0 capacity only until the battery is recalibrated However the operator can safely use the battery because a low battery warning based on voltage at approxi mately 6 8 volts will be displayed allowing sufficient time to change the battery Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 17 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Attaching Carrying Accessories Regarding battery calibration keep in mind that all types of battery chargers available for the 7535 contain single discharge circuits so that only one battery can be calibrated at a time a cal ibration cycle requires discharging the battery and then calibrat ing to the new full charge If multiple batteries require calibration care should be taken to ensure that these batteries are placed into a charger that is not already calibrating a battery 2 1 3 Attaching Carrying Accessories Psion Teklogix recommends that a carrying accessory a hand strap pistol grip or shoulder strap be installed on the 7535 7530 before use If your hand held is not fitted with a hand strap or pistol grip you can install either using the carrying accessory kit supplied You ll need e A Phillips head sc
202. dated Version Scan See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain firmware that implements a different communication protocol with the 7535 7530 than older units The Version numbers represent the following unit versions Value Scan See Version First LED version up to serial number 1594080275 these are encased in 9 grey plastic Model 7000 LED units versions after the serial number above these are also encased in grey plastic Metrologic 7000M LCD units these are encased in grey plastic Psion Teklogix 7000M LCD units these are encased in black plastic Table 6 6 Scan See Versions L Note To interface the 7535 7530 to the Scan See units with older firmware serial number lower than 1594120224 set Parity space all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware 6 20 3 2 Scan See Keyboard Mapping Digits 0 9 are passed verbatim The CLR key forces a sign on message and display refresh This only occurs when CLR is pressed and the CLR key on the display is pressed then released 316 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Network The three F keys are mapped to F1 F2 and F3 respectively e The ENT key is mapped to the carriage return r character The two arrow keys are handled locally and control the brightness and the line and column offsets as described on page 315
203. dd Files To add a file to your backup list e Choose Add Files Browse to and choose the files you want to add to your list To remove a file from your backup list e Choose Remove Files a dialog box is displayed listing the files that will be backed up Highlight the item you want to remove from the list and tap on the Remove button Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 133 Chapter 5 Configuration Creating A Backup Profile Choosing By File Type allows you to select the file types that you want backed up Add Files Figure 5 56 Adding Files By File Type View Selections Depending on what you have selected for inclusion in your profile you can view a list of the selected files databases and or registry View Selections x view Fies Added y Fie Name Last Modified 4 Application Dat 312112003 My Documents 312112003 Program Filesid 312112003 WWindowsiKillPro 911212004 Windows cerdis 911212004 WWindowsiFavori 312112003 Windows Fonts 312112003 WWindowsiStart 312112003 Windows Rece 312112003 Windows Progr lh fimdo Da 3 2 d Figure 5 57 Viewing Selections Choose the Next button to perform the operation 134 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Restoring A Profile Performing The Backup Perform the Operation x Backup To Flash Disk m D
204. ddress of first message in receive queue 243 queue memory address of first message in receive queue Q 243 queue transmissions waiting in TxQ 243 queuing Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual xiii Index enabling disabling next message 293 mode 236 292 pages 236 Queuing parameter 235 292 response time improving 236 R ra received acknowledgements 242 radio adding new network connection 24 advanced settings of 30 Auto Radio Addr narrow band radio 318 Bluetooth 716 129 Bluetooth specs 351 Configure button 24 configuring 22 adding a new network connection 24 AdHoc 25 authentication network 26 Configure button 24 Connect button 24 EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 27 Infrastructure 25 Key Index 26 Key Index assigning 26 network authentication 26 Network Key 26 Network Key assigning 26 wireless information 24 wireless properties 25 802 1X authentication 27 Connect button 24 Initial RTT WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS 254 319 IP address assigning 28 name servers 29 Narrow Band 137 Narrow Band RA1001 spees 351 preferred networks arranging 30 Protocol Type 254 Radio Address narrow band radio 318 Radio Address WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS 253 specifications 351 statistics screen 802 1Q 240 wireless connection setting up 22 802 10 statistics screen 240 802 11b Direct Sequence SS 351 802 11signal quality 51 Radio Addr Auto Radio Addr narrow band radio 318 Radio Address 253
205. de message Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table The DEL key Feursor mode operates in the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 231 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application lt BKSP gt Key Behaviour In TESS 6 6 5 3 lt BKSP gt Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode Ina left justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character directly to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor one position to the left When the last character in the field is deleted the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified and the field is opened In a right justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to the right by one position When the last character in the field is deleted the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified and the field is opened If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed when the field is empty the 7535 7530 emits a keyboard error beep The lt BKSP gt key does not delete data pre filled by the host applica tion If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed in a field that has not been modified the 7535 7530 emits a keyboard error beep If data is entered into a field and is then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when
206. der 7535 Only Technical Specifications Frequency Range Transmitter Power Output Channel Spacing Channel Bandwidth Number of Hops Data Rate Input Voltage Current Rating 902 to 928MHz 1 Watt 30dBm 500kHz Class 0 205kHz Class 1 300kHz ISO 18000 6 70kHz 50 57600 5V 1 5A Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 369 Chapter 8 Specifications RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only Read Distance Class 0 2x2 tag 0 2 5 m 0 8 ft Class 0 11020 0 3m 0 10 ft Class 0 4x4 0 3 5m 0 11 ft Class 1 9238 Squiggle 0 2 5 m 0 8 ft Class 1 9338 0 3 5 m 0 11 ft Read distance is highly dependant upon tag configuration material to which the tag is applied and the presence of metal and water around the tag Metal and water will decrease read ranges significantly Write Distance Write distance for Class 0 and Class 1 tags is approximately 50 of the read distance referenced in the table above Weight Less than 1400g 7535 is approximately 775g 270z with pistol grip Integrated Reader is approximately 600g 2102 Environmental Operating temp 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F Storage temp 25 C to 60 C 13 F to 140 F Humidity 5 95 RH non condensing Rain Dust IEC 529 classification IP54 Shock 1 22 m 4 ft drop to polished concrete multiple times Cradle vibration 1 5g RMS PSD 4 Hz 500 Hz Approvals for RD7950 Industry Canada RSS 210 FCC Part 15 Safet
207. der In effect they behave as data entry fields Enh Edit Mode This mode provides extended enhanced functions to users of Psion Teklogix IBM 5250 terminal emulation When this parameter is enabled set to Y the arrow keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen unrestricted by fixed or entry fields Certain 5250 emulation keys e g Field Exit that were originally available only when Enh Edit Mode was set to Y are now active at all times in TESS applications Refer to IBM 5250 Emulation Keys on page 229 for details about these keys Valid Numerics This parameter is used to configure valid characters for numeric fields to a maximum of 39 characters Since this field is numeric numbers 0 through 9 do not need to be configured The default values for this parameter are 9o Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 299 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Anchor View 6 19 28 Anchor View r 05 Anchor x origin y origin Range 4 1 24 1 80 When enabled set to Y this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved The x origin and y origin coordinates specify where the screen origin the upper left corner of the screen will be fixed x origin and y origin The x origin parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the scr
208. device If a connection to a partner device already exists the connection is dropped and another connection to the newly selected device is created instantly without disrupting the application that has opened the outgoing port L Note To add a service to the Outgoing port an active service must first be deactivated Then you can choose the Outgoing option from the Activa tion menu highlight a service right click or press the SPACE bar to display the Activation menu Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 121 Chapter 5 Configuration Active Conn Tab 5 6 4 Active Conn Tab Bluetooth Manager Outgoing Active Conn Name Address Type ES EER A Figure 5 35 The Active Conn Tab The Active Conn tab lists the Name Address and Type of the currently active connections The table is periodically updated but it can take a few seconds before it reflects the actual list of connections The Type column of the table shows ACL or SCO The Connection list table shows the connections for scanning as well as the service connections fL Note You can change the device name and description of your radio by clicking on the System icon in Control Panel which will open the System Proper ties dialog box Click on the Device Name tab to access the menu and change your settings Then click on OK Although the name will have changed in the Properties menu in Bluetooth Controls t
209. drivers for it An icon in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen provides a visual representation of the peripheral and indicates that it is ready for operation To attach the peripheral to the round tether port on the side of the unit nsert the barrel of the plug into the tether port and rotate slowly until it clicks into place The red dot on the port and on the connector should be aligned Figure 3 10 Attaching The Cable To The Tether Port Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 59 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time To remove the peripheral e Grasp the shell of the plug and pull it back gently to unlock and release the connector Figure il Disconnecting The Tether Cable AN Important Never attempt to disconnect a peripheral by pulling the connector by the wire The connector is locked into place and can only be unlocked and removed by pulling back the plug shell 3 10 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time Under normal operating conditions fully charged batteries last for 10 hours As Lithium Ion batteries age their capacity decreases gradually and they are generally considered depleted after approximately 2 years of use less than 60 of original capacity remaining Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the 7535 7530 at temperature extremes will shorten the battery life Lithium Ion batteries do not require condi
210. e 1999 5 EC Declaration available www psionteklogix com Cet quipement est conforme aux principales caract ristiques d finies dans la Direc tive europ enne RTTE 1999 5 CE D claration disponible sur le site www psionteklogix com Die Ger te erf llen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE Richtlinie 1999 5 EG Den Wortlaut der Richtlinie finden Sie unter www psionteklogix com Questa apparecchiatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea R amp TTE 1999 5 CE Dichiarazione disponibile sul sito www psionteklogix com Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1995 5 CE de la UE Equipos de Terminales de Radio y Telecomu nicaciones Declaraci n disponible en www psionteklogix com Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999 5 CE do Parla mento Europeu e do Conselho Directiva RTT Declara o dispon vel no endere o www psionteklogix com O sSOMMOLS avt s TANPOI tis BACIKES anroathosts TIS kotvottkris OSNyiag EU R amp TTE 1999 5 EK H oon ovuu ppoons diatidetor ot StevOvvon www psionteklogix com Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU richtlijn betref fende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie eindappa ratuur 199 5 EG verklaring beschikbaar www psionteklogix com Dette udstyr opfylder de V sentlige krav i EU s direktiv 1999 5 EC om Radio og teleterminaludstyr Erkl ring findes pa www psionteklogix com
211. e 5 10 6 Decoded External ee 5 10 6 1 Tether Pott m eed da ar 5 10 6 2 Console Port llle 531077 Options Lape tao dom Agen me o D eae SME 5 10 8 Translations 2 aE a a a a ei a ET 5 11 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Setup 5 11 1 Contact Tab tula aie gab eee ext 5 11 2 Communities Tab o e e 5 11 2 1 Adding A Community sn 5 11 2 2 Modifying A Community Setting 5 11 2 3 Removing An Existing Community 5 11 3 Trap Destination Tab lees 5 11 3 1 Enabling Authentication TRAPS 5 11 3 2 Adding A Destination 5 11 3 3 Changing A Destination 5 11 3 4 Removing A Trap Destination 5 11 4 Permitted Hosts Tab 2l 000004 5 11 4 1 Adding A Host 2 0 000000 5 11 4 2 Changing AHost 002 5 12 Wareless WAN is e iara AE ating ae oR ade oa ped Sd dor yn 5 12 1 TaskbarIcofis ox ie ee a Ren E 5 12 2 Establishing A Connection lees 5 12 3 Disconnecting From A Network o 5 12 3 1 Shutting Down The Wireless WAN User Interface 5 12 4 Advanced Information llle 5 12 4 1 Entering A PIN Number 5 12 42 RITO States ea ou esed xe 5 12 5 Tools Meni oda fn od Deus m deua URS 5 12 5 1 Data Connection Configuration 5 12 5 2 Security Configuration 4 5
212. e Backup Profile 130 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Creating A Backup Profile Choose the Next button to begin the process Profile Information x Profle Name pefsuitz Profile Settings Image Psion Teklogix 753x OS Version 4 20 0 Registry Type Hive registry AutoRestore Profile Settings Profile Location Figure 5 51 Profile Details Profile Information This dialog box lists the possible storage destinations for the profile file To begin type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name The image type OS Version and Registry Type for the 7535 7530 is also listed here Choose this icon E to expand your settings for AutoRetore Profile and Profile Location Image Psion Teklogix 753x OS Version 4 20 0 Registry Type Hive registry AutoRestore Profile Settings Profile Location Figure 5 52 Profile Options Notan AutoRestore Profile creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator AutoRestore Profile for this device only creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold boot Clone Profile for other devices creates a profile that automati cally restores after resuming from a cold boot but it will not contain the touchscreen calibration coordinates or the Wireless radio settings Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 131 Chapter 5 Configuratio
213. e Code 39 Mod 10 check digit ITF Check If this parameter is enabled the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated Include Check If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 161 Chapter 5 IATA 2 of 5 Configuration Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 154 for details 5 10 2 14 IATA 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable IATA 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled the Mod 10 check digit is calculated ITF Check If this parameter is enabled the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated Include Check If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 154 for details 5 10 3 Decoded Internal Scanners Scanner Properties OK lx Barcodes options Translations Decoded internal Options E Data Options Code 39 Code 128 UPC EAN Codabar disabled t Code 93 disabled Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled MSI Plessey disabled amp Discrete 2 of 5 disabled 2D PDF 417 i To change a setting press space right arrow or double click 3 SACO Figure 5 75 Decoded Internal Scanner Tap on the Scanner dropdown menu and choose Decoded internal 162 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held C
214. e Key and the Orange Key are not locked They will become inactive following a key press 100 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys 5 5 4 Keyboard Macro Keys Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Macros tab Keyboard Properties OK X Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros Macro Key Sequence AD CO Oo oh x Record Macro Delete Macro rs Figure 5 10 Macro Dialog Box A macro has 200 programmable characters or positions The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys including ENTER lt BKSP gt and DEL lt BLUE gt lt BKSP gt function keys and arrow keys Recording And Saving A Macro You can program up to 12 macro keys on a 58 key 7535 and a 63 key 7530 Ona 36 key 7535 and a 37 key 7530 you can program a maximum of 6 macro keys Inthe Macro menu highlight a macro key number for example macro 1 to assign a macro to macro key M1 Choose the Record Macro button Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 101 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys A message screen is displayed instructing you to Please Enter Key Strokes Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros Macro Key Sequence Please Enter Key Strokes To stop recording press CTRL ALT Enter Delete Macro Figure 5 1
215. e Radio Menu see 802 10 v1 on page 253 When this parameter is set to Y a unique unit number is assigned for the current TESS session If Auto Term is set to Y any value assigned to the Terminal parameter is ignored Group Auto Term Range Group 1 L 5 When Auto Term is set to Y the Group parameter is used to identify the group or pool of numbers from which an auto address is chosen Terminal For every application session you create the Terminal assigned must be non zero and unique This parameter defines the terminal number for the TESS session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 7535 7530 Other applications running in the 7535 7530 such as an ANSI session or another TESS session must each have a different number In addition each Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 using the radio link must have a unique number 6 19 2 1 Host Conn Host Conn Range gt Conn Type 802 1Qv2 See text Settings see text Conn Type The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of application you are running ANSI or TESS For TESS applications this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections 802 IQv2 9010t TCP Direct 2392 Telnet 3274 Telnet and 5250 Telnet 286 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapte
216. e Zones PDF Scanner 356 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications SE 1224HP SE 1200WA amp SE 923HS 8 9 3 SE 1224HP SE 1200WA amp SE 923HS Parameter SE 1224HP SE 1200WA SE 923 Licht S Visible Laser Diode Visible Laser Diode Visible Laser Diode tem Source 650 nm 650 nm 650 nm 35 5 scans sec 35 5 scans sec 39 3 scans sec id bi directional bi directional bi directional 42 typical 30 ares Scan Angle GiattoWw 53 2 53 typical Scan Patterns Linear Linear Linear E n m rae 23 id Minimum 20 absolute Minimum 25 absolute Minimum Print lute dark light reflec dark light reflectance dark light reflectance Contrast tance measured at 650 nm measured at 650 nm measured at 650 nm UPC EAN Code 128 UCC EAN 128 RSS UPC EAN Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 I 2 of Symbologies Code 39 Code 93 12 5 Discrete 2 of 5 oe Disercie eoo Codabar MSI Plesse Codabar MSI y Laser On Tone um Laser On Time Aim Duration Power Duration Power Mode Mode Trigger Mode 23s AO Trigger Mode Bi direc Bi directional Redun tional Redundancy Programmable dancy Symbology Parameters Symbology types lengths Data for types lengths Data matting Serial Parame formatting Serial ters Beeper Tone Scan Parameters Beeper Angle Tone Artificial 450
217. e bar codes which will be decoded and so on Scanner Properties m Tieren Scanner E El Options Code 39 amp Code 128 EAN 13 E EAN 8 E UPC A UPC E E Codabar disabled Code 93 disabled amp Code 11 disabled Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled To change a setting press space right arrow or double click o NA Ol Figure 6 10 Scanner Properties Dialog Box 4 El Refer to Scanner Properties Setup beginning on page 150 for details about setting up your scanner AN Important 6 18 View Manager Display Shift If this parameter is enabled set to Y the display in application screens shifts so m 04 view Manager Range Display Shift Y Y N Block Cursor Y Y N Use Increment N Y N X increment 5 40 Y increment 5 12 Split Screen See text Custom Chars See text Font Override N see text Default Colours see text that there are no blank columns on the left most side of the display 260 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Split Screen Block Cursor When this parameter is enabled set to Y the cursor is presented as a flashing block When Block Cursor is set to N the cursor is presented as a flashing underline character Use increment When Use increment is enabled set to Y and the cursor is moved off the display the screen contents shift
218. e displayed at the bottom of the screen These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the Label F1 F4 parameter To edit a label Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Label menu and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding key s function L Note Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display Colour Override R Note Ifyou have a 7535 with a monochrome display this menu is not available 06 Colour Override Range Foreground Black see text Background White see text Foreground And Background When Colour Override is set to Y the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the TESS sessions These colour settings override the Default Colours set from within the View Manager menu Refer to Default Colours on page 266 for details The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black 6 19 2 3 Characters m 05 Characters Range Char Set see text V Match Char 0 0 255 H Match Char 0 0 255 Fill Chr 46 0 255 Upper Case N Y N Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 289 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Characters Char Set 06 Char Set ISO N IBM Y DEC N Misc N
219. e radio interface has been shut down or the modem has been removed Inthe Control Panel choose the Wireless WAN icon Eje us O JE Owner Password PC Connection E 59 Y Power Regional Remove Settings Programs E e m 1234 SNMP Storage Teklogix Manager gt je System Volume 8 Sounds Wireless E gt 0 i 3 20 AM Figure 5 97 Wireless WAN Icon Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 203 Chapter 5 Configuration Establishing A Connection The main Wireless WAN dialog box is displayed Ex x Network Fido Signal Status voce Rxbyes 1 c s Figure 5 98 Establishing A Connection IL Note Ifyou are prompted to enter a PIN refer to Entering A PIN Number on page 206 for details When Ready to connect is displayed in the Status field the Connect Data button is enabled e Tap on the Connect Data button The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field PPP link to modem active e Authenticating user e User authenticated Connected L Note Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the connection is rapid 204 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Disconnecting From A Network When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active the taskbar icon changes to indicate an active connection The Connect Data butt
220. e screen above shows a U 0061 indicating that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061 and so on Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexidecimal rather than decimal values All user defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value and then by order of the shift state Ifa Unicode mapping is not listed the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 103 Chapter 5 Configuration Unicode Mapping Adding And Changing Unicode Values A i Important Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Properties dialog box Choose the Add Change button Change Unicode Mapping OK ES VK SPACE p VK_O a O SHIFT Pressed vi Unicode Mapping c o063 Default Unicode Mapping gt 6 allis i OF Figure 5 13 Adding And Change Unicode Values M Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list in the sample screen above a value will be assigned to virtual key 0 VK 0 e Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key L Note To add a shifted state lt SHIFT gt and or lt CTRL gt press lt TAB gt to posi tion the cursor in the checkbox next to SHIFT Pressed and or CTRL Pressed Press SPACE to select the shift state you want to assign Removing Unicode Val
221. e slot LEDs continue to flash red the charger is defective and requires service If all indicators are flashing red there is a power supply problem and the charger requires service 1 5 5 3 Power LED Does Not Light Up e Remove all batteries and unplug the charger Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger and check it for damage e Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet If the power LED still does not light up e Unplug the mains cable and check the fuse at the rear of the charger Ifthe fuse appears to be intact the charger requires service 1 5 5 4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed e Remove the battery and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot e Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage are they bent flattened twisted or bro ken e Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot e Reconnect the mains power cable and check that the slot indicator flashes at pow erup 1 6 Combo Charger The 7535 7530 combo charger is a desktop charger designed to charge the 7535 7530 internal battery along with a spare battery pack The combo charger provides sufficient power to operate and fast charge the 7535 7530 internal battery while recharging the spare battery pack L Note The combo charger
222. e than one computer at a time You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only The backup copy must include all copyright information contained on the original Except as expressly permitted in this License you may not in whole or part decompile reverse engineer disassemble modify rent lease loan subli cense distribute or create derivative works based upon the Software or transmit the Software over a network You may not copy the Software onto any bulletin board or similar system You agree that you will not utilize any information obtained from MDC or obtained or learned in the course of using the Software to develop or improve technology with similar functionality to the Software nor will you directly or indirectly assist any other party in doing so You further agree that you will not separate the various modules of the software for their different purposes if any High Risk Activities The Software is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as on line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the oper ation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage High Risk Activities Accord ingl
223. e unit has booted up completely A Important If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period including off after which normal scanning begins Refer to Dot Time msec on page 153 for details Double clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan Note that the aiming dot is standard on long range and high visibility internal scanners Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed 56 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scanners 3 8 5 Operating Internal PDF Laser Scanners This scanner decodes PDF417 two dimensional bar codes e Turn the hand held on Wait until the unit has booted up completely Aim atthe bar code and press the scan key or the trigger The beam expands into a rectangle covering the bar code to properly scan it The scan beam and a warning indicator are visible until a successful decode is achieved or three seconds have elapsed 3 8 6 Operating Internal Two Dimensional 2D Imager Scanners An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes at one time It can find a bar code regardless of its orientation that is even a bar code printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand h
224. ec Good Scan Beep on Bad Scan Beep on Scan Log File off To change a setting press space right arrow or double click MX Figure 5 84 Options Tab Double Click Parameters Click Time msec This parameter controls the maximum gap time in milliseconds for a double click If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time it is considered a double click The allowable range is 0 to 1000 A value of Zero disables this feature A double click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter When a value is not assigned for the Click Data double clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter double clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan Click Data For both integrated and external scanners this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your 7535 7530 following a double click A dialog box appears asking that you press the key you want to insert The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialog box resets the data to zero Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 191 Chapter 5 Configuration Options Tab Display Parameters Scan
225. ecimal 6 9 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu The values assigned to Tekterm parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize communication at the site in which a 7535 7530 is operating While some parameters are accessible through the Parameter Manager others can be adjusted through the Windows CE NET Control Panel This section provides a description ofall parameters and how to adjust them e Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt zero to work with the Display menu From this startup menu you can launch the Parameters menu along with TESS and or ANSI sessions You can also display the Radio Statistics screen m 01 Display A Parameters B TESS ANSI L Note Aside from the Parameters menu all other applications listed in the Display Menu are created in the Applications menu Refer to Appli cations on page 267 for details To launch an application either type the letter to the left of the application you want to use or tap the stylus on the item For example to display the Parameters menu Type the letter a or e Tap the stylus on the Parameters item L Note To return to the Display Menu press F2 the Previous key Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 243 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Working With Menus 6 10 Working With Menus The 7535 7530 offers two ways to navigate menus and choose values
226. ecoded and non decoded scanners refer to the Powerscan Programing Guide PSC Scanner types include Advanced Long Range reads very large 1D bar codes 60 mil at very long distances up to 14m Long Range reads large 1D bar codes 55 mil at long distances up to 3m Wide Angle reads large or long 1D bar codes 55 mil at short distances High Performance reads regular bar codes 5 55 mil at medium dis tances up to 1m Short Range SE923 reads regular bar codes at short distances This scanner is included with an RFID reader in the combo RFID laser option RFID is a short range device that can read RFID tags within 1 cm of the hand held scanner window It supports the Sirit 13 56MHz RFID reader writer module and the Sirit 13 56MHz combo RFID reader writer laser bar code scanner module These modules read the following RFID tags Phillips I Code Texas Instruments Tag It ISO 15693 Microchip MCRF350 series Inside Technologies PicoTag The bar code scanner reads the following bar codes UPC EAN Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 I 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar and MSI Plessey Fuzzy Logic reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D bar codes 5 55mil at medium distances up to 1m PDF Raster Laser reads 2D PDF bar codes or regular bar codes at short to medium distances 2D Imager reads regular 1D and all 2D bar codes at short to medium distances 54 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer Use
227. ed Type model and serial number should also be provided Before returning any prod ucts to Psion Teklogix please call the Customer Services Group for a Return Autho rization number Support Services Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its custom ers For detailed information please refer to Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices This section also provides information about accessing support services through the Psion Teklogix web site Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete accurate and up to date In addition changes are periodically added to the information herein these changes will be incorporated into new editions of the publication Psion Teklogix Inc reserves the right to make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this document without notice and shall not be responsible for any damages including but not limited to consequential damages caused by reliance on the material presented including but not limited to typographical errors Program License Agreements les esses Approvals And Safety Summary aper Introduction About This Manual 22e TextConyventiOns zd XP T NW AUREUS S PBs 2335 7530 Features is a a une wap IPS 1 4 About The 7535 Hand Held Computer ls 1 4 1 The 7535 Hand Held Computer ln 1 4 2 Regulatory Labels llle 1
228. ed 777 Enable RSS Limited 777 Enable RSS 14 177 Enable TLC 39 778 E1022 linear 1D imager specs 363 Fast Converge Imager 782 Full ASCII 767 Good Scan Beep 192 imager 181 integrated 353 Laser On Time 763 Linear Decode 772 Linear Security Level 763 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual xv Index xvi Low Power Timeout 63 Max Gain Imager 183 Max Illumination Imager 783 Max Integration Imager 1 83 NOTIS Editing 73 one dimensional 1D internal scanner 56 parameters for TESS Settings 296 Parameter Scanning 7 63 PDF internal scanner dimensional 1D 57 Postal PlaNET 7 85 PostNET 185 Royal 85 PowerScan LR and XLR specs 366 PowerScan standard range specs 368 Prefix 165 RFID internal scanner combo 58 safety warnings 53 Scan Data Format 65 Scan Log File 792 Scan Result Time 7 92 Security Level 772 Set Length L1 767 Set Length L2 1767 SE 1200 Advanced LR specs 355 SE 1200 HP specs 354 SE 1200 LR specs 354 SE 1200 WA specs 357 SE 1224 HP specs 357 SE 1524 ER specs 360 SE 2223 PDF specs 355 SE 923 HS specs 357 specifications external 366 specifications internal 353 Suffix 765 Supp Redundancy 7 Supplementals 7 SX5303 2D imager specs 364 target dot duration 53 163 182 techniques scanning 55 TESS Scanner parameters 296 Tranmsit Check Digit MSI Plessey 175 Transmit Check Digit 167 174 Transmit Check Digit MSI Plessey 175 Transmit Code 1D Char 765 Trioptic Code 39 Enable 766
229. ed bar code or anywhere within the decoded bar code default 5 11 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Setup Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the protocol used to monitor and manage devices attached to a TCP IP network providing they support SNMP SNMP uses Management Information Bases MIBs that define the variables an SNMP Network Management Station can access Each product has a defined set of MIBs that determine how SNMP operates the type of access allowed and so on All Teklogix products support the TEKLOGIX GENERIC MIB a MIB that defines some common features across Teklogix products All devices also support MIB II a management information base that defines the common features of TCP IP networks The SNMP Agent software embedded in the 7535 7530 product supports SNMPv1 RFC 1157 Inthe Control Panel choose the SNMP icon Rs ww El sg Network and Owner Dial up Co d t ES Password PC Power Connection Da E Regional Remove SNMP Settings Programs o 8 Storage Stylus System Figure 5 87 SNMP Icon 194 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Contact Tab 5 11 1 Contact Tab The SNMP dialog box is displayed Contact communities Trap Desti gt Contact Your System Contact Here Lacation Your Location Here Figure 5 88 Contact Tab Contact This field identifies t
230. ed messages number of unique transmitted messages number of received beacons This number should continuously increment number of initializations with the network controller number of received acknowledgements Normally this number should match the value in xm number of transmitted acknowledgements Normally this number should match the value in rm beacon timeouts Number of times the beacon has not been received as expected number of retransmissions This number should remain low if radio coverage is adequate average round trip time This number represents the milli seconds taken to send a message and receive a response from the base station Cellular Protocol message numbers fr ar fh ah ca tn sts typ msk forward remote number hex acknowledged remote number hex forward host number hex acknowledged host number hex radio address This is the Cellular Address including session number hex host terminal number of session decimal session status hex data stream type hex message mask hex 242 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Tekterm Startup Display Menu e Q memory address of first message in receive queue i e if 0 then the receive queue is empty AcQ number of messages that have been sent but not yet acknowledged by the Cellular Master decimal e TXQ number of messages waiting to be sent d
231. ediately Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow been dropped or other wise damaged in any way it should be inspected by qualified service personnel Do not disassemble the charger it should be repaired by qualified service person nel Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire To reduce risk of electric shock unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock If an extension cord must be used make sure The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number size and shape as those on the charger The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG Do not expose the charger to rain or snow Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 325 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Chargers e Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10 C 50 F Allow them to warm up to temperatures for at least two hours Battery temperature should be between 5 C and 39 C 41 F to 102 F e Do not use the charger if after an overnight charge any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing The charger should be inspected by qualified service personnel e Do not u
232. edures to be loaded into the 7535 7530 This parameter should be enabled if local procedures and the ability to switch between hosts within a TESS session are required Changes to this parameter take effect only after the 7535 7530 is reset 292 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features Lcl Process Save on Reset The menu item Local Process has a sub menu attached to it Save on Reset When this parameter is enabled set to Y data stored in the 7535 7530 is saved if the unit is reset Local procedures are defined on page 235 Send Mile This parameter controls the sending of a milestone from the 7535 7530 after a hey you command Consult the Teklogix Screen Subsystem TESS User Manual for more information on milestones Next X This parameter enables and disables the next messages used in queuing mode Kbd Locked This parameter allows you to lock set to Y or unlock set to N the keyboard for all alphanumeric input in TESS When the keyboard is locked the function keys arrow keys and the lt ENTER gt key are still functional The 7535 7530 emits an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked Changes to this parameter take effect only after the unit is reset Remap Passthru When this parameter is set to Y passthru data is remapped from the host charset to the port charset Normally passthru data is sent
233. een completed the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field In fcursor mode the UP lt DOWN gt LEFT and lt RIGHT gt arrow keys move the cursor between fields Insert mode Press lt CTRL gt i to enter insert mode In this mode data can be entered between two characters that have been previously entered In insert mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys move the cursor right and left within a field The lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field Replace mode Press lt CTRL gt r to enter replace mode In this mode data can be entered over previously entered characters In replace mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys move the cursor to the right and left within a field The lt UP gt and DOWN arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previ ous or next field SM Note When the Enter on Arr parameter is disabled set to N the lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys do not complete an entry field Refer to page 298 for details about this parameter 230 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application DEL Key Behaviour In TESS 6 65 lt DEL gt Key Behaviour In TESS Ina left justified field the lt DEL gt key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the left most position of
234. een will be anchored The y origin parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored 6 19 29 Emulation Note These parameters are only accessible when one of the following TESS S Host Conn options is selected 2392 Telnet 3274 Telnet or 5250 Telnet 2392 Telnet Emulation r 05 Emulation Features Send CR with Fkey N Range Y N see text Send CR with FKEY A function key press generates a string of text to be sent back to the host If this parameter is enabled a carriage return is appended to the function key 300 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Features 2392 Telnet 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region RightO 0 80 Clear Entry Fields When this parameter is set to Y an empty entry field is created in place of an entry field filled with spaces L Note This operation is only performed on screens received from the host Data sent to the host remains unaffected Passthru Printing Setting this parameter to Y allows the host to send d
235. efore continuing Build 11231 Shut down all other software programs especially ActiveSync to avoid a restart request during installation Tap on the lt Next gt button The program checks that ActiveSync is installed and that it is a supported version 3 5 or later If the version installed on your PC is not supported you ll need to exit the USB Setup application and install a later version of ActiveSync 2 Device Driver INF File Selection Dialog Box This dialog box allows you to choose the paths of the appropriate inf files Default file paths are provided in this dialog box E Psion Teklogix USB Setup x i ae This program will make copies ofthe installation scripts inf files for the following class of drivers and update the copies with information specific to Psion Teklogix devices To choose different scripts click Browse USB connection to Windows CE wceusbsh inf Needed for connecting to a terminal via ActiveSync Pah Files Microsoft ActiveSync drivers wceusbsh inf Browse USB mass storage usbstor inf Needed for connecting to a terminal running BooSt so thatthe Removable Disk is mapped in Windows Explorer Path C WINNT inf usbstor inf Browse Back Next gt Cancel D 2 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix D USB Setup Application Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf fnecessary tap on the Browse butto
236. el 768 Decode Performance 68 decode zones 356 Delete Char Set ECIs 765 Discrete 2 of 5 775 Dot Time 53 163 182 double click 7 97 EAN 8 Zero Extend 69 ECI Decoder 166 Enable Bookland 777 Enable CC AB 7 78 Enable CC C 178 Enable RSS Expanded 777 Enable RSS Limited 777 Enable RSS 14 177 Enable TLC 39 178 Fast Converge Imager 782 Full ASCII 767 Good Scan Beep 92 imager 181 Input translate 793 Laser On Time 763 Linear Decode 772 Linear Security Level 763 locked 7535 297 Low Power Timeout 763 Max Gain Imager 753 Max Illumination Imager 783 Max Integration Imager 783 NOTIS Editing 1 73 number system digit 138 159 Output translate 793 Parameter Scanning 7 63 pitch 362 Postal PlaNET 1 85 PostNET 185 Royal 185 Index Prefix 1 65 prefix character 155 157 removing characters 155 157 158 RFID tags reading 58 Rjct if Alpha 297 safety instructions 53 Scan Data Format 765 Scan Indicator 192 Scan Log File 7 92 Scan Result 792 Scan Result Time 792 Scan See 308 Security 53 Security Level 72 Set Length L1 767 Set Length L2 767 Short Code 53 skew 362 specular dead zone 362 Suffix 165 suffix character 155 157 Supp Redundancy 7 Supplementals 7 77 symbologies 150 target aiming dot duration 53 163 182 TESS Scanner parameters 296 Transmit Check Digit 167 Transmit Check Digit 12 of 5 174 Transmit Check Digit MSI Plessey 175 Transmit Code 1D Char 765 Trioptic
237. eld will be decoded successfully L Note When scanning multiple bar codes ensure that all of the desired bar codes are within the field of view of the scanner It is possible that even when all bar codes are within the field of view not all of them will be decoded Only successfully decoded bar codes are passed to the applica tion program The application program then issues a warning asking that you scan the missing bar codes When scanning a single bar code ensure that only the desired bar code is within the field of view of the scanner Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned Although the imager includes illumination LEDs ambient light will help the imager decode the bar codes especially if the bar code is far from the hand held AN Important Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera and the LED illumination is a flash Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated bar codes just as glare is an issue for pho tographers When pointing at a shiny surface either shift the bar code to the side or top or angle the bar code so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner e Turn the hand held computer on Wait until the unit has booted up completely Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 753
238. en 1 and 3 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 4 Code 128 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 128 Enable UCC EAN 1 28 EAN UCC bar codes include group separators and start codes To successfully scan this type of bar code EAN UCC 128 must be enabled Enable ISBT 128 To successfully scan this type of bar code this option must be set to on Decode Performance If this parameter is set to on one of three decode levels assigned to the Decode Performance Level parameter can be selected Decode Perf Level This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or aggressiveness for Code 128 symbols Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation this is useful when scanning very long and or truncated bar codes Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security 168 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration EAN 13 When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between 1 and 3 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 5 EAN 13 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 Prefix Suffix See Prefix Suffix beginning on page 157 5 10 3 6 EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 EAN 8 Zero Extend When this parameter is enabled five leading ze
239. ent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand held unit Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The 7535 7530 has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions e To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen use isopropyl alcohol 64 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Working With WiNpows CE 4 1 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 67 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus 67 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard 67 4 2 Working With Files Folders And Programs 68 4 3 The Startup Desktop 0 a 69 4 3 1 The Desktop Icons roe a il 70 4 3 2 The Taskbar o xea neata e p a Rs 70 4 3 2 1 Using The Taskbar o 71 4 3 2 2 Customizing The Taskbar 71 44 rhe Start Menu iuc a Ge ep SR 72 441 The Desktops hor 21 3 ok ertet ee uode 73 4 4 2 Security Settings os ea e 2l 74 4 4 3 Programs uus S S ege UP Wm eae Roue HE RA Reds 77 4 44 Shortcuts oia AS eed Sap ad Pa eee a UR 78 44 57 Settings ieu t e he ge S RR Ee 80 AOS RUN ts da EUR CENE EIL atts See fe 81 4 4 7 Shutdown ie i aiat aea ie m en 81 4 5 Using A Dialog Box lA 82 Psion Tekl
240. eously The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters Setting this parameter to on allows this type of symbology to be recognized Convert To Code 32 Note Code 39 must be enabled in order for this parameter to function Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from Code 39 to Code 32 Code 32 Prefix fL Note Convert to Code 32 must be enabled in order for this parameter to function When this parameter is enabled the prefix character A is added to all Code 32 bar codes 166 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 39 Set Length LI And Set Length L2 Lengths for Code 39 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner Set Code Lengths LOK x O any length ba O Iwo discrete lengths Enter value s from 1 to 55 to fs Figure 5 76 Setting Code Lengths Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to
241. epeat Backlight One shots Macros Enable character repeat Repeat delay LOO rade Settee Sree a Short s a Repeat rate Sw Se VS AC A Fast Es red el Tap here and hold down a key to test x nes Figure 5 7 Key Repeat Properties 98 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Backlight Repeat Delay The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats and sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time Repeat Rate The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second cps Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate Note Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you ve chosen 5 5 2 2 Keyboard Backlight Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Backlight tab M gt Intensity bright 1 15 seconds y n When using external power keep the backlight always ON Figure 5 8 Keyboard Backlight Properties ON Threshold The ON Threshold sliding bar allows you to determine how dark the ambient light needs to be before the keyboard backlight turns on Psion Teklogix 7535 7530
242. er 5 Configuration Radio Tab Modulation Baud Rate The options listed in the Modulation Baud Rate dropdown menu are 2 Level 4800 2 Level 9600 4 Level 9600 and 4 Level 19200 The value assigned to this parameter must be identical to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Base Station This parameter is stored in the radio s non volatile memory The default value for Modulation Baud Rate is 2 Level 9600 Data Squelch Data Squelch controls the radio receiver cutting it off when the signal is too weak for reception of anything but noise Receive Signal Strength Indicator values below the Data Squelch threshold prevent further processing of the receive signal while higher values allow further processing The allowable range is 0 to 100 with a default value of 0 In noisy environments this value can be increased to reject noise In environments with less noise this value can be decreased to allow the received signal and increase range This parameter is stored in the radio s non volatile memory Test Squelch Tap on the Test Squelch button to prompt the radio to use the Data Squelch value without committing it to the radio s non volatile memory in other words to test the value assigned to the Data Squelch parameter To commit the new Data Squelch value to the radio s non volatile memory e Tap on the OK button the dialog box is closed and the new value is saved To di
243. er Per o e n AO E E E Repeat rate slow Fast Figure 6 7 Keyboard Properties AN Important Refer to Keyboard Properties on page 98 for details about this dialog box 256 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Audio 6 16 2 Audio 04 Audio Normal windows default wav Error windows default wav Scan Accept windows default wav Scan Reject windows default wav Sounds Ctrl Panel see text The 7535 7530 emits a beep under a variety of conditions The Audio menu above lists the conditions under which your hand held will sound Sounds Ctrl Panel This option displays the Volume amp Sounds Properties dialog box This dialog box is used adjust the beeper volume and to select the conditions under which the 7535 7530 will emit a beep Volume amp Sounds Properties lok Sounds El pq 0 9 509 0 qe Enable sounds for Y Events warnings system events Applications Y Notifications alarms reminders V Key clicks Qsot Loud Screen taps O soft Loud A Figure 6 8 Adjusting The Volume AN Important Refer to Volume And Sound Properties on page 108 for details about this dialog box Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 257 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel 6 16 3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel This menu item displays the Power Properties dialog box Po
244. er security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar code quality As security levels increase the scanner s aggressiveness decreases Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 163 Chapter 5 Configuration Options Decoded Internal Scanner Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Code Type Length Codabar All MSI Plessey 4 or less D5 of 5 8 or less 12 of 5 8 or less Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded The following codes must be read three times Code Type Length MSI Plessey 4 or less D2 of 5 8 or less I2of5 8 or less Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded Bi Direction Redundancy Note This parameter is only valid if a Linear Security Level is enabled When this parameter is enabled a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions forward and reverse before being decoded JD Scanning Mode When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in
245. ere to precautions listed below The battery incorporates built in safety devices To ensure their proper function do not disassemble or alter any parts of the battery Do not short circuit the battery by directly connecting any of the exposed terminals with metal objects such as wire Do not transport or store the battery together with metal objects such as necklaces hair pins etc Do not dispose of batteries in fire Do not use or leave the battery near a heat source such as a fire or heater Do not immerse the battery in water When charging use the battery charger specifically designed for the battery Do not pierce strike throw or step on the battery Do not directly solder the battery Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet vehicle cigarette lighter etc Do not put battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container Do not use the battery in combination with primary batteries such as dry cell batteries or batteries of different capacities or brands Immediately remove the battery from the device or battery charger and stop use if the battery gives off an odor generates heat becomes discoloured or deformed or in any way appears abnormal during use Do not continue charging the battery if it does not recharge within the specified charge time The battery may burst or ignite if the battery leaks Always ensure that it is away from any exposed flames If leaking electrolyte sprays into your eyes rin
246. erial port This parameter allows you to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of this special character A value of 0 zero disables this feature Fixed Field Ovrhd This parameter defines the maximum number of characters allowed within two adjacent fixed fields that can be sent as a single field For example if two fields are 4 characters apart and this parameter is set to 5 these fields are joined into a single field of data The allowable range for this field is 0 to 80 This feature affects fields with the Normal display attribute only Enable Alarm If this parameter is set to Y the 7535 7530 emits a beep when the word ALARM appears on the application screen in the location specified by the Command Region parameter Command Region Up amp Down And Command Region Left amp Right The value assigned to the Command Region Up and Command Region Down parameters represent rows on the 7535 7530 screen The allowable values range from 0 to 24 The value assigned to Command Region Left and Command Region Right parameters represent columns on the 7535 7530 screen The allowable values range from 0 to 80 These four numbers represent the row and column addresses of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the command region Currently the only commands supported in the command region are ALARM and FONT 302 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Ma
247. erm use this LED Successful scan Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 49 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Onscreen Indicators 3 1 1 Onscreen Indicators The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators Y My Computer Recycle Bin A Lt Internet Explorer i OpenTT Figure 3 9 Taskbar The taskbar changes dynamically and only those icons that are applicable are displayed For example if a radio is not installed in your 7535 7530 the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar 4 Windows Start Button If you have a touchscreen you can display the Start Menu by tapping on the Windows Start button in the taskbar blue BLUE key KEY Modifier Key Indicators lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt BLUE gt and lt ORANGE gt are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it the key is displayed in the taskbar in owercase characters for example pressing the lt BLUE gt key once displays blue key in the taskbar If a 50 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Bf gs Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Onscreen Indicators modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on and the onscreen indicator is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar for example pressing lt BLU
248. erred Network To delete a network from this list nthe networks list highlight the network that you want to remove Tap on the Delete button 30 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Changing Network Properties 2 3 3 3 Changing Network Properties To change the properties of an existing preferred network Highlight the network that you want to modify e Tap on the Properties button Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialog box and press ENTER to save the changes 2 4 Checking The Scanner fL Note Details about operating and troubleshooting scanners and RFID readers are provided under the heading Internal Scanners on page 53 If your 7535 7530 is equipped with an internal scanner it will successfully decode most 1D bar codes as delivered Press the SCAN button and check for a valid decode on any UPC bar code If desired set the Dot Time parameter to zero in the Teklogix Scanners applet in the Control Panel to turn off the default aiming dot Performance is improved if you disable all unneeded bar codes in the Bar Codes screen Review Scanner Properties Setup on page 150 for details about bar codes 2 5 Using Microsoft ActiveSync ActiveSync Microsoft PC connectivity software can be used to connect the hand held to PCs running this software L Note Keep in mind that you ll need to run the USB Setup program to configure your work
249. es of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled In addition Center Bar Code Only must be disabled A composite symbol includes multi row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners The options available for this parameter represent multi level components of a composite symbol Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 177 Chapter 5 Configuration Decoded Intermec ISCP Enable CC C And Enable CC AB To activate these components set the parameters to on Enable TLC 39 This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter 5 10 4 Decoded Intermec ISCP Scanner Settings ok x Barcodes Options Translations Scanner Decoded Intermec ISCI y Code 39 Code 128 UPC A UPCE EAN 8 EAN 13 UPC EAN Shared Settings Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Code 11 El To change a setting press space right arrow or ick E B E A E Figure 5 77 Decoded Intermec Scanner Tap on the Scanner dropdown menu and choose Decoded Intermec ISCP 5 10 4 1 Code 39 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 4 2 Code 128 Setting this parameter to on enables Code 128 178 Psion Te
250. ess to a known sub set of SNMP Managers This tab lists the IP addresses of all the SNMP Managers which are allowed to monitor and manage this device If no entries are listed the device will accept SNMP queries from any host Figure 5 95 Permitted Hosts Tab 5 11 4 1 Adding A Host To add a new host Highlight the Add button and press ENTER File View a Manager gt 6 alk i OF Figure 5 96 Adding A Host Type a new host IP address in the text box provided and press ENTER Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 201 Chapter 5 Configuration Changing A Host 5 11 4 2 Changing A Host To change an existing host IP address Highlight the IP address you want to alter in the Permitted Hosts tab and then choose the Change button A dialog box like the one displayed when you add a host is displayed e Make the necessary changes and press ENTER 5 12 Wireless WAN A 7535 7530 equipped with a GSM GPRS or CDMA IxRTT radio provides wide area networking capabilities 5 12 1 Taskbar Icons Wireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM GPRS or CDMA 1xRTT radio is installed in the unit and the interface is enabled The letter in the signal strength icon G for GSM GPRS and X for CDMA IxRTT indicates that a packet data service is available and i
251. et it to Y AN Important Ifyou choose a Chinese character set from the Misc menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the screen a shaded box character is used as a substitute If you are using a Korean character set a right arrow character is used as a substitute Baud This parameter determines the bit rate of the port Allowable values include 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14 4kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps 115 2kbps 128 0kbps or 256 0kbps Data Bits This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port Possible values are 6 7 8 Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port The options are none odd even mark and space Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 1 5 2 used for asynchronous communication Flow Control This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your hand held computer The 7535 7530 can perform Software or Hardware handshaking or you can choose Both to enable both of these options The function of each mode is as follows Enable Used to input and output data Supports XON XOFF or no handshaking 310 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Port Parameter Settings Print Used to output data only All input characters except XON and XOFF are ignored Supports XON XOFF or no handshaking
252. eters can only be enabled Y or disabled N To enable or disable a Y N parameter e Tap the stylus on the Y N value the value will toggle between Y and N Some Y N parameters have sub menus For these parameters a double right arrow appears next to the Y or N Tap the stylus on the sub menu arrow to display the sub menu 6 10 24 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter The allowable values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words To cycle through the set Tap the stylus on the alpha field to cycle through the options 248 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application String Entry Parameters 6 10 2 5 String Entry Parameters You ll need to use the keyboard to enter values in string entry fields Refer to String Entry Parameters on page 245 for details 6 10 3 Saving Changes To Parameters Whenever a parameter value is altered the new value must be saved To do this e Press F4 the SAVE key If you are using a touchscreen Tap the stylus on the SAVE softkey label e Ifthe softkey labels are not visible you ll have to press F4 the SAVE function key If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved a dialog box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes
253. etooth Controls 723 Command Prompt 77 Command Region Up Down Left amp Right 302 Communities 196 Composite 177 187 configuring IEEE 802 11 radio 22 configuring softkey labels Label F1 F4 275 configuring softkey labels Label F1 F6 288 connecting Auto Login ANSI Telnet Settings 270 ENTER Pmpt ANSI Telnet Settings 270 Login ANSI Telnet Settings 271 Login Failed ANSI Telnet Settings 271 iv Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Login Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 271 Password ANSI Telnet Settings 271 Password Echo ANSI Telnet Settings 271 Password Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 271 connection host 269 286 connection list table Bluetooth Controls 122 Conn Type connection type 269 286 Console Port settings 190 Baud 190 Data Bits 190 Parity 190 Stop Bits 190 console port settings 308 Contact 195 Cont Nxt Fld 296 contrast adjusting 45 contrast adjusting display 45 control codes 283 control panel accessing 89 basic setup 94 Display Properties 94 icons 90 keyboard properties 98 power management properties 709 stylus properties 113 Conv UPC E To UPC A 170 Conv UPC E1 To UPC A 171 Convert To Code 32 166 Convert To EAN 13 174 Convert to UPC A 159 country code 156 CR LF CTRLJ 281 LF character 282 Newline 282 cradle See also Picker cradle 338 CRC serial I O 295 296 CTRL commands CTRLa 239 CTRLc 234 CTRLf 230 CTRL G Bell 287 CTRLh 235 CTRL H Backspace 281 CTRL h ho
254. f gnore is chosen UPC EAN is decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored If Decode is chosen UPC EAN symbols are decoded with supplementals Autodiscriminate works in conjunction with the Supp Redundancy parameter Supp Redundancy With Autodiscriminate selected in the Supplementals parameter Supp Redundancy adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission When you double tap on this parameter a dialog is displayed in which you can enter a value between 2 and 20 A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is selected and you are decoding a mix of UPC EAN symbols with and without supplementals Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 171 Chapter 5 Configuration Codabar Security Level This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge to edge UPC EAN bar codes Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level from 0 to 3 Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code Linear Decode Linear Decode applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks e g UPC A EAN 8 EAN 13 When enabled set to or a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and right blocks are successfully decoded within one laser scan This option should be enabled when bar codes are in proximity to each other JD UPC Half Block Stitchi
255. factured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Microsystems Inc has con tractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM AGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual I Il License Agreement THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engi neer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA
256. fications alarms reminders V Key clicks Qsoft amp Loud Screen taps Qsoft Loud A Figure 5 17 Volume Settings e Slide the volume button to the left to lower the beeper volume or to the right to increase the beeper volume 108 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Sound e Under the heading Enable sounds for enable the conditions under which you want the 7535 7530 to emit a beep 5 53 Sound Volume amp Sounds Properties OK x Volum Windows CE Yi Asterisk Close Program T Critical Stop Default Sound Empty Recycle Bin qe Exclamation Sound None y Scheme Windows CE Default y Figure 5 18 Sound Settings The 7530 hand held computer is equipped with a sound port This dialog box allows you to determine the sound file that will be emitted from this port 5 5 4 Power Management Properties This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the unit s battery capacity and allows you to manage battery use Inthe Control Panel choose the Power icon Password Connection Regional Remove SNMP Settings Programs o 8 Storage Stylus System Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 109 Chapter 5 Configuration Battery Capacity 5 5 4 1 Battery Capacity Inthe Power Properties dialog box open the Battery tab to view battery details Power Prope
257. for these parameters are BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse and NONE normal Bold This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Bold ANSI attribute 274 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen Blink This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Blink ANSI attribute Reverse This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Reverse ANSI attribute Underline This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Underline ANSI attribute Label Fl F4 Note This menu uses string entry fields For detailed information about com pleting this type of field refer to String Entry Parameters on page 245 r 06 Label F1 4 F1 FA Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application These keys are identified through softkey labels reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the Label F1 F4 parameter To edit a label Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Label menu and type a new name preferably one that describes
258. ft Artificial 450 ft candles Artificial 450 ft candles 4844 Lux 4844 Lux candles 4844 Lux Ambient Light c ont 8000 f Sunlight 8000 ft Sunlight 10000 ft candles 86112 Lux candles 86112 Lux candles 107 640 Lux Opening 22 MOR C30 10 ots oro LOT E C20 00 60 C chassis tempera i 55 C chassis tempera Temperature chassis temperature ture ture Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 40 to 140 F 40 to 40 to 140 F 40 to Temperature 70 C 60 C 60 C Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 357 Chapter 8 Specifications Decode Zones Parameter SE 1224HP SE 1200WA SE 923 RA 5 to 95 5 to 95 5 to 95 Humidity noncondensing noncondensing noncondensing Power A fs 100 Input Voltage 5 0 VDC 3 0 5 5 VDC 10 3 0 5 5 VDC 10 Input Current y 65 mA typical 140 mA typical 65 mA typical Standby Cur 8 uA max a 60 uA max 50 uA max Shock 2000 G 2000 G 2000 G OPN ERWEE 3 oru 0 48mW 0 94mW peak Table 8 5 SE 1224HP SE 1200WA SE 923 Scanner Specifications 8 9 3 1 Decode Zones Note Typical performance at 68 F 20 C 2 00 on high quality symbols 5 13 mil 100 UPC 26 00 20 mil 25 MRD 20 mil 60 MRD 30 50 30 76 E 25 es E w E L d E t h 12 E o 2 f E F E 1 254 E e E l E d T somi 775 E 450 Sm 86 00 E
259. g ActiveSync Command Prompt Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt At the prompt you can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive Internet Explorer The 7535 7530 is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer consistent with all Windows CE NET devices on the market You can access the Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Settings Control Panel or by double tapping on the desktop icon My Computer and then double tapping on the Control Panel icon Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 77 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Shortcuts Windows Explorer The Windows Explorer installed on your 7535 7530 is consistent with all Windows CE NET 4 2 devices You can access this option from the Start Menu under Programs Windows Explorer Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is a 7535 7530 application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the 7535 7530 Windows CE NET device Remote Desktop Connection on page 89 provides a website with details about this option 4 4 4 Shortcuts 5o My Internet Computer Explorer As ED S fg Shortcuts gt Bi system Tray m Fr C Settings K Cycle Tasks IF m O Hep Task Manager LI en Pu econ ey 1407 Nm 4 11 Shortcuts Sub Menu The System Tray If your touchscreen is not enabled you can use the System Tray
260. g One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 14 Check Digit Verification When enabled this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm either USS Uniform Symbology Specification or OPCC Optical Product Code Council Transmit Check Digit If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the bar code data Convert To EAN 13 If this parameter is enabled an I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 13 MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Plessey Set Length LI And Set Length L2 Lengths for MSI Plessey can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner 174 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Discrete 2 of 5 Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes
261. g and clearing of horizontal tab stops apply to the same horizontal position of all lines on the page When enabled set to Y horizontal tab setting and clearing apply only to the current line Edit extent This parameter selects the extent of the display to be affected by the ICH and DCH controls and received character insertion The possible values are Line Area Display or Fld The shifting caused by ICH DCH and character insertion is confined to the selected extent Disp controls When this parameter is disabled set to N any control codes received from the host are performed as described When enabled set to Y any received control functions are displayed and are not performed If any CO or C1 controls are received from the host their standard ANSI mnemonics are displayed in reverse video Other characters are displayed as normal characters This mode can also be set with the Set Mode SM control but can only be reset from the Parameters menu Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 283 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Serial 6 19 1 6 Serial 05 Serial Range Primary Port Any Available see text Secondary Port Any Available see text Async In N Y N Start 0 0 255 End 0 0 255 Primary Port amp Secondary Port ANSI print commands such as MC or Media Copy control the transfer of data to and from the serial and console ports on the hand held At the 75
262. ge indicates the status of your connection connected disconnected error messages and so on Be cat wand s E AS Make New GPRS USB Cable Connected to GPRS network A Connected Hide this message Disconnect brik Figure 5 47 Successful Connection Select the Hide button to move this message to the background You can now access the internet Bis Eat view Favorite Je x Jadaress htto 7wvww msn com y j Staying in costume for5 weeks amp f 0 RIED Figure 5 48 Accessing The Internet Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 129 Chapter 5 Configuration Total Recall 5 7 Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and setting over cold boots This utility is based on a backup and restore concept Inthe Control Panel choose the Total Recall icon File View gt w Ll Regional Remove SNMP Settings Programs Storage System Manager th Teklogix Scanners Total Recall g volume amp Sounds SMG Figure 5 49 Total Recall Icon 5 7 1 Creating A Backup Profile Total Recall PsionTeklogix Ix Figure 5 50 Backup Profile In the dropdown menu you can choose from four options Create Backup Profile View Selected Profile Restore Selected Profile and Delete Selected Profile Keep in mind however that until a profile is created the only available option is Creat
263. ges To Parameters 249 6 10 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values 249 6 11 Resetting The 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer 249 6 12 The Parameters Menu 22e 250 6 12 1 Security Settings 222A 250 6 13 Display Options les 251 6 14 More Parameters aaa 251 6 15 Radio ParametersS a 252 6 16 System Parameters 2 22 254 6 16 1 Keyboard uisi e Webs x ARR RUE Se SS 255 6 16 1 1 Macro Control Panel 255 6 16 1 2 Indicators o e 255 66 13 SO tKEYS a a a rRNA tt 256 6 16 1 4 CtrlPanel o o 256 6 162 Adimi eira AAA AA AA EE 257 6 16 3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel 258 6 16 4 User Permissions aa 258 6 16 5 Windows Properties oaoa 0220200004 259 6 16 6 Auto Start 22e 259 6 17 Scanner Control Panel a 260 218 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 6 18 View Manager ses 260 6 18 1 Split Sereen ia eo Re e ge qeRC E oS E VIR 261 6 18 1 1 Splitting And Displaying Screens 262 6 18 1 2 Moving Between Split Screens 263 6 18 1 3 Toggling Between Full amp Split Screens 263 6 18 1 4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card 263 6 18 2 Custom Characters UnicodeTM 04 264 6 18 2 1 Creating A Unicode Character 2
264. gure 7 1 on page 336 provides a visual representation of how to secure the PDM Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 335 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Portable Docking Module PDM L Note The latching mechanism on the PDM is designed for quick installation and release It is not meant for heavy duty use Psion Teklogix recommends using a powered cradle or combo charger in harsh environments Align the guide pins on the PDM with the slots on the base of the 7535 7530 and gently snap the PDM onto the hand held Figure 7 1 Attaching The PDM To The Base Of The 7535 7530 336 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Portable Docking Module PDM Figure 7 2 PDM Ports And Connectors The interfaces available on the PDM are as follows e DC power jack 15VDC 2 5A e Type A USB host port for connection to USB devices such as a mouse keyboard printer etc e Type B USB device port for connection to a USB host such as a PC RS232D DE serial port for connection to a PC COM port or a serial device such as a printer The standard Psion Teklogix PDM kit PN HU4001 includes the necessary DC power supply USB cables and RS232D 9 pin cable A cigarette lighter adaptor PN HU3012 is also available to connect the PDM to a 12 VDC vehicle s power Use only the recommended adaptor with the PDM it includes transient suppressor
265. haracter is treated as any other keyboard character For example if BKSP is pressed the usual action for that key is performed If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation application the hand held transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialog box resets the data to zero Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added Note For Code 39 bar codes the AIAG Strip is performed before the rn Strip Leading Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added 5 10 2 3 Code 128 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 128 or off to disable it Include Sym Setting Include Sym to on causes the group separator s and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the screen L Note This option is available only when EAN UCC 128 is selected Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 155 Chapter 5 Configura
266. have read this License understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions MDC Acknowledgments This product includes software developed by MDC and its licensors This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Complete Agreement This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Soft ware and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding such subject matter No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by MDC Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual V License Agreement NOTE EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THESE WARRANTY TERMS DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDA TORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE LICENSE OF THE SOFTWARE TO YOU Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc 150 Greenleaf Avenue Unit F Portsmouth NH 03801 Revised 8 12 2002 VI Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual APPROVALS AND SAFETY SUMMARY FCC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY DoC Applicant s Name amp Address PSION TEKLOGIX 2100 Meadowvale Blvd Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Contact Person Iain Roy Tele
267. he 7535 7530 serial port The default is lt CTRL gt P 16 V Note The 7535 7530 port must be set to printer see Ports Tether And D Console on page 308 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 281 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes Xmit Enter The ENTER key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field However some applications require that the lt ENTER gt key start a transmission from the 7535 7530 When enabled set to Y this parameter causes the ENTER key to start a transmission Insert When this parameter is disabled set to N it behaves in replace mode a character entered at the keyboard or received from the host replaces the character at the cursor position The cursor then advances one character position When enabled set to Y the character entered at the keyboard or received from the host is inserted at the cursor position after shifting the characters at and following the cursor forward one position The cursor is advanced one position The extent of the characters affected by the shift depends on the setting of the Edit Extent parameter see page 283 Newline When this parameter is disabled set to N an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column In addition the ENTER key transmits a CR When enabled set to Y an LF character received fro
268. he contact person for this managed node along with information about how to get in touch with this person The content of this parameter is accessible through MIB II s sysContact object Location This parameter is used to identify the physical location of this node e g Warehouse A Pillar 32B The content of this parameter is accessible through MIB II s sysLocation object Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 195 Chapter 5 Configuration Communities Tab 5 11 2 Communities Tab Community Right private Read Write public Read Only oe Manager 5 10 Figure 5 89 Community Settings The Communities tab provides a means of limiting access to SNMP managed devices to those SNMP Managers with matching community names as specified by RFC 1157 Enable SNMP Enabling Enable SNMP allows the device to respond to SNMP queries and to send Traps After enabling this option and rebooting the device the SNMP Agent will automatically start up To disable this feature remove the check mark from the check box 196 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Adding A Community 5 11 2 1 Adding A Community Choose the Add button to add a new community Name private ea Ala MES Manager 58th 10 Figure 5 90 Adding A Community Name The value assigned here is the name assigned by the network admi
269. he radio only reads it on boot up For the changes to take effect you must reset the 7535 7530 122 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 5 6 5 The Properties Tab Chapter 5 Configuration The Properties Tab Active Conn Device Name Device Class Local Address Manufacturer HCI Version LMP Version WORKABOUTPRO Handheld 00043E66C94B Zeevo Inc 1 170 1 60 Port Prefix 38 i 192 bor Figure 5 36 The Properties Tab The Properties tab displays information about your 7535 7530 and provides some port options The Device Name field shows the device name of your 7535 7530 This name can be changed see the Note on the previous page for details Device Class shows the Class of Device e g desktop hand held which is always set to Handheld Local Bluetooth Address shows the address of your 7535 7530 radio Port Prefix is used to set the port name to either BSP or COM When the name is set to BSP BSP2 to BSP9 are available for activated services including the server When COM is chosen COM7 to COMO are available Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 123 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 5 6 6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 1 To set up the internet parameters choose the Network And Dial up Connections icon from the Control Panel File View or Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Device Be A Dialing Display
270. heckout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit Enable 802 1x authentication 802 LX is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network whether wired or wireless A security protocol packet such as TLS or MDS encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunction with the 802 1X standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer Available EAPs are listed in the dropdown menu next to the EAP option To activate 802 1X highlight 802 1x authentication and check the checkbox EAP Type Extensible Authentication Protocol This dropdown menu lists the EAP types available on your system The items in this dropdown menu will vary depending on your network setup Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select a Certificate By selecting the Properties button you will be able to select a Certificate Certificate Assignment on page 115 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network 6 Saving and exiting the radio setup Once you have completed your configuration press ENTER or tap on OK The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred network The radio will search for the SSID and will compare the WEP and authentication information you specified If there is a match between your hand held settings and the access point settings the hand
271. held will communicate on the network through the access point Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 27 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Assigning An IP Address 2 3 1 Assigning An IP Address If your network is not using a DHCP server you will need to assign an IP address e Inthe SNETWLANI Settings window display the IP Information tab Internet Protocol TCP IP Address Type DHCP IP Address 10 136 10 89 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway Figure 2 11 IP Information L Note Choosing the Renew button forces the 7535 7530 to renew or find a new IP address This is useful if for example you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your 7535 7530 is dropped from the network To define a static IP address e Tap on the Configure button IP Address PELLIT O Specify an IP address IP Address LETT Subnet Mask LETT Default Gateway CETT ll X 5 Figure 2 12 Defining An IP Address 28 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Name Servers Tab Tap the stylus on the radio button next to Specify an IP address to select it Type an IP Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address in the appropriate fields Press lt ENTER gt to save your information Name Servers Tab If DHCP is enabled name server addresses are assigned automatically In the NETWLAN Settings window display the IP Information
272. hen a 7535 7530 is properly inserted in a docking station a dock icon is displayed in the taskbar at the bottom of the unit screen The hand held also detects the presence of the Ethernet network Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in your 7535 or 7530 before preforming data uploads 3 13 General Maintenance 3 13 1 Caring For The Touchscreen The touchscreen is covered with a thin flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic or crack the internal conductive coating The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen e mustard ketchup e sodium hydroxide concentrated caustic solutions benzyl alcohol and concentrated acids If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments consider applying a disposable screen protector PN HU6110 These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen When they become scratched and abraded they are easily removed and replaced Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 63 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Cleaning The 7535 7530 3 13 2 Cleaning The 7535 7530 A Important Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild deterg
273. hen a character sent from the host cannot be displayed a rectangular box is used as a substitute 6 19 1 8 Anchor View r 05 Anchor Range x origin 1 1 24 y origin 1 1 80 When enabled set to Y this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved The x origin and y origin coordinates specify where the screen origin the upper left corner of the screen will be fixed x origin and y origin The x origin parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored The y origin parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored 6 19 2 TESS Settings 04 TESS Range Auto Term N see text Terminal 1 see text Host Conn see text Screen See text Characters see text Tests see text Features see text Scanner see text Fields see text Anchor View N see text Emulation see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters Additional TESS information is documented in TESS Emulation on page 227 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 285 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Auto Term L Note Auto Term is available when 802 IQv2 is assigned to the Host Conn parameter page 286 or when 802 1Qv1 is enabled in th
274. iated port name beside the server name Once you activate a server profile it is recommended that the 7535 7530 be rebooted before you try to bond from a server R Note You do not need to reboot if you are deactivating a server 120 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Outgoing Tab 5 6 3 Outgoing Tab Devices Servers ik t Prompt Everytime v Name servi Sea eee el z CERA Figure 5 34 The Outgoing Tab Outgoing Port acts as a serial port that can be used to connect to a list of Bluetooth devices one at a time but you have the freedom to switch on the fly The Outgoing Port checkbox allows you to create the Outgoing port When the port is created the Outgoing tab lists the port name The Outgoing list dialog box displays a list of services marked as Outgoing The column indicates the currently selected service You can tap on Unselect to reset the current selection or you can tap on Select to make a selection The Remove button deletes the service from the outgoing list The Prompt menu determines the behaviour of the pop up Selection menu Choosing Everytime causes the Selection menu to be displayed each time an outgoing port is created If you choose Once the menu is displayed only when a partner service is not selected To display the Selection menu at any time e Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt FI and switch the partner Bluetooth
275. ication and so on the hand held uses the value assigned in the Switch State To Suspend field to determine when the unit will go to sleep appear to be off When the time in the Suspend field elapses without any activity the unit enters suspend state In suspend state the 7535 7530 CPU enters a s eep state and the radio is shut off The state of the device RAM contents is preserved Pressing lt ENTER gt wakes the system from suspend state When the 7535 7530 is in suspend state the network connection will not be broken immediately If the connection is dropped you must re establish the network connection 5 5 4 3 Suspend Threshold Power Propertie OK x Schemes Suspend Threshold cni Suspend Threshold 096 Maximize Maximize operating backup time time Main Battery Status High Estimated Operating Time 12 h 36 min Estimated Battery Backup Time N A o Al Figure 5 22 Advanced Tab The Suspend Threshold adjustment tells the system when to shut down when the battery drains If you choose Maximum Operating Time the unit will run until the battery is completely empty the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time If you choose Maximum Backup Time the hand held shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 111 Chapter 5 Configuration Charger 5 5 4
276. ield can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numbers When enabled set to Y the cursor moves according to field location If disabled set to N the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 297 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Enter To FO The lt ENTER gt key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field However some applications require that the lt ENTER gt key start a transmission from the 7535 7530 When enabled set to Y this parameter causes the ENTER key to be interpreted as lt F0 gt which starts a transmission Enter On Arr When this parameter is enabled set to Y the arrow keys can be used to complete data entry into a field Video r 06 Video Range Blink BLNK see text Bold ULIN see text Reverse REV see text Blink The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Blink TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal Bold The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Bold TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal Reverse
277. iginal retail pur chase Your exclusive remedy under this paragraph shall be at MDC s option a refund of the purchase price of the product containing the Software or replacement of the Software which is returned to MDC or a MDC authorized representative with a copy of the receipt THIS LIMITED WARRANTY AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE MEDIA INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY 90 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WAR RANTY LASTS SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THE LIMITED WAR RANTY SET FORTH HEREIN IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LICENSOR SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY BY JURISDICTION Disclaimer of Warranty on Software You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk The Software is pro vided AS IS and without warranty of any kind and MDC and MDC s licensor s for the purposes of warranty and liability MDC and MDC s licensor s shall be collectively referred to as MDC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNE
278. ignificant only if the Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM is disabled SATM When the Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM parameter is disabled set to N the selected areas defined by SSA ESA and DAQ can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the full contents of the buffer can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports TIM When the Transfer Termination Mode TTM parameter is disabled set to N the cursor position determines the end of the string that can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the cursor position is ignored EOL chars This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each line in a block transmission If the parameter is not used the rules specified in Transmitted Data Stream are used to determine end of line characters EOB chars This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each block transmission Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 279 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes 6 19 1 4 Kbd Modes r 05 Kbd Modes Range Arrow mode cursor cursor field Echo mode Smart Smart Local Host DEL key DEL DEL BS Clear BKSP key BS BS Clear DEL PrintScreen key 16 1 255 Xmit Enter Y Y N Insert N Y N Newline N Y N
279. il 3 0 to 6in 9to 15 cm 10mil 1 5 to 15in 4to 38cm 15mil 1 0 to 25in 2 5 to 64 cm 20mil 1 0 to 35in 2 5 to 89 cm 55mil 6 0 to 60in 15 to 152 cm High Density decoded 3mi 10 to 2in 2 5to5 1 cm 4mil 1 0 to 3in 2 5to8cm Smil 0 8 to 3 8in 2to 10cm 7 5 mil 0 6 to 4 5in 1 5 to 11 cm 10mil 0 2 to 5 5in 0 5 to 14 cm 25 minimum 65 55 Artificial light 1200 ft candles Sunlight 8000 ft candles 4 VDC to 14 VDC Undecoded 75 mA 5 VDC 368 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only Idling current low power mode Environmental Temperature Rating Humidity Shock at 23 C Vibration Water and Dust Decoding Capabilities Auto discriminates between Safety Regulatory Electrical Emissions Laser Classification Decoded 100 mA 5 VDC lt 50 uA Q 5 VDC Operating 22 to 122 F 30 to 50 C Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 5 to 95 NC Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to con crete Meets MIL STD 810E IEC529 rating IP54DW UPC A E EANS 13 JANS 13 P2 P5 Code 128 EAN add ons Code 128 MSI Plessey Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 39 Full Ascii Standard 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Complies to Gost R TUV UL cUL Complies to FCC A EN55022 B BCIQCNS13438 AS NZS3548 VCCI B TEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 CDRH 21 CFR 1040 Class II 8 11 RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Rea
280. il 80to 432 in 203 to 1097 cm 25 minimum 65 55 Artificial light 1200 ft candles Sunlight 8000 ft candles Operating 22 to 122 F 30 to 50 C Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 5 to 95 NC Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to con crete Meets MIL STD 810E IEC529 rating IP54DW UPC A E EANS 13 JANS 13 P2 P5 Code 128 EAN add ons Code 128 MSI Plessey Code 39 Inter leaved 2 of 5 Code 39 Full Ascii Standard 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Complies to Gost R TUV UL cUL Complies to FCC A EN55022 B BCIQCNS 13438 AS NZS3548 VCCI B IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 CDRH 21 CFR 1040 Class II Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 367 Chapter 8 Specifications PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs 8 10 2 PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs Communication Undecoded Mechanical Dimensions Weight Cable lengths Optical Light source Scan System Rate Depth of field Standard paper Print Contrast Ratio Pitch Skew Ambient Light Immunity Electrical Operating voltage Operating current nominal Standard and Intermec compatible 6 9 x 11 2 x 18 3 cm 2 7 x 4 4 x 7 2 in Scanner 280 g 9 9 ozs Cable 82 3 cm 32 in 176 g 6 2 ozs Collapsed 81 cm 32 in Max working 183 cm 72 in Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode VLD Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism 35 scans sec nominal Paper Labels decoded 7 5 m
281. imit Power Off Time Figure 5 69 Power Tab 146 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Radio Tab Enable Power Saving When this parameter is checked power saving is enabled Idle Poll Limit _ Note The Idle Poll Limit parameter is only used when Enable Power Sav ing is enabled This parameter determines how many transmit opportunities base station polls with available response windows must be consecutively skipped before the 7530 places the radio into power down mode for power saving The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 to 200 The default value is 10 Lower values cause the hand held to enter power saving mode quickly extending battery life but reducing 7530 responsiveness Higher values increase responsiveness but decrease battery life Power Off Time This parameter determines the amount of time in seconds the 7530 radio stays in power down mode when a power down period has been initiated Power Off Time is only used when the Enable Power Saving parameter is enabled The allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 60 5 9 5 Radio Tab 2104 x Info l Channel Protocol Power Radio Mode UNLOCKED Modulation Baud Rate 2 Level 4800 Data Squelch Data Squelch 50 Test Squelch Frequency Statistics Advanced Figure 5 70 Radio Tab Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 147 Chapt
282. ing The Pistol Grip e Using a Phillips screwdriver securely fasten the pistol grip to the back of the 7535 7530 2 2 Powering Up The 7535 7530 L Note Psion Teklogix offers a Portable Docking Module PDM along with its power supply to help speed the checkout and confirmation process for your 7535 7530 The PDM can power your hand held with or without a battery installed in the unit Refer to Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories beginning on page 321 for more information about this accessory 20 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Installing The Battery And Switching The Hand Held On 2 2 1 Installing The Battery And Switching The Hand Held On If you are not using a docking station or PDM Slide the charged battery with the contoured plastic facing you into the unit Click the battery into place 7 Figure 2 4 Installing The Battery Note Ifyou are using a docking station you can insert an uncharged battery dock the unit and switch it on If you are using a PDM you can configure your unit without a battery with a charged battery or with an uncharged battery If you are using a hand strap Hook the bottom of the hand strap into the slot at the base of the battery To switch the unit on e Press and hold down the lt ENTER ON gt key for at least one second e When all four LEDs flash yellow release the lt ENTER ON gt button A splash screen displa
283. ing Windows CE NET but it has since been severed Windows may or may not attempt to automatically install the device drivers on the next appropriate USB connection A window is displayed where you can tap on Cancel to abort the wceusbsh driver installation and continue It also contains instructions to boot your device into Windows CE NET and establish a USB connection between the device and the PC When you create the appropriate connec tion Windows automatically installs the device drivers The Found New Hardware wizard may appear Your only interaction with this window is to click on the lt Finish gt button If this is the first appropriate connect between the device and the PC i e there was no previous devnode for the device in the system the Continue button is activated as soon as the connection is made Where there was a devnode present in the system and it has been marked for rein stall the Continue button will not become active until Windows has D 4 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual D 14 Appendix D USB Setup Application Post Installation completed the driver installation and the device is no longer marked for reinstall Only one devnode per device can be unset when the device drivers are finally installed If you indicated that the usbstor driver should be installed the same steps as described above are carried out for usbstor except that the 7535 7530 must be runni
284. ing is used if the page is longer than the display fL Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Origin Scroll When enabled set to Y the display window moves to the origin upper left corner after LOCK H or LOCK B messages Field Scroll When enabled set to Y the display window moves to the left after entering a new entry field Pages Saved This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at the 7535 7530 Storing frequently used page data at the 7535 7530 reduces the need for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link Retransmitting data can reduce the system response time Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the available memory for other functions App Parameter The Application parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to the TESS query command Enter zero to disable this parameter Label Fl F4 I LA Note This menu uses string entry fields For detailed information about com Ea pleting this type of field refer to String Entry Parameters on page 245 06 Label F1 4 F1 F2 F3 FA 288 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Characters Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application These keys are identified through softkey labels reverse video labels that ar
285. ion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Depth Of Field SX5303 Parameter SE 5X5303 Operating Temperature 20 to 50 C 4 to 122 F Relative humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Storage temperature 30 to 60 C 22 to 140 F Shock 15 drops 5 ft to concrete at room temperature when integrated correctly into end user packaging 8 9 6 1 Depth Of Figure 8 9 X5303 Imager Specifications Field 5X5303 Standard Lens Performance Sample Symbologies Focal Length DOF Data Matrix 15 mil 7 2 in 18 1cm DoF Data Matrix 12 mil 5 4 in 13 7cm DoF PDF417 15 mil 11 4 in 28 9cm DoF PDF417 10 mil 8 9 in 22 6cm DoF PDF417 7 5 mil 4 2 in 10 7cm DoF PDF417 5 mil 3 0 in 7 6cm DoF Code 39 15 mil 10 7 in 27 2cm DoF Code 39 10 mil 8 6 in 21 8cm DoF UPC 13 mil 9 2 in 23 5cm DoF Figure 8 10 X5303 Depth Of Field Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 365 Chapter 8 Specifications External Scanner Specifications 8 10 External Scanner Specifications 8 10 1 PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs Communication Undecoded Mechanical Dimensions Weight Cable lengths Electrical Operating voltage Operating current nominal Idling current low power mode Optical Light source Scan System Rate Depth of field Long Range Standard and Intermec compatible
286. ions Support 5 Q Mouse Network and Owner ANA Ol Figure 5 2 Choosing The Display Icon 94 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Display Contrast 5 5 1 1 Display Contrast The Contrast tab allows you to adjust the 7535 7530 display contrast to suit the environment in which you are using the hand held The contrast control can also be used to reduce display flickering that can occur with colour displays in certain lighting conditions Inthe Display Properties dialog box open the Contrast tab Owner Password Figure 5 3 Display Contrast Properties e Slide the bar in the Contrast tab to the left to decrease or darken the display contrast e Slide the bar to the right to increase or lighten the display contrast 5 5 1 2 Display Backlight The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time if the ambient light is below a specified threshold and if the 7535 7530 is in use key press scanner trigger or data received from the host The Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how the backlight behaves in low light conditions and when the unit is not in use f IN Note Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only X Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 95 Chapter 5 Configuration Display Backlight
287. is parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature This is because the hand held performs the strip function before it pro cesses the data through the AIAG feature if the prefix is stripped the data is not identified as AIAG Error Accept If the Err Accept and AIAG Strip parameters are enabled all label data without an AIAG identifier character is accepted If the Err Accept parameter is disabled and the AIAG Strip parameter is enabled the label data is not accepted Mod Checks This parameter allows you to choose the check digit calculated MOD 43 Check MOD 10 Check or None Double tap on Mod Checks to display your options e Tap on a check digit to highlight it and tap on OK If you choose None a check is not executed Field Size Chars Field Size The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and the prefix and suffix characters are added If the field size is non zero only bar codes of that length are passed through 154 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 128 Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialog box resets the data to zero Suffix Char The appended c
288. ist button to display a dialog box listing available channels Available Channels al M Channel 2 Channel 3 M Channel 4 ui Figure 5 65 Channel Enable Dialog Box This dialog box is completed by default with all channels that have frequencies configured A checkmark indicates that a channel is enabled An unchecked check box indicates that the channel is disabled The maximum number of channels supported by the RA1001 Narrow Band radio is 20 Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel Channel Number and makes it available for channel searching For example if Channel 1 is the operating channel and all other channels are enabled the 7530 can roam through all 20 channels Channel Switch Speed This parameter changes the threshold the 7530 uses to determine when communication quality with a base station is unacceptable When this threshold is exceeded the unit starts channel searching for a new base station Setting this parameter to Slow means a higher threshold the 7530 is more tolerant of poor communication quality When the channel quality of the hand held radio drops below 46 the unit monitors the channel quality for 15 timeout periods Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 141 Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab A before searching for a new channel If Channel Switch Speed is set to Fast the current channel is only monitored for up to
289. iter toute interf rence radio avec le service autoris l appareil doit tre utilis l int rieur tout en tant loign de toute fen tre afin de garantir le maximum de protection Si cet quipement ou son antenne mettrice est install l ext rieur il est alors soumis licence Important Waste Electrical and Electronic equipment WEEE directive 2003 96 EC This Product and its accessories comply with the requirements of the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC If your end of life Psion Teklogix product or accessory was first placed on the European Union market after August 12th 2005 contact your local country representative for details on how to arrange recycling For a list of international subsidiaries please go to www psionteklogix com LASER WARNINGS For your own safety it is critical that you comply with the following warnings A CAUTION The laser aperture is located in the front of the hand held Do not look into the laser beam or point the beam at people or animals Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual XI Approvals And Safety Summary YA CAUTION Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure YA CAUTION The use of optical instruments magnification devices with this product will increase eye hazard This product may contain a laser scanner that emits les
290. ity when the 7535 7530 is operating with external power not battery power If the 7535 7530 is drawing power from its battery this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box take affect 5 5 1 3 Display Appearance e Inthe Display Properties dialog box open the Appearance tab Appearance Backlight contrast T gt Scheme Windows Standard y Save Delete Apply E 7 x Inactive Windil Ink Ic Button Item Desktop y m Password Owner Figure 5 5 Display Appearance Properties This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 97 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties 5 5 Keyboard Properties This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the lt BLUE gt and lt ORANGE gt modifier keys This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters Inthe Control Panel choose the Keyboard icon Dialing Display Input Panel Internet IPv6 Options Support 5 g Mouse Network and Owner gt SOMA Figure 5 6 Choosing The Keyboard Icon 5 5 2 1 Key Repeat Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Repeat tab Keyboard Properties ok x R
291. k A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is established A user application must be loaded onto each 7535 7530 that utilizes the quad dock for communication When the network is connected and this application is loaded the quad dock is ready for use Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 333 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Indicators And Controls 1 8 2 Indicators And Controls The quad dock has no user controls It is equipped with a power indicator LED and RJ45 link and traffic indicator LEDs When a valid network link is established a green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector 1 8 3 Using The Quad Dock e Gently slide the 7535 7530 into the cradle portion of the quad dock until lightly latched The 7535 7530 detects that it is in a quad dock and displays the appropriate icon in the taskbar g The battery charge LED on the 7535 7530 lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery Interaction with the 7535 7530 while in the quad dock is a function of the user application software used to communicate with the host network 1 8 4 Network Access The quad dock includes a four port 10 100 Ethernet hub Each of the four downstream ports are connected to dedicated USB to Ethernet converters These USB converters appear as USB slaves to the 7535 7530 USB host controller The 7535 1530 automatically detects insertion into a
292. key 7530s all alpha characters are printed on the unit plastic in orange typeface above the numeric keys To access an alpha character you must first press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha character you want to type is printed Because the alpha keys on these keyboards are laid out much like the letters on a telephone generally in groups of three letters per numeric key you need to take a few extra steps to access the alphabetic characters The examples in this section help illustrate how to access alpha characters Choosing A Single Alpha Character L Note Keep in mind that the following examples assume that One Shot is enabled locking the ORANGE key on after being pressed only once Refer to Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 100 for details The examples below illustrate how to access A B and C all of which are printed in orange characters above the numeric key 2 To choose the letter a e Press the lt ORANGE gt key and press the numeric key lt 2 gt To choose the letter b e Lock the lt ORANGE gt key on and press lt 2 gt twice e Unlock the lt ORANGE gt key To choose the letter c e Lock the lt ORANGE gt key on Press lt 2 gt three times and then e Unlock the lt ORANGE gt key Creating Uppercase Letters To display a capital letter e Press the lt ORANGE gt key and then the lt SHIFT gt key before typing the a
293. klogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration UPC A Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 1043 UPC A Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A bar code scanning recognition Prefix Suffix Refer to page 157 for details 5 1044 UPC E Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC E Prefix Suffix Refer to page 157 for details 5 10 4 5 EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 Prefix Suffix See Prefix Suffix beginning on page 157 5 10 4 6 EAN 13 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 Prefix Suffix See Prefix Suffix beginning on page 157 5 10 4 7 UPC EAN Shared Settings The setting assigned to the Addendum parameter associated with this option is shared across all UPC and EAN bar codes Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 179 Chapter 5 Configuration Interleaved 2 of 5 Addendum Refer to Addendum on page 157 5 10 4 8 Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 4 9 Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 4 10 Code 11 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11 Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 4 11 Codabar Enabled Set
294. l TA Figure 5 26 Setting Stylus Sensitivity Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 113 Chapter 5 Configuration Touchscreen Calibration 5 5 5 Touchscreen Calibration Touchscreens rarely require recalibration However if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item follow the directions below Choose the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button Double Tap Calibration Options Tf your device isn t a responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate 08 Figure 5 27 Calibrating The Touchscreen e Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen 5 5 5 3 Touchscreen Options This tab allows you to disable the touchscreen e Choose the Options tab and select the checkbox next to Disable the touch panel 114 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Certificate Assignment 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment Inthe Control Panel choose the Certificate icon File View x o0 O L peseqeeeseneseesveesonsosel bd f Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Device Properties E E Dialing Display Input Panel Internet IPv6 Keyboard Options Support Fy 5 e Mouse Network and Owner 4 54 Figure 5 28 Certificates Icon This dialog
295. l expansion slots One SDIO MMC slot One Type II Compact Flash slot One Type III Extended PC Card Slot 7530 only External ports Tether Port with RS232 serial decoded scanner printer Undecoded scanner support USB host 6 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction About The 7535 Hand Held Computer Docking station port with RS232 serial with diagnostics USB device USB host Power in out e Freezer option 7530 only Heated scan window to reduce fogging Internal heat control optimizes low temperature performance and battery life e Power management Upto 12 hour usage Lithium Ion standard battery reduced in freezer applications Quick swap packs Advanced smart battery with gas gauge Runs with battery wall adaptor or cigarette lighter Built in fast charger 2 hours System backup during battery swap 10 minutes One week real time clock backup e Network Management SNMP MIB 2 support Remote software download Remote WLAN management 4 About The 7535 Hand Held Computer The 7535 is ruggedized hand held personal computers running the Microsoft Windows CE NET operating system It is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions All possible bar code input methodologies are supported by one of a variety of scanners available Optimization for specific operati
296. l security can exit Tekterm by pressing lt ALT gt F4 If Exit is set to N the operator cannot exit Tekterm 6 16 5 Windows Properties 04 Windows Properties Range Title Bar N Y N Menu Bar N Y N Block Move Y Y N Title Bar When you set this parameter to Y a title bar is displayed at the top of a window specifying the name of the application and the purpose of the window Menu Bar Setting this parameter to Y displays a horizontal bar below the title bar that contains a set of menus Mode Keyboard and Apps You can tap on a menu name in the Menu Bar for quick access to a list of parameters to help with such activities as changing fonts moving the cursor around the screen panning the contents of the screen and working with TESS and ANSI applications Block Move Enabling setting to Y Block Move prevents the screen contents from moving when the Title Bar is visible 6 16 6 Auto Start Auto Start determines whether or not Tekterm is automatically launched when the 7535 7530 is reset If this parameter is set to N Tekterm will not be launched when the hand held resets Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 259 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scanner Control Panel 6 17 Scanner Control Panel This menu item displays a Scanner Properties dialog box in which you can set up the particulars of your unit s scanner performance choose th
297. l segments with the left pane containing the Parameters menu and the right pane containing no fixed application The Type and View IDs parameters would be completed as follows 04 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs A Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 263 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Custom Characters Unicode To change the application displayed in the pane with no fixed application Ifthe cursor is not currently in the pane press lt CTRL gt lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow to move the cursor into the appropriate screen e Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt to display the startup Display Menu Type the letter corresponding to the new application you want to display 6 18 2 Custom Characters Unicode V fL Note The Unicode characters created here are accessible only within the Tekterm application To create Unicode characters that are accessible system wide refer to Unicode Mapping on page 103 The Custom Characters parameter allows you to create Unicode characters not available directly from the keyboard including accented characters Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium You can create up to 20 Unicode characters that will be stored in a pop up menu accessible from any application 6 18 2 1 Creating A Unicode Character fL Note You can create a Unicode character by pressing and holding down the lt ALT gt
298. lable applications are listed in the main Display Menu Each application listed in the Display Menu is preceded by a letter for example Parameters is preceded by an A This letter is used in the View IDs string entry field to fix each pane of a split screen to a corresponding application If you need to display the startup Display Menu e Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt To split a screen With the cursor on the Type parameter use the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to scroll through the types of split screens available The vertical and horizontal lines displayed at the Type parameter indicate how the screen will be split for example in the sample screen on page 263 the vertical lines indicate the screen will be vertically split into two segments The screen can also be split horizontally 3 ways or 4 ways Once you ve indicated how you want to split the screen in the Type parameter Use the lt DOWN gt arrow key to move the cursor to the View IDs parameter Foreach application you want to display type the letter corresponding to the application For example suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the Parameters menu in the left pane of the screen and a TESS session in the right pane In the Display Menu the letter A represents Parameters and B represents TESS The Type and View ID values would be represented
299. le status line as it might appear at the bottom of your screen Lock B Lock H fld enh application name e lt CTRL gt lt W gt Displays the 7535 7530 status when the unit is in Lock B or Lock H mode The status line would be similar to the sample above e lt CTRL gt lt T gt Displays the 7535 7530 status with the terminal number instead of the name Lock B Lock H rep terminal nn e lt CTRL gt lt gt Displays a menu of available hosts 6 6 9 Resetting A TESS Session Resetting a TESS session requires that lt CTRL gt C be pressed three times within a two second period to generate the RESET User request message e Press and hold down the lt CTRL gt key and press the lt C gt key three times within a two second period e Press ENTER This procedure restarts the TESS session without affecting the rest of the 7535 1530 234 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Local Menu 6 6 10 The Local Menu The host can store local procedures in the 7535 7530 for use when the unit is off line A menu of these procedures appears whenever lt CTRL gt lt L gt is pressed see Figure 6 3 on page 235 e Press the function key corresponding to the procedure you want to perform Local procedures will not function when the Lcl Process and Queuing parameters are disabled see Lcl Process Save on Reset on page 293 and Que
300. less it is at the right end of the char acter string in this case it erases the character to the left of the cursor When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty and any further lt BKSP gt functions in the empty field result in a key board error beep na right justified field the lt BKSP gt function erases the character that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to the right one position e If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most character position of that field the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased it remains in the right most position in the field When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty i e any pre filled data is not displayed Pressing the BKSP key in the empty field sounds a keyboard error beep The lt BKSP gt key can delete data pre filled by the host application If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table The lt BKSP gt key Fcursor mode operates in exactly the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode i TESS Status Message Press lt CTRL gt lt S gt to continuously display the status message in the lower left corner of the screen Insert mode
301. light readable for outdoor use Optional monochrome screen available for 7535 only Optional non touchscreen available for 7535 only Touchscreen Passive stylus or finger operation Signature capture Integral stylus holder Rugged 5 wire technology Keyboards Illuminated with EL backlight Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction 7535 7530 Features Ergonomically designed for left or right hand use One handed operation with lt ENTER gt keys on the left and right side of keyboard 7530 only Dedicated function keys 7535 Two formats available 36 key large button numeric with 10 function keys 58 key alpha with 10 function keys 7530 Two formats available 3T key large button numeric with 10 function keys 63 key alpha with 10 function keys Voice Record Features Voice features speaker and microphone 7530 only Indicators and controls nternal speaker and microphone 7530 only beeper with volume control LEDs for radio transmit and receive scanning battery status and user applications Bar code applications Internal 1D and 2D scan engines standard wide angle long range Fuzzy logic internal scan engine Internal 1 3 megapixel CMOS image capture scan engine Supports decoded and undecoded tethered scanners e RFID applications Internal combo laser scanner RFID engine Tethered 900 MHz reader writer Interna
302. log box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead in characters for UPC E and UPC E1 symbols transmitted to the host device System Char system character transmitted with the data Country code and System Char both the country code 0 for USA and system character are transmitted with the data or None no preamble is transmitted The lead in characters are considered part of the symbol Conv UPC E To UPC A This parameter converts UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit 170 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration UPC EAN Shared Settings Conv UPC EI To UPC A This parameter converts UPC E1 zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Prefix Suffix See Prefix Suffix beginning on page 157 5 10 3 9 UPC EAN Shared Settings The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN bar codes Enable Bookland EAN Setting this parameter to on allows your scanner to recognize Bookland EAN bar codes Supplementals Supplementals are additionally appended characters 2 or 5 Double tapping this parameter displays a list of options I
303. lpha character Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 43 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Numeric Keyboards 36 Key And 37 Key Choosing More Than One Alpha Character From The Same Key If you need to choose more than one alpha character from a single key you ll need to press the Accept key between alpha selections The Accept key is presented as an arrow symbol above the 0 zero key Pressing this key signals the 7535 7530 to display the alpha character you ve chosen and await the next selection from the same key For example suppose you want to type the letters a b and c These letters are all accessible from the numeric key 2 To type the letter a e Lock the lt ORANGE gt key on and then press the numeric key lt 2 gt e Press the Accept key lt gt to indicate that the letter a should be accepted and that another letter from the same key will be chosen To type the letter b Pressthe 2 key twice e Press lt gt to accept the letter b To type the letter c e Press the 2 key three times When you have completed your alpha selections from this key you can do one of the following e Ifyou want to choose additional alpha characters from another key s leave the lt ORANGE gt key on and press the next numeric key that supports the alpha character you require e If you do not want to
304. m Reset and Cold Reset E o My Internet Computer Explorer EZ Ja Y Shutdown Figure 4 15 Shutdown Sub Menu Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 81 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Using A Dialog Box L Note This menu varies slightly depending on the security level chosen When the 7535 7530 is set to User level the Shutdown option is replaced by Suspend A sub menu is not available At Teklogix security level an additional option is available in the sub menu Bootloader This option behaves like cold reset except that the 7535 7530 starts Bootloader rather than Windows CE NET Suspend The Suspend option suspends the 7535 7530 immediately this is equivalent to turning the hand held off Warm Reset The Warm Reset option resets the 7535 7530 leaving all saved files and registry settings intact Any unsaved data is lost Cold Reset The Cold Reset option resets the 7535 7530 Any files not stored in permanent memory are lost however the registry settings are saved 4 5 Using A Dialog Box A dialog box like the samples in Figure 4 16 appears when you need to make selections and enter further information You can move between dialog items by tapping on them with your stylus provided your unit is equipped with a touchscreen or by pressing the arrow keys and the lt TAB gt key lt SHIFT gt lt TAB gt moves the cursor backwards 82 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Co
305. m most ANSI terminals Table 6 2 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys maps the equivalent VT220 keys Psion Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key lt UP gt arrow Up arrow lt DOWN gt arrow Down arrow lt RIGHT gt arrow Right arrow lt LEFT gt arrow Left arrow lt F1 gt lt F4 gt PF1 PF4 lt F5 gt None lt F6 gt lt F 10 gt F6 F10 lt F11 gt F11 ESC lt F12 gt F12 BS lt F13 gt F13 LF lt F14 gt F14 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 237 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Block Mode Local Editing Psion Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key lt F15 gt Help lt F16 gt Do lt F17 gt lt F20 gt F17 F20 lt F21 gt Find lt F22 gt Insert Here lt F23 gt Remove lt F24 gt Select lt F25 gt Previous Screen lt F26 gt Next Screen lt F27 gt lt F36 gt None Table 6 2 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 6 1 4 Block Mode Local Editing Psion Teklogix 7535 7530s support block mode or Local Editing Application programs must be specifically written to support this mode For software that supports this mode the keys shown in Table 6 3 Function Of Keys In Block Mode have special meaning Key Function ENTER Starts transmission of data Function keys Start transmission of data Move cursor to the next unprotected position in
306. m the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next line The lt ENTER gt key transmits both a CR and an LF Disable kbd Setting this parameter to Y disables the keyboard and scanner When this parameter is set to N the keyboard and scanner are enabled DEC Cursor Keys This parameter can be set to either Cursor Mode or Application Mode Cursor Mode causes the cursor keys to generate ANSI cursor control sequences Application Mode causes the cursor keys to send application control functions 282 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Edit Modes 6 19 1 5 Edit Modes r 04 Edit Modes Range Auto wrap N Y N Erasure mode N Y N Tab stop mode N Y N Edit extent Line See text Disp controls N Y N Auto wrap If Auto wrap is disabled set to N characters received when the cursor is at the right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters If Auto wrap is enabled set to Y the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is filled The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin Erasure mode When this parameter is disabled set to N erase functions can only erase unprotected characters When enabled set to Y the erase functions can erase characters regardless of their protected state Tab stop mode When this parameter is disabled set to N the settin
307. matic connect checkbox is checked unchecked by default the Wireless WAN user interface will attempt to establish a GPRS connection whenever GPRS is available e g after resume from suspend without further user interaction To activate the automatic connection mode Tap on the OK button 208 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Data Connection Configuration While automatic connection mode is enabled the Connect Data button in the main Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto To close the currently active connection if any and disables the automatic connection mode Tap on Disable Auto Important Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than the Wireless WAN user interface e g Connection Manager are expected to open and close connections If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another applica tion closes the GPRS connection the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re establish the connection In most cases the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is required This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the same device The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is detected this may require a warm boot The connection parameters are retrieved from a database Manual configuration should be necessary only if e One or more par
308. means software documentation and any fonts accompanying this License whether on disk in read only memory on any other media or in any other form You may not modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software If the Software is licensed for concurrent use you may not allow more than the maximum number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently The Software is licensed as a Shareware version on one computer only You may use the Software distributed and licensed as Shareware on a trial basis only The shareware version of the Software may be distributed freely without any associated fees to other parties who wish to try the software as long as the Software is distributed within an exact copy of the original MDC self extracting installation file In other words nothing may be left out of the Shareware as distributed on MDC s web site at http www mtghouse com Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual License Agreement All permanent licenses are prepaid and the Software is licensed to you by MDC You own the media on which the Software is recorded but MDC and or MDC s licensor s retain title to the Software The Software and any copies which this License authorizes you to make are subject to this License Permitted Uses and Restrictions This License allows you to install and use the Software on a single computer at a time This License does not allow the Software to exist on mor
309. mn 3 3 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual INDEX Anchor Line 3 3 Anchor View x origin 285 300 y origin 285 300 ANSI Hof Cols 274 of Pages 273 of Rows 273 Applications menu 267 Arrow Key Remap Telnet Settings 272 arrow keys 237 auto answerback string 277 Auto Login Telnet Settings 270 Auto Term 268 286 Group 268 286 block mode 238 278 279 Colour Override 276 configuration 236 Conn Type connection type 269 CR character 282 device attribute requests 237 device attribute string 277 disabling the keyboard scanner 282 Edit Modes 283 ENTER key 237 281 ENTER Pmpt Telnet Settings 270 ESC Prompt Telnet Settings 270 Func Key Remap Telnet Settings 272 Function key equivalents 237 Group Auto Term 268 286 Host Telnet Settings 270 Kbd Modes 280 282 keyboard lock 278 LF character 282 local editing mode 238 276 Login Telnet Settings 271 Login Failed Telnet Settings 271 Login Prompt Telnet Settings 277 Media Copy 278 mnemonics 283 i Index if multiple sessions 267 Password Telnet Settings 271 Password Echo Telnet Settings 271 Password Prompt Telnet Settings 271 Port 270 sessions closing 239 sessions establishing new 239 sessions listing 239 sessions moving between 239 settings 268 285 Telnet connection 269 Terminal 268 Terminal Type Telnet Settings 270 transmitting data 155 157 278 Xmit Modes 276 279 802 IQ connection 269 ANSI Settings Conne
310. mode is used for repetitive tasks and the queued screens look identical The 7535 7530 displays a Next message indicating that a new page is on the display Next messages also contain information about radio communications NEXT B indicates that the 7535 7530 has data to transmit to the base station NEXT H indicates that the base station has acknowledged a transmission Unlike lock messages Next messages do not lock the keyboard Keying is allowed while Next messages are displayed While queuing mode may improve apparent response time it can present difficulties to hosts that are operating in real time It should only be used after careful consideration of the host environment The 7535 7530 must be configured for queuing mode see the Queuing parameter on page 292 Additional information on queuing can be found in the TESS Teklogix Screen Subsystem Manual 6 1 ANS Emulation The Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes 6 7 1 Configuration To configure the 7535 7530 for ANSI mode the Name and Type of session in this case ANSI must be specified in the Applications menu This menu is described in the section titled Applications on page 267 Next a unique number must be assigned using the Terminal parameter This number should be unique across the e
311. mperature is acceptable A fully discharged battery will normally take between 1 5 and 4 hours to charge When the battery charge reaches 75 the indicator flashes green At full capacity it turns solid green When the battery is fully charged the charger stops applying power the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot The 75 charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge it often occurs after less than an hour 1 5 5 Troubleshooting 1 5 5 1 Excessive Charge Duration The charger is equipped with a recalibration function a function that fully discharges and then fully recharges the battery This process is necessary to recalibrate the battery capacity gauge internal to the battery The charger attempts recalibration when e the battery capacity is at less than 30 and e the battery has undergone more than 40 partial charge cycles since the last full dis charge A complete battery discharge takes between 1 5 and 4 hours to complete When in discharge mode the LED indicator flashes yellow The recalibration function extends the charge time by up to 2 hours 328 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Indicator Flashing Red 1 5 5 Indicator Flashing Red If the indicator flashes red Remove all batteries and disconnect the mains power cable Wait at least 20 seconds and then plug the cable in again If any of the charg
312. mputer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Using A Dialog Box Date Time IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer Name Servers Wireles KI A y S M WTF S 30 EN 3 4 5 Radio 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ito MEME 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Specify an IP address 27 28 29 30 1 Tebar wes COOU 4 6 8 10 Time Zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Cal w Automatical Aor dat song ABE Dropdown Menu gt A A heckbox Button Figure 4 16 Dialog Boxes L Note If your unit is equipped with a touchscreen you can use the stylus to tap on an element in a dialog box to select or deselect it display dropdown menu items save your selections and so on Dialog boxes contain one or more of the following elements Tab A tab separates different elements of a dialog box Press the TAB key until a tab in the dialog box is highlighted To display adjoining tabs press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key To display the information in the next tab from anywhere in the window press lt CTRL gt TAB Textbox A textbox requires that you type information Press the TAB key to highlight the textbox and then type the appropriate information Dropdown This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the dropdown menu to indicate that additional options are available Press the TAB key t
313. mum 40 absolute dark light reflectance measured Sunlight 10000 ft candles 107 640 Lux d at 650 nm at 650 nm UPC EAN Code 128 Code UPC EAN Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 1 2 of 5 Discrete 39 Code 93 1 2 of 5 Discrete Symbologies 2 of 5 Codabar MSI 2 of 5 Codabar MSI UCC EAN 128 TriOptic Code UCC EAN 128 TriOptic Code 39 39 Laser On Time Aim Duration Laser Online mun D tanon Power Mode Trigger Mode Power Mode Trigger Mode Sige etl AA Bidirectional Redundancy Programmable Bi directional Redundancy Symbology types lengths Data Parameters Symbology types lengths Data formatting Serial Parameters formatting Serial Parameters Beeper Tone Beeper Tone Scan Angle Pattern Controls Artificial 450 ft candles 4844 Artificial 450 ft candles 4844 Ambient Light 11 Duy Sunlight 8000 ft candles 86 112 Lux Operating Temperature 22 to 131 F 30 to 55 C chassis temperature 22 to 131 F 30 to 55 C chassis temperature Storage Temperature 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing 5 to 95 noncondensing Power Input Voltage 3 0 5 0 VDC 10 5 5 VDC 10 Input Current 65 mA typical 72 mA typical Standby Current 50 uA max 50 pA max Shock 2000 G 2000 G Output Power peak 0 83mW 1 33mW Table 8 1 SE 1200HP amp SE 1200LR Specifications 354 Psio
314. n llle s 236 6 7 1 Configuration 2er s 236 6 7 2 Sending Data To The Host o 237 6 7 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 237 6 7 4 Block Mode Local Editing leen 238 6 7 5 Working With Sessions 222 llle 239 6 7 5 1 Establishing A New Session ls 239 6 7 5 2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions 239 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 217 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 6 7 5 3 Closing A Session 2 20 2 eee ee 239 6 7 5 4 Printing A Screen e 240 6 7 5 5 Smart Echo Disabling 240 6 8 The Radio Statistics Screen 2 ooa ee 240 6 9 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu 00 243 6 10 Working With Menus sss 244 6 10 1 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus 244 6 0 1 4 Sub Menus les 244 6 10 1 2 Numeric Parameters 245 6 10 1 3 Y NParameters 22e 245 6 10 1 4 AlphaParameters 2l llle 245 6 10 1 5 String Entry Parameters 245 6 10 2 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 247 6 10 2 1 Sub Menus len 247 6 10 2 2 Numeric Parameters o a 248 6 10 2 3 Y N Parameters 22e 248 6 10 2 4 AlphaParameters o 248 6 10 2 5 String Entry Parameters o 249 6 10 3 Saving Chan
315. n Port Scan See Parameters 6 20 3 Port Scan See Parameters When Scan See is specified as the peripheral for a port the parameters listed under the Scan See sub menu are used to tailor the operation of this type of scanner The other parameters listed in this menu Character Set Baud and so on are identical to those described beginning on page 308 r 05 Scan See Character Set Baud Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Retries Input Tmo Scan See gt 9600 8 none 1 3 2 gt 6 20 3 1 Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 05 2 Scan See Range Anchor Line 1 Owe 1 Anchor Column 19 05 l9 Follow Cursor Y Y N Line Offset 0 25 25 Column Offset 0 80 80 Wraparound N Y N Panning Y Y N Line Scrolling N Y N Brightness 3 0 to 5 Arrows Bright Bright Horz Vert Version 2 0 22 The Scan See display is mapped to a specific area on the 7535 7530 screen called the viewport and is continuously updated to reflect that portion of the screen The Scan See viewport is defined as follows 312 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport Anchor Line Anchor Column A location on the Scan See display the anchor is chosen as a reference point Line Offset Column Offset A predefined displacement the offset is added to the location of
316. n Creating A Backup Profile Profile Location allows the operator to specify where the profile is to be saved The location for the profile will typically be Flash or a Storage card e Choose the Next button to display the next dialog box Add Files Add Files Databases Registry By File Back I Figure 5 53 Adding Files By default All Files is selected so that all installed or copied files database entries and the Registry will be saved You can however limit the backup to database and or the registry only By tapping the checkbox next to these items you can add or remove a check mark to enable or disable the option The By File option allows you to select predefined file types e Remove the check mark next to All Files You ll notice the checkbox next to By File changes H indicating that additional options are available 132 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Creating A Backup Profile e Choose this icon EH next to By File to view your options All Files Databases Registry By File Y By Individual File Files 0 E By File Type Figure 5 54 By File Type Choosing By Individual File displays a pop up menu where you can tailor the list of files you want to back up Im Files x Registry Add Files By File Remove Files pw py Indiviqual plie plles U HE By File Type el WE Figure 5 55 A
317. n the hand held transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 157 Chapter 5 Configuration EAN 8 A A Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added 5 10 2 5 EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 or off to disable it Include Check If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter see page 153 must be enabled Refer to Addendum on page 157 Prefix Suffix See Prefix Suffix beginning on page 157 5 10 2 6 UPC A Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A Include Number Sys If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data Include Check If this parameter is enabled the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data Addendum Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter see page 153 must be enabled Refer to Addendum on page 157 158 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration UPCE Prefix Suffix Refer to page 157 for details 5 02 1 UPC E
318. n Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications SE 1200 Advanced Long Range amp SE 2223PDF Specs 8 9 2 SE 1200 Advanced Long Range amp SE 2223PDF Specs Parameter SE 1200ALR SE 2223 PDF Light Source Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Scan Rate z PS Dire 590 scan sec 22 frames sec tional Scan Angle 13 2 Horizontal 34 Vertical 12 5 Scan Patterns Linear Linear and Smart Raster Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 40 absolute dark light reflectance measured at 650 nm Minimum 40 absolute dark light reflectance measured at 650 nm 35 absolute dark light reflec tance differential PDF 25 absolute dark light reflec tance differential 1 D UPC EAN Code 128 UCC EAN 128 RSS Code 39 PDF417 Micro PDF UPC EAN Code 39 Inter Sunlight 4000 ft candles 43 056 Lux Symbologies Code 93 I 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of leaved 2 of 5 Code 128 Coda bar MSI Plessey RSS and 5 Codabar MSI Composite codes Laser On Time Aim Duration Taero Tins um Duration Power Mode Trigger Mode Power Mode Trigger Mode MM TONS Bidirectional Redundancy Programmable Bi directional Redundancy Symbology types lengths Data Parameters Symbology types lengths Data e formatting Serial Parameters formatting Serial Parameters Beeper Tone Beeper Tone Scan Angle Pattern Controls Artificial 450 ft candles 4844 Artificial 4
319. name for the radio screen e g Radio e Press lt F4 gt to save your changes and then reset the 7535 7530 press and hold down the BLUE and lt ENTER gt keys for a minimum of 6 seconds 240 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Radio Statistics Screen Inthe Display menu type the letter corresponding to the radio statistics screen For example in the sample screen below you d type d to display the radio statistics screen m 01 Display Menu 7 A Parameters B TESS C ANSI D Radio 802 1Q Stats Screen 802 10 Stats AP Controller MAC 00 00 00 00 Terminal MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 bootnum C33B rm 12 xm 7 rb 50 xi 1 ra 7 xa 12 bt 0 xr 1 rt avg lst 10000 0 fr 00 ar 00 fh 00 ah 00 Ca 0 tn 0 sts 0 typ 0 msk 0 Q 0 AcQ 1 TxQ 1 Radio Address 0 End of statistics e AP Controller mac MAC address of the Teklogix access point controller with which this hand held is currently associated Terminal MAC MAC address of the hand held computer bootnum e g C33B the boot number of the network control ler This number increments each time the controller reboots so that hand helds can detect the reboot when they reinitialize Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 241 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Radio Statistics Screen rm xm rb xi ra xa bt XT number of unique receiv
320. ncode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexidecimal If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled V Key A virtual key that is Shifted or Unshifted is displayed in the third column labelled Function Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 105 Chapter 5 Configuration Scancode Remapping If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number e g Macro 2 Adding A Remap To add a new remapping Choose the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed BACKSPACE TAB CLEAR O Force Shifted O Force Unshifted No Force Figure 5 15 Remapping A Key e Type the scan code in hexidecimal in the field labelled Scancode The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping Virtual Key Function And Macro The radio buttons along the side of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be remapped Virtual Key Function or Macro 106 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Scancode Remapping When Virtual Key is selected you can choose to force lt SHIFT gt to be on or off when the virtual key is sent If No Force is selected the shift state is dependent on whether the shift s
321. ners 57 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 33 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 3 8 6 Operating Internal Two Dimensional 2D Imager Scanners 57 3 8 7 Operating RFID Scanner Modules 58 3 9 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 59 3 10 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time 60 3 10 1 Storing Batteries o e e 62 3 11 Monitoring The Network Connection 0004 62 3 12 Uploading Data In A Docking Station less 63 3 13 General Maintenance e 63 3 13 1 Caring For The Touchscreen o o 63 3 13 2 Cleaning The 7535 7530 o 64 34 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Features Of The 7535 3 Features Of The 7535 1535 Screen Stylus Pointing Tool Battery Pack Le Tether Port Figure 3 2 Back Of 7535 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 35 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Features Of The 7530 3 Features Of The 7530 Stylus Pointing Tool Sound Port 1530 Screen Ambient Light Sensor Beeper Port Figure 3 3 Front Of 7530 36 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 The Battery Scanner Window Tether Port Battery Pack Do
322. ng Setting this parameter to on enables UPC Half Block Stitching for the SE 3223 omnidirectional engine only 5 10 3 10 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar Set Length LI And Set Length L2 Lengths for Codabar can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 5 to 55 172 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 93 CLSI Editing When enabled this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first fifth and tenth characters of a 14 character Codabar symbol fL Note Symbol length does not include start and stop characters NOTIS Editing When enabled this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded Codabar symbol Field Size Chars Refer to page 154 for details 5 10 3 11 Code 93 Enabled Set this par
323. ng 154 skew scanning 362 Sled See picker cradle 338 Smart echo mode 280 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 194 Communities 196 Contact 195 Enable SNMP 196 Location 195 Name 97 Rights 797 SOCRC 296 Soft Input Panel SIP 93 softkey function keys 223 softkeys 256 softkeys Function keys 223 softkey labels changing Label F1 F4 275 softkey labels changing Label F1 F6 288 Softkeys parameter 256 SO prefix suffix 295 Sound Ctrl 257 SPACE Key 42 specifications Index battery 7530 1900mAh 377 battery 7530 2400mAh 372 battery 7535 371 for 7530 349 for 7535 347 scanner external 366 scanner internal 353 specular dead zone 362 Split Screen dividing and displaying 262 moving the cursor between split screens 263 parameters used 267 toggling between full and split screens 263 Type and View IDs 267 using a Wild Card asterisk 263 Split Screen 267 Standard Code 128 156 Start ANSI 284 Start Menu 72 cycle tasks 79 desktop 73 programs 77 Run 7 Security 74 Settings 80 Shutdown 81 system tray 78 task manager 79 start up menu 243 Statistics button Radio tab 149 statistics screen 802 1Q 240 Statistics screen Narrow Band radio 137 status displaying continuously 234 status displaying in Lock B amp Lock H mode 234 status displaying unit 234 status area Tekterm 227 status message TESS 233 Stop Bits 789 190 310 string entry parameters 245 246 249 adding special characters to 246 cycling
324. ng BooSt Press and hold down the lt SCAN gt BLUE lt ENTER gt keys for a minimum of 6 seconds to launch the BooSt program Keep in mind that a device running BooSt has a dif ferent hardware ID than when it is running Windows CE NET Post Installation Done Dialog Box This dialog box indicates the success or failure of the installation To view the log file tap on the Log File button To exit the program tap on the Exit button Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual D 5 of Cols ANSI 274 of Cols TESS 287 of Pages ANSI 273 of Rows ANSI 273 of Rows TESS 288 A accents adding Custom Characters 264 accessories bar code readers connecting 323 hand strap 18 picker cradle 338 pistol grip 19 acknowledged host number ah 242 acknowledged remote number ar 242 acknowledgements transmitted xa 242 acknowledgements received 242 AcQ of messages sent but not acknowl edged by cellular master 243 Active Conn Tab 122 ActiveSync ASync profile 7 8 Addendum 4157 156 159 180 184 addresses network See also Network addresses 317 Ad Hoc network 25 Advanced wireless connection 30 Advanced button Radio tab 1 49 ah acknowledged host number 242 AIAG AIAG Character 30 AIAG Strip 154 Mixed AIAG 297 AIAG Character 30 AIAG Strip 154 aiming dot duration of 53 163 182 All Fld Video 298 Alpha parameters 245 248 ALT Key 42 anchor viewport 3 2 Anchor Colu
325. nges without the cursor being moved the viewport is re synchronized to coincide the pivot with the anchor Line Scrolling When Line Scrolling is enabled set to Y the Scan See display is treated as two separate one line by 10 column displays The top line always displays the previous value of the bottom line In an application where the cursor skips from one entry field to another the field that the cursor just entered is displayed on the top line and the next field is displayed at the bottom fL Note When this feature is enabled set to Y the Panning option should be disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke Brightness The Brightness parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display It only has an effect on Model 7000 Scan Sees scanners equipped with LED light emitting diode displays Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 315 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Keyboard Mapping Arrows The Arrows parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow keys on the Scan See keyboard Value Function Bright Arrow keys control Scan See display brightness Horiz Arrow keys control Column Offset Vert Arrow keys control Line Offset Table 6 5 Arrow Parameter Options fL Note For Horiz and Vert changing the offset will take affect only after the 7535 7530 display has been up
326. nistrator to the set of devices to which this managed node belongs Rights This menu allows you to specify access that is Read Only or Read Write Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 197 Chapter 5 Configuration Modifying A Community Setting 5 11 2 2 Modifying A Community Setting To modify an existing community Highlight the community you want to alter e Choose the Change button Name private Figure 5 91 Changing Or Removing A Community A Modify Community dialog box is displayed listing the community you highlighted Edit the Name and or Rights and press lt ENTER gt to save your changes 5 1 2 3 Removing An Existing Community To remove an item Highlight the community you want to remove in the Communities tab and then choose the Remove button A Delete Confirmation screen is displayed To remove a community choose the Yes button or If you decide not to remove the community choose the No button 198 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Trap Destination Tab 5 11 3 Trap Destination Tab A trap is an unsolicited report sent to SNMP Managers by the SNMP Agent running on the managed node This option allows you to define where the report will be sent LLL pb po q Manager T s gt Sail 107 Figure 5 92 Trap Destination Tab 5 11 3 1 Enabling Authentication
327. nitialized Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available or if it is available but not yet initialized User interaction is required e g the user is required to enter a PIN A non recoverable fatal error has occurred The modem status is unknown or the modem is not connected to a network the signal strength is 0 Signal strength is between 1 and 20 Signal strength is between 21 and 40 Signal strength is between 41 and 60 Signal strength is between 61 and 80 Signal strength is between 81 and 100 202 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual G ill x de Chapter 5 Configuration Establishing A Connection When a packet data service is available a letter is added to the signal strength icon indicating the type of packet service G for GSM GPRS or X for CDMA IxRTT The next icon provides example of what you might see A GPRS packet data connection is active the signal strength is between 41 and 60 and GSM GPRS packet service is available The signal strength icon is replaced by a connection indicator icon when a packet data connection is started A GPRS packet data connection is active A CDMA IxRTT packet data connection is active 5 12 2 Establishing A Connection To display the main Wireless WAN dialog box e Double tap on the Wireless WAN icon in the taskbar If the icon is not visible in the taskbar th
328. ns to select different paths for the inf files 3 Device Driver Install Selection Dialog Box You can choose to have the device drivers installed immediately by selecting the check box or you can leave the check box blank and Windows will install the 7535 7530 the next time it is connected It is recommended that the device be installed immediately im Psion Teklogix USB Setup x comm 00 0M This program can also attemptto update the device drivers corresponding to the driver installation scripts Choose from the list below which drivers you would like to install I USB connection to Windows CE wceusbsh T USB mass storage usbstor e Select the drivers you want to update wceusbsh and usbstor Tap on the lt Next gt button fL Note None of the drivers are updated by default To complete the process you must establish USB connections 4 Device Driver Backup Selection Dialog Box The USB Setup application will attempt to back up the driver Sys files before attempting the installation It specifies which files it will try to back up and the location to which it will back them up fal Psion Teklogix USB Setup x mum a This program can make backup copies ofthe driver files itis replacing Choose the files to backup and the path where the backup files should be stored Iv CAWINNT system32 drivers woeusbsh sys Iv CAWINNT system32 drivers usbstor sys Path C WINNT system32 drivers pBackup Browse
329. nstallation Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator and does not get exposed to water or other liquids This can be accomplished in one of the following ways Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle away from the vehicle operator s reach perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing e Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material e Wrap the connector securely with a waterproof electrical tape in an area out of the vehicle operators reach All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle 1 11 6 Powered Cradle Installation The powered cradle option is designed to allow the 7535 7530 to be powered by a vehicle battery The battery installed in the 7535 7530 is also recharged by the vehicle battery This option accepts DC power sources over the range 12V to 80V The 7535 7530 picker cradle can be ordered with the powered cradle option installed or it can be retrofitted later at an authorized Psion Teklogix service depot Service offices are listed in Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices The 7535 7530 charging LED see Charge LED on page 48 indicates that external power is available and it also indica
330. nternal Scanners Base Options Scan Triggering 8 8 External Scanners Supported Types Interface Chapter 8 Specifications Internal Scanners High performance long range advanced long range wide angle imager scanner and 2 D raster laser scanner If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner the aiming dot will be enabled for a configurable time period after which normal scanning begins Double clicking trigger will override aiming delay and ini tiate immediate scan Decoded and Non Decoded 5V only Via tether port 8 9 Internal Scanner Specifications This section lists specifications for the following internal scanners SE 1200 High Performance and Long Range SE 1200 Advanced Long Range and SE 2223PDF SE 1224 High Performance SE 1200 Wide Angle and SE 923 High Speed SE 1524 Extended Range E1022 Decoded 1D Linear Imager Scanner SX5303 2D Imager Scanner Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 353 Chapter 8 Specifications SE 1200 High Performance amp Long Range Specs 8 9 1 SE 1200 High Performance amp Long Range Specs Parameter SE 1200HP SE 1200LR Light Source Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Scan Rate 35 5 scans sec bidirec 35 5 scans sec bidirec tional tional Scan Angle 42 2 23 2 Scan Patterns Linear Linear Minimum Print Con Minimum 20 absolute dark light reflectance measured Mini
331. ntire system that is each 7535 7530 and each application session in each 7535 7530 across your system must have a unique number assigned This parameter is described in the section titled ANSI Settings on page 268 236 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Sending Data To The Host Once the 7535 7530 is configured an ANSI operation can be selected from the startup Display Menu 6 7 2 Sending Data To The Host Hand helds running ANSI sessions transmit characters to the host as soon as they are typed The 7535 7530 provides parameters that determine when the computer transmits characters to the host The 7535 7530 can be configured to transmit after a number of characters are typed in the Xmit Count parameter or after some time has elapsed the Xmit Wait parameter or both This reduces overhead on the radio link and improves response time See page 276 for more information about these parameters You can also determine whether the 7535 7530 transmits immediately after the ENTER key an arrow key or a function key is pressed The 7535 7530 computer also responds immediately to the device attribute requests CSIc CSIOc and ESCZ fL Note For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI refer to ANSI Settings on page 268 6 1 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys The Psion Teklogix keyboard differs fro
332. nual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation 3274 Telnet Emulation 05 Emulation Range Fujitsu Host N Y N Intl EBCDIC N Y N Nulls in Fields N Y N IP for SysReq N Y N BRK for Attn N Y N N LU Name Enabled Y N LU Name see text Features see text FKEYO 7 see text FKEY8 15 see text FKEY16 23 see text FKEY24 31 See text FKEY32 39 see text Fujitsu Host If this parameter is set to Y data is sent in Fujitsu format Enabling Fujitsu Host causes the standard IBM formatting codes for start of field setting buffers etc to be replaced by the codes used by Fujitsu host computers Intl EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled set to Y the international EBCDIC character set is used swapping the positions of the and characters Nulls in Fields Setting this parameter to Y allows null characters e g hyphens or periods to fill in empty entry fields IP for SysReq When the system request key is pressed a Telnet Interrupt Process command is generated The Interrupt Process command is sent to the host in place of the standard mechanism used to send the system request key press to a host using Telnet Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 303 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation BRK for Attn When the attention key is pressed a Telnet Break command is generated
333. o highlight the menu and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to cycle through the options Checkbox This box allows you to select or deselect an option To select or deselect a checkbox press the TAB key to highlight the checkbox and press the lt SPACE gt key to select or deselect it Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 83 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Using A Dialog Box Radio buttons These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options For example in the sample screen in Figure 4 16 on page 83 you can choose to Obtain an IP address via DHCP or Specify an IP address Press the TAB key to highlight a radio button option and then select a radio button by pressing the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate option Buttons This type of button allows you to Save Delete and so on the options you ve chosen in a dialog box Use the TAB key to highlight the button you want to use Press the ENTER key to activate it Saving Your Choices Once you ve made all your changes press the ENTER key to save your changes and exit the window L Note A dialog box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not currently available 64 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual CONFIGURATION 5 1 Remote Desktop Connection leen 89 5 2 Pocket PC Compatibility 2e 89 53 The Control Panel o e o 89 5 4 Control PanelIc
334. of the TESS screen when you turn on the 7535 7530 press the ENTER key once Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 227 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Configuration 6 6 1 Configuration fL Note Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it The title you assign will be displayed in the Display Menu The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is described in the section titled Applications on page 267 A unique number must be assigned in the Terminal parameter for each TESS session Refer to Terminal in the section titled TESS Settings on page 285 for details 6 6 2 Working With Multiple Sessions Note The Screen Switch parameter must be set to Y in order for the operator to switch between sessions Refer to Screen Switch on page 256 for details If you are using Windows CE NET 4 2 you can press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt followed by the application number to move between sessions For example e Press lt CTRL gt ALT 2 to switch to Open Tekterm application 2 e Press lt CTRL gt ALT lt 1 gt to switch back to Open Tekterm application 1 and so on 6 6 3 The Field Types Fixed Field displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard Entry Field allows the operator to enter data This type of field is usually shown asi esee Match Field the host computer loads data in the forma
335. ofile dialog boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well as the IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS server 5 12 5 2 Security Configuration The Security Configuration dialog box is accessed through the Tools menu L Note Security configuration is not available with CDMA modems The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable disable and change the PIN You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes The PIN must be enabled in order to be changed If the PIN is disabled the New PIN entry field is greyed out fL Note Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings By default this checkbox is unchecked While this option remains unchecked any PIN entered on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted This stored PIN is then used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN such as resume after suspend or modem removal The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up 212 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Network Configuration
336. oft Bluetooth stack standard but older applications assume serial ports are COM When using COM as the port name 118 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Devices Tab the Bluetooth manager will try to find and use a free port between COM7 and COMO When using BSP as the port name BSP2 to BSP9 are available for use The port is available as soon as it is activated Note The CH column shows the RFCOMM channel of the service if the service is RFCOMM based This information is not generally needed except for debugging purposes To add a service to the Outgoing port an active service must first be deactivated Then you can choose the Outgoing option from the Activation menu highlight a service right click or press the lt SPACE gt bar to display the Activation menu The Authentication and Encryption options can be changed only before activation To change these after activation deactivate the service first then change the options Once a service is activated all the information regarding the service including the RFCOMM channel number is saved in the registry Some remote devices may change their RFCOMM channel numbers when they reboot so your saved setting may not work when the remote device is rebooted In that case you must deactivate the service and reactivate it to detect the current RFCOMM channel Set PIN PINs can be set for each device by pressing the Set PIN
337. oftware as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 Oct 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 Jun 1995 as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 Jun 1987 or any equiv Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual III License Agreement alent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights pro vided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the MDC standard software agreement for the product Export Law Assurances You may not use or otherwise export or reexport the Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Software was obtained In particular but without lim itation the Software may not be exported or reexported 1 into or to a national or resident of any U S embargoed country or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Department of Commerce s Table of Denial Orders By using the Software you represent and warrant that you are not located in under control of or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list Limited Warranty on Media if applicable MDC warrants the media on which the Software is recorded to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of or
338. ogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 15 A A Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Preparing The 7535 7530 For Operation Preparing The 7535 7530 For Operation Typically 7535 7530 hand helds are configured at the factory and arrive ready for use Although these hand helds are equipped with an internal Compact Flash and SD I O slot these slots are not intended for user modification If a device needs to be changed or added in these slots contact qualified Psion Teklogix personnel Refer to Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices for the service number closest to you 2 1 1 Equipment You Need To Get Started You ll need e A compatible battery charger docking station or portable docking module PDM with power supply e An operating wireless network if you are not operating the equipment in batch mode e A medium Phillips head screwdriver 2 1 2 Charging The Battery Important The 7535 7530 uses a high capacity Lithium Ion battery It is crit ical that you review the battery safety guidelines in Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions on page 323 before charging the battery Batteries shipped from the factory are not charged They must be fully charged prior to use Full capacity may not be reached until at least 5 full charge discharge cycles have been performed Batteries can be charged using a gang charger or the unit s internal charger When using the internal charger a suitable power source is require
339. ogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 65 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 4 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE NET for portable devices and desktop Windows 2000 XP etc utilize point and click navigation An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every point and click action Windows CE NET supports the same point and click user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference the point and click action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping Keep in mind that some 7535s are not equipped with touchscreens 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus Note If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately the touchscreen may need recalibration Refer to Calibrating The Touch screen on page 46 A touchscreen is standard for all 7530s but is an optional feature on 7535s A hand held equipped with a touchscreen has a stylus a pointing tool that looks like a pen stored in a slot at the top of the unit The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen Note To prevent damage to the touchscreen use only the stylus pen i supplied with your 7535 7530 To choose an icon open a file launch an applet o
340. ol Panel Figure 2 5 Network And Dial Up Connections L Note You can also press lt CTRL gt 07 to display the Start Menu 22 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit 2 Choose the radio icon to open the 802 11b Wireless LAN Settings window in the sample screen this is labelled VETWLANI File Edit Advanced la ie 3 E e d Make New USB Cable Connection Figure 2 6 802 1 Ib Wireless LAN Settings Window 3 Wireless Statistics Tab When you choose the Wireless LAN icon an 802 11b Wireless LAN Settings window NETWLANI in the sample below is displayed 1P Information LD RSSI dem Access Point 00 60 1d 1b d1 7a MAC Address 00 02 b3 92 54 10 Data Rate bps 11000000 Frame Size 1500 IN errors 2861 OUT errors 0 Figure 2 7 Wireless Statistics This tab lists your radio statistics Choosing the Zero button resets the statistics of the last four items Packets IN Packets OUT IN errors and OUT errors Display the next tab in this window Wireless Information Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 23 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit 4 L Note Wireless Information Tab The options under this tab display existing networks to which you can connect and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network
341. olour coded in blue print above macro keys M1 and M2 To access MS press the BLUE key followed by lt M1 gt e To access M6 press BLUE M27 224 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Changing The Screen Font Size 6 3 Changing The Screen Font Size To cycle through the available screen fonts e Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt F gt L Note If the security level for your 7535 7530 is set to User font changes are governed by the Font Change parameter in the User Persmissions menu This parameter must be set to Y before the operator can use the above key combination to choose a different font Refer to Font Change on page 259 for additional details 6 4 Panning The Screen Contents If the content of a screen is too large to fit in the margins of the 7535 7530 display the content can be panned or shifted to bring the information outside the margins into view Normally the Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow pressed However if you lock the lt BLUE gt key on you can pan the entire contents of the screen Panning relies on the values set in the Use Increment X Increment and Y Increment parameters to determine the number of columns spaces and rows lines the screen contents shift Inthe More Parameters menu position the cursor on View Manager and press lt F1 gt
342. ommunicates with your phone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialog box The 7535 7530 then disconnects Device Properties LOK x Port Settings Call Options Connection Preferences Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Hardware y Terminal Use terminal window before dialing J Use terminal window after dialing J Manual Dial gt 1M5 Figure 5 41 Port Settings 6 Under the Call Options tab turn off Cancel the call if not connected within and press lt ENTER gt to save your changes Device Properties ok Ix Port Settings Call Options Call Setup 120 seconds M Wait for dial tone before dialing Wait for credit card 0 sec Extra Settings Special modem commands may be inserted into the dial string iX Figure 5 42 Call Options 126 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone In the Modem dialog box choose the Next button to display the Phone Number dialog box Phone Number Al GPRS network Country code 1 Area code 425 Phone number 99 Sig Figure 5 43 Setting The Phone Number The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent Once you ve specified all the necessary information choose the Finish button In the Control Panel choose the Dialing icon File View 2 x Q0
343. omputer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Options Decoded Internal Scanner 5 10 3 1 Options Decoded Internal Scanner Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec 200 msec or 400 msec A value of 0 zero disables the target dot Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99 each number representing 0 1 seconds Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned a successful decode restores normal blinking When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 1 min 2 min or 3 min Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter bar codes Linear Security Level This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality There are four levels of decode security for linear code types e g Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 High
344. on changes to Disconnect Network Fido Sea Beane v Tons SS Figure 5 99 Connection Established 5 12 3 Disconnecting From A Network To disconnect from the network Tap the stylus on the Disconnect button and then on OK When the 7535 7530 network connection is severed the Status field displays Ready to connect A unit equipped with a GSM GPRS expansion board displays the signal strength in the main Wireless WAN screen even while a connection is active Units equipped with Sierra Wireless Aircard modems do not display the signal strength while a connection is active The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and received respectively 5 2 3 1 Shutting Down The Wireless WAN User Interface While it is not usual to shut down the GSM GPRS user interface you can accomplish this by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command at the bottom of the main Wireless WAN dialog box L Note Once you ve shut down the user interface you can only enable the radio by opening the Control Panel and tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the Wireless WAN dialog box Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 205 Chapter 5 Configuration Advanced Information 5 12 4 Advanced Information In most cases when a GSM GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your 7535 7530 setup is automatic Follow the steps outlined under the heading Establishing A C
345. onal environments is supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 7 Chapter 1 Introduction The 7535 Hand Held Computer 1 4 1 The 7535 Hand Held Computer 6 BIJ Sos as BJ JA JE O 030 ooooQcQ Figure 1 1 7535 With 58 Key Keyboard 8 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction The 7535 Hand Held Computer Laser Figure 1 3 Tether Port Aperture Figure 1 4 Scanner Window Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Regulatory Labels 1 4 2 Regulatory Labels MODEL No 7535 Handheld lt q wo o 2 lt T o o o o This label is affixed below the scanner window Figure 1 5 Laser Warning Label MODEL No 7535 Handheld 1010004 100A This label is affixed below the scanner window Figure 1 6 LED Radiation Warning Label 10 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Regulatory Labels PSION Teklogix Inc Model 7535 Handheld Terminal This product contains intel 802 11b LAN CF Card Model WCF2011BEWW RA2010 CIA FCC ID XXXXXXXXXXXX IC XXXXXXXXXXX Tested to comply with 0681 FCC Standards O1NYCA1028 R FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE PSION Teklogix Inc Model 7535 Handheld Terminal This product contains intel 802 11b LAN CF Card Model WCF2011BEWW RA2010 CIA FCC ID XXXXXXXXX
346. onnected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate this equipment IMPORTANT NOTE FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon trolled environment End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance This device complies with FCC RF Exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment under 47 CFR 2 1093 paragraph d 2 The equipment has been SAR evaluated for use in PDA This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Some equipment in hospitals and aircraft are not shielded from radio frequency energy Do not use the WORKABOUT PRO onboard aircraft or in hospitals without first obtaining permission Do not use near pacemakers The product may affect the operation of some medi cally implanted devices such as pacemakers causing them to malfunction Avoid placing your product next to such devices Keep a minimum distance of
347. onnection on page 203 to make a connection The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes 5 12 4 1 Entering A PIN Number If a PIN is required a PIN entry dialog box is displayed e Type your PIN and press ENTER Note If you exceed the number of allowable attempts a PUK entry window is 7 brought to the foreground You ll need to enter a new PIN number Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required the modem is instructed to perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach The main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization Searching for modem e Initializing modem e SIM is ready Searching for network Registered on network e Searching for GPRS Ready to connect If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network the following states are repeated Searching for network Registered on network Searching for GPRS and Ready to connect 206 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Error States 5 12 4 2 Error States The following temporary error states i e these states may disappear without interaction may be displayed Emergency calls only The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register e g no roaming agreement between networks The modem keeps searching for another network No network found A network is not currently available The modem continues searching for
348. ons 2 2 2 o e e 90 SN A A ORE E 94 5 5 1 Display Properties o o oo 94 5 5 1 1 Display Contrast 95 5 5 1 2 Display Backlight llle 95 5 5 1 3 Display Appearance e 97 5 5 2 Keyboard Properties ee ee 98 5 5 2 1 Key Repair a go ce tu ny Ingo 98 5 5 22 Keyboard Backlight 99 5 5 2 3 Keyboard One Shot Modes 100 5 5 2 4 Keyboard Macro Keys a 101 5 5 2 5 Unicode Mapping llle 103 5 5 2 6 Scancode Remapping ll 105 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties o o 108 5 5 3 1 Volume Adjustments 108 5032 NOWA ove e A o a 109 5 5 4 Power Management Properties o o 109 5 5 4 1 Battery Capacity o 110 5 5 4 2 Power Saving Schemes 110 5 5 4 3 Suspend Threshold o 111 IA Chargers ux eere US esse qe A de a 112 5 5 45 Card Slof 5 464 4 RR oU US USE eue re 112 5 5 5 Stylus Properties ero a a ad oe a 113 5 5 5 1 Setting Double Tap Sensitivity 113 5 5 5 2 Touchscreen Calibration 00 114 5 5 5 3 Touchscreen Options 114 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment 222r 115 5 6 Bluetooth Setup amna ka i e aanp a aan E a is 116 56 1 The Devices Tab niia apana ae Fa es BE ee 117 5 6 2 The Servers Tab
349. operties such as mouse sensitivity network configuration and the desktop color scheme _ Note If you are uncertain how to move around a dialog box and make selec tions review Using A Dialog Box on page 82 When the 7535 7530 boots up the startup desktop shell is displayed and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately To access the Control Panel e Use the stylus to tap on the Start button in the taskbar to display the Start Menu Tap on Setting Control Panel Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 89 Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons If you re using the keyboard e Press lt BLUE gt 0 to display the Start Menu Highlight Settings in Start Menu and press the RIGHT gt arrow key to highlight the Control Panel e Press the ENTER key The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your 7535 7530 File View cx 0 O 2 Bluetooth i Certificates Date Time i Device Properties 3 s Dialing Display Input Panel 9 gt Internet IPv6 Keyboard Options Support De e Mouse Network and Owner ET Figure 5 1 Control Panel 5 4 Control Panel Icons The Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your 7535 7530 I Date Time gt Date Time Allows you to set the current Month Date Time and Time Zone on your unit A Display Display Changes the appearance
350. or activity and return to the previous one The lt SPACE gt Key Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters In a Windows dialog box pressing the lt SPACE gt key enables or disables a checkbox The lt SCAN gt Key Pressing the lt SCAN gt key the yellow key with the star burst scan symbol on it activates the scanner beam while pressed For units that do not have internal scanners this key is inoperable 3 5 3 Alphanumeric Keyboards 58 Key And 63 Key In addition to alphanumeric keys that are directly accessible on the keyboard no key combination is required and the keys described in this chapter the 58 key keyboard 7535 and the 63 key keyboard 7530 also provides function keys and macro keys Function keys lt F1 gt through lt F24 gt can be used with the CE operating system or another application The additional function keys lt F25 gt through lt F30 gt along with the macros are not used as part of the Windows CE NET operating system All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application The Tekterm application utilizes these keys Refer to Additional Keyboard Functions on page 221 for details about accessing function keys lt F25 gt to lt F30 gt 42 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Numeric Keyboards 36 Key And 37 Key 3 5 4 Numeric Keyboards 36 Key And 37 Key On 36 key 7535s and 37
351. ou re using the keyboard Highlight the bar code you want to work with and press the lt RIGHT gt arrow key to display the sub menu e Use the UP and lt DOWN gt arrow keys to highlight a parameter e To change a parameter value press SPACE or the lt RIGHT gt arrow key If a field requires text entry a text box is displayed in which you can enter the appropriate value 152 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Non Decoded Options 5 10 2 Non Decoded Options e Tap the stylus on the sign next to Options to display these parameters Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 3000 A value of 0 zero disables the target dot Short Code When enabled this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes 2 characters When disabled these short bar codes are rejected Enabling Short Code may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the hand held must decode more potential bar codes it is therefore not recommended for general purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode prior to a b
352. ou must press one key followed by the next in sequence Refer to Working With Files Folders And Programs for additional details about keyboard navigation 4 Working With Files Folders And Programs FTPD tmp Programs net exe Em m StartUp m Desktop connmc exe mlang dll Folder Recent Program Icon M cmd exe e 4 File ia shlwapi dll ieceext dll E Figure 4 1 Working With Windows Icons e Double tap on the appropriate icon either a folder icon a program icon or a file icon to open or launch your selection 68 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE The Startup Desktop If you re using the keyboard e Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon you want to open or launch e Press ENTER 4 3 The Startup Desktop When the 7535 7530 boots up the startup desktop shell is displayed Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately fL Note The startup folder is located in Windows StartUp and Flash Disk StartUp r My Computer Recycle Bin A Le Internet Explorer n OpenTT E Figure 4 2 The 7535 Startup Desktop To access desktop icons gt 0 9 20 am e Double tap on the icon to open a window or in the case of an application icon launch an application On the keyboard e Use the arrow keys to highlight the i
353. our device isn t Zi Ge Figure 3 7 Calibration Screen e Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen 3 1 1535 1530 Indicators 7535s and 7530s use LEDs Light Emitting Diode onscreen messages and audio tones as indicators 3 7 1 LEDs Hand helds are equipped with four tri coloured LEDs This section outlines what these LEDs indicate AN Important Ifan LED is illuminated in red the operator should be cautious as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 47 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Charge LED Radio Traffic LED y User Application LED Charge LED 71 Fells Figure 3 8 Keyboard LEDs L Note The LED function is identical between 7535 and 7530 hand helds 3 7 1 1 Charge LED The lower right LED is reserved for internal charger power status This indicator is active even when the hand held is inserted in a docking station and in suspend mode so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily Function Charge LED Behaviour External power not available LED off Fully charged to within 9596 of charge ticity LED displays solid green colour Quick charge successfully completed to within 75 of charge capacity BEES ee 48 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535
354. over discharge damage A never used Li Ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or no useful life remaining once put into service Think of batteries as perishable goods 3 11 Monitoring The Network Connection If your hand held is equipped with a wireless LAN radio it will typically associate with the nearest access point The radio signal quality meter in the taskbar indicates the relative strength of the communication link To access the radio signal icon Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the wireless statistics dialog box To access the radio signal icon using the keyboard Press BLUE lt 0 gt to display the Start Menu Highlight Shortcuts and then choose System Tray from the sub menu Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to highlight the radio signal icon in the taskbar Press ENTER to display the Wireless Statistics dialog box Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session At times you may need to renew your connection by logging in again 62 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Uploading Data In A Docking Station 3 12 Uploading Data In A Docking Station The Combo Docking and Quad Docking peripherals allow your hand held to link to an Ethernet network They are typically used to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available W
355. parameters allow you to map the 7535 7530 function keys Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 307 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Ports Tether And Console 6 20 Ports Tether And Console 03 Ports Tether Port Console Settings 1 Console Port Disabled Settings 2 PR RS232 Console Settings 3 PR Tether Console Settings 4 6 20 1 Peripheral Port Options The Tether Port Console Port PR RS232 and PR Tether options allow you to enable disable and specify the accessories attached to these ports These are Disabled Serial Console Printer and Scan See To scroll through the options for each port Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected Disabled indicates that the serial port is not being used Serial standard serial port Console used to connect another PC to the 7535 7530 A communication program is required so that communication can proceed between the 7535 7530 and the PC Printer all TESS print operations are directed to the port All ANSI media copy operations to the primary port are directed to this port Scan See TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan See through the Tether or Console port 308 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Port Parameter Settings 6
356. phone No 905 813 9900 US Representative s Name amp Address 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd Suite 500 Erlanger KY 41018 USA Contact Person Joe Musgrave Telephone No 859 372 4106 Equipment Type Environment Computing Devices Trade Name Model No 7535 Hand Held Micro computer with Portable Docking Module Year of Manufacture 2003 Standard s to which Conformity is Declared The 7535 Hand Held Micro computer with Portable Docking Module supplied by Psion Teklogix has been tested and found to comply with FCC PART 15 SUBPART B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS CLASS B COMPUTING DEVICES FOR HOME amp OFFICE USE I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment as tested is representative within manufacturing tolerance to units Applicant Legal Representative in U S Signature Signature Rob Williams Joe Musgrave Full Name Full Name Vice President of Engineering V P Global Solutions Americas Position Position Mississauga Ontario Canada Erlanger KY 41018 USA Place Place July 4 2003 July 4 2003 Date Date Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual VII Approvals And Safety Summary CE Marking When used in a residential commercial or light industrial environment the product and its approved UK and European peripherals fulfil all requirements for CE marking R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC This equipment complies with the essential requirements of EU Directiv
357. ppropriate function key For example To access function key lt F11 gt press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by F1 To access function key lt F12 gt press lt ORANGE gt followed by F2 and so on 6 2 1 3 Softkey Function Keys To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters function keys F1 to F5 have been programmed to perform specific actions in the Tekterm menus Table 6 1 Softkeys describes these function keys These softkeys can be reprogrammed to perform different functions within TESS and ANSI applications AN Important If your hand held is equipped with a touchscreen tapping the stylus on the appropriate softkey label executes the function of the softkey providing that the labels are visible at the bottom of the screen See Softkeys on page 256 if they are not visible Function Key Softkey Function lt F1 gt NEXT Displays the next sub menu lt F2 gt PREV Displays the previous menu DEFLT Restores parameters to default settings even after lt F3 gt I pressing F4 to save the changes lt F4 gt SAVE Saves a change to a parameter value lt F5 gt LITRL Literal mode allows special characters to be entered in a string parameter such as macro key strings Table 6 1 Softkeys Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 223 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Macro Keys I LA Note The SAVE onscreen label only
358. r 6 Tekterm Application Screen Settings L Note The Settings sub menu is not available when 802 10v2 is selected as the Conn Type Settings Range Host See text Port 9999 0 9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format HHH HHH HHH Port Port specifies the port number By default the port is assigned the value 9999 6 1922 Screen m 05 Screen Range of Cols 80 20 132 of Rows 24 4 100 Origin Scroll N Y N Field Scroll N Y N Pages Saved 16 1 16 App Parameter 0 dhs 219 Label F1 4 gt see text Colour Override N see text of Cols This parameter defines the logical page width in characters used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the 7535 7530 display Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display fL Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 287 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen of Rows This parameter defines the logical page length in lines used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the hand held computer s display Display pann
359. r Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Scanning Techniques It is critical that you review the warnings listed in the Approvals and Safety section at the beginning of this manual before using any of the scanners described in this chapter Scanning Techniques outlines the mechanics of a successful scan In addition review Scan LED Indicators on page 55 to better understand how to interpret whether or not a bar code has been successfully scanned Finally Troubleshooting on page 56 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail 3 8 Scanning Techniques L Note The scanning techniques described here apply to internal and external scanners Hold the scanner at an angle Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code In this position light can reflect back into the scanner s exit window and prevent a successful decode Scan the entire bar code If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code including the margins on either end of the symbol e Ifyou are using a 2D imaging scanner make certain the red oval shaped framing mark is centered within the bar code you want to scan Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together 3 8 2 Scan LED Indicators The scanner LED the lower left L
360. r open a folder e Double tap the stylus on the appropriate icon 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard While all 7530s are equipped with touchscreens 7535s can be ordered with or without touchscreens If your 7535 has a standard screen rather than a touchscreen choosing icons and navigating dialog boxes displaying the desktop and so on requires keyboard input If your unit has already been fully configured and your application is launched at startup you ll have little need for keyboard navigation Note Keep in mind that these keyboard sequences can be used on all 7535s and 7530s regardless of whether or not they are equipped with touchscreens Operation Key or Key Combination Switch between active applications ALT TAB Open task manager ALT lt ESC gt Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 67 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Working With Files Folders And Programs Move the cursor Arrow keys Open file folder or icon lt ENTER gt Exit amp Save lt ENTER gt Close Exit amp Do Not Save lt ESC gt lt TAB gt Navigate Dialog Boxes ideo de cocus tone a a dialog box lt CTRL gt lt TAB gt Select Radio Button Press Button lt SPACE gt Go to Start Menu lt BLUE gt lt 0 gt Table 4 1 Keyboard Navigation Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer the 7535 7530 does not support key chording pressing two keys at the same time Y
361. r the key switch that is it cannot be turned on without the key on However if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch Keep in mind that the 7535 7530 will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge If an unfused power source must be used a fuse assembly PN 19440 must be added to the extension power cable the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly 342 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Port Replicator 1 11 7 The Port Replicator The port replicator is an optional accessory that allows tethered devices e g scanners as well as mounted peripherals e g bar code printers or weigh scales to be attached to the picker cradle The replicator can be used with or without the cradle power option The functionality of the 7535 7530 tether port is duplicated on the port replicator In addition to the tether port the replicator is equipped with a standard 9 pin RS232D serial interface This interface is typically used for fixed peripherals such as printers Your serial device likely includes a suitable cable connector for this port Note The 7535 7530 picker cradle can be ordered with the port replicator option installed or it can be
362. rcode Surface Roll pee V AS NM ta Side View Scan Beam Barcode Surface Figure 8 6 Pitch Skew And Specular Dead Zone 362 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Intermec E1022 Linear 1D Imager Scanner 8 9 5 Intermec E1022 Linear ID Imager Scanner Parameter E1022 Optics 645 nm visible red top LED Bright and sharp scanning line Sensor CCD linear image sensor Scan Rate 270 scans s auto adaptive Scan Angle 48 Skew and Pitch 35 Min x Dimension Down to 0 05 mm 2mil Depth of Field 0 to 49 2 cm 19 4 Bar Code Width up to 18 cm 7 on 0 3 Print Contrast Down to 20 UPC E amp A EAN Code 39 Code 128 UCC EAN Soses 128 ISBN Interleaved Matrix Industrial and Stan dard 2 of 5 Codabar Code 93 MSI Plessey Telepen Others including ISBT on request Laser On Time Aim Duration Power Mode Trigger Programmable Mode Bi directional Redundancy Symbology Parameters types lengths Data formatting Serial Parameters Beeper Tone Scan Angle Interfaces Decoded RS232 TTL Works in any lighting en conditions from 0 to 100 000 lux Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Storage Temperature 25 to 70 C 11 to 160 F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Voltage 5VDC 5 Power Current 140 mA typical Standby current 40uA Shock Withstands multiple 1m 3 drops on
363. rewdriver AN Important Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories These chemicals may damage the plastic casing 2 1 3 1 Attaching The Hand Strap Two Phillips head screws are provided with the hand strap Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the 7535 7530 near the top of the unit eas Figure 2 Attaching The Hand Strap 18 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Attaching The Pistol Grip e Stretch the handstrap toward the base of the 7535 7530 and hook the bottom of the handstrap into the slot near the base of the battery pack Figure 2 2 Hooking The Hand Strap In Place 2 1 3 2 Attaching The Pistol Grip Note A Phillips head screwdriver is required The pistol grip is attached to the back of the 7535 7530 using the four threaded inserts in the upper part of the 7535 7530 casing Four black 4 40 Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory IL Note Prior to installation make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Powering Up The 7535 7530 Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the inserts on the back of the hand held are aligned with the holes in the pistol grip B Figure 2 3 Attach
364. rforming multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage 192 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Translations 5 10 8 Translations Scanner Properties joki x Barcodes Options Translations Substring 123 abc mne Remove AE Figure 5 85 Translation Tab Inthe Translation tab choose the Add button Scanner Properties OK x Barcodes Options Translations Modify Translation Input Output fbc Type Substring y Change ada Remove AZ Figure 5 86 Translation Dialog Box Input This value is compared with the decoded bar code reading If there is a match the Output string is translated into the decoded bar code Output If there is a match between the decoded bar code and the corresponding Input string the decoded bar code will be translated into the Output string This string entry parameter can be null or it may contain any combination of standard and special characters e g function keys lt ENTER gt etc Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 193 Chapter 5 Configuration SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Setup Type The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines what is compared with the decoded bar code reading the beginning of decoded bar code the end of decoded bar code the entire decod
365. rge range of between Flashing vellow 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F Charging is attempted ASAB yS every five minutes until the battery is within the appropriate temperature range Solid red Battery rejected at insertion or unable to complete charge on battery E Charging circuit problem Refer to Troubleshooting on Flashing red page 328 for details Table 7 2 Combo Charger Indicators The combo charger supplies DC power to enable the 7535 7530 internal fast charger Charge status is displayed on the 7535 7530 charge LED the lower right LED Refer to Charge LED on page 48 for details Normally it takes from 1 5 to 4 0 hours to fully charge the 7535 7530 internal battery fL Note Battery charging continues whether the 7535 7530 is switched on or off 1 6 6 Troubleshooting The gang charger troubleshooting section also applies to the combo charger Refer to Troubleshooting on page 328 for helpful tips Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 331 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Combo Dock 7 7 Combo Dock The combo dock is identical to the combo charger with one exception the combo dock is equipped with a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet interface The charging information in Combo Charger beginning on page 329 also applies to the combo dock 1 1 1 Installation Refer to the Installation guidelines for the combo charger beginning on page 330 e Attach a
366. roller Note When using 802 10 v2 make certain that the 7535 7530 Net Mask matches the network controller net mask More Parameters Important The 802 IQ radio items listed in this menu are only available to Psion Teklogix personnel r 05 802 10 v2 Parameters Range Auto Radio Addr Y Y N Radio Address 0 1 to 3840 Initial RTT 100 500 5000 Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is set to Y the 7535 7530 requests an automatically assigned radio address A IR Note If Auto Radio Addr is enabled set to Y any value assigned to the EAS Radio Address parameter is ignored Radio Address Important Radio Address only takes effect when Cellular is enabled set to Y The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the 7535 7530 hand held over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each hand held 318 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 802 IQ v2 Initial RTT Round Trip Time Round trip time is the elapsed time between a 7535 7530 computer transmission and an access point acknowledgement Each 7535 7530 continuously adjusts the accept able round trip time calculating the average elapsed time over a number of trans missions If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated the 7535 7530 will resend the tr
367. rols llle 330 7 6 3 Using the Combo Charger With The 7535 7530 330 7 6 4 Charging The Spare Battery sls 330 7 65 Charge Indicators 2 o 331 7 66 Troubleshooting o 331 Combo Dock atier iia ia EA eA 332 DTA Installation a taa 332 7 7 2 Using The ComboDock lll een 332 7 7 3 Network Access o o e ee 332 7 74 Troubleshooting o ee 333 Quad Dock snee ride ad ad oh Rita dare dd deed a o dad 333 7 8 1 Installation lee 333 7 8 2 Indicators And Controls o 334 7 8 3 Using The Quad Dock o llle 334 7 84 Network Access o o o 334 7 8 5 Battery Charging o e 334 7 8 6 Troubleshooting llle 335 Portable Docking Module PDM o 335 Bluetooth Peripherals o oo 338 The 7535 7530 Picker Cradle 2 pE ee ee 338 7 11 1 Picker Cradle Mounting Recommendations 339 7 11 2 Wiring Guidelines llle 339 7 11 3 Using The Picker Cradle llle 340 7 11 4 Maintaining The Picker Cradle 340 7 11 5 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles 340 7 11 6 Powered Cradle Installation 341 7 11 7 The Port Replicator o ee 343 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual vii
368. ros are added to decoded EAN 8 symbols making them compatible in format to EAN 13 symbols Disabling this parameter returns EAN 8 symbols to their normal format Prefix Suffix See Prefix Suffix beginning on page 157 5 10 3 7 UPC A Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A UPC A Check Digit If you enable this parameter the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 169 Chapter 5 Configuration UPCE UPC A Preamble When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead in characters for UPC A symbols transmitted to the host device System Char system character transmitted with the data Country code and System Char both the country code 0 for USA and system character are transmitted with the data or None no preamble is transmitted The lead in characters are considered part of the symbol Prefix Suffix See Prefix Suffix beginning on page 157 5 10 3 8 UPC E Enabled UPC E Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E bar code scans Enabled UPC El Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E1 zero suppressed bar code scans UPC E And UPC EI Check Digit If you enable one or both of these parameters a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data UPC E And UPC El Preamble When you double tap on one of these parameters a dia
369. rresponding enabled channel the List column contains 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 values by default If communication quality falls below 46 only the channels entered in the Manual Switch Table are considered for channel switching The channel search is carried out in the order in which the channels were entered in the table To configure channel switching order for a particular channel Highlight the channel you want to edit and tap on the Edit Channel List button Editing The Channel List i OK x Selected Channel 23 Channel Switch List Figure 5 67 Editing Channel List Only those channels that are enabled are displayed in the dropdown menus in the Edit Channel List dialog box The allowable values range from 0 to 20 Tap on the arrow next to dropdown menu to scroll through the available channels Highlight the value you want to assign Once you ve assigned the switching order tap on the OK button to close the dialog box The channel list is added to the selected channel in the Manual Switch Table dialog box Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 143 Chapter 5 Configuration Protocol Tab 5 9 3 Protocol Tab Narrow Band Radio 7 LOK x Info channel Protocol Power Radio hz fis Test Pollin Poll Time Out 1 60 s kez ded Late TX limit ms E Figure 5 68 Protocol Tab Enable Cellular Protocol The value assigned to this parameter must be iden
370. rties Battery Schemes suspend Thres_4 Main battery Good 9696 Remaining Power 1986 mAh Full Capacity 2073 mAh Time To Empty 13h 35 min Operating Time 13 h 34 min Voltage 12 2 V Current 117 mA Temperature Zane Chemistry Li Ion Cycle Count D Serial Number 2008000001 Manufacturer PSION 3 Vo MA Ol Figure 5 20 Power Battery Properties 5 5 4 2 Power Saving Schemes Inthe Power Properties dialog box open the Schemes tab Power Propertie OK x Battery Schemes Suspend Thres gt Power Scheme 53 AC Power Switch state to Suspend after 5 minutes y o Al Figure 5 2 Power Scheme Properties AC Power And Battery Power Power Scheme This dropdown menu allows you to specify whether the unit is using AC Power or Battery Power 110 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Suspend Threshold Switch State To Suspend Important Psion Teklogix recommends setting the Suspend value to 10 min utes Setting Switch State To Suspend to Never will adversely affect the battery run time To further reduce power consumption carefully consider the duration of time that the display backlight is on see Display Backlight on page 95 When the 7535 7530 is idle not receiving any user input a key touch a scan and so on or system activity serial data an activity initiated by an appl
371. ry from over charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity IM Note Refer to Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time on page 60 FE for additional information about the battery AN Important To avoid damaging the battery chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0 C 32 F and 39 C 102 F If the battery is too hot or cold the battery status LED flashes yellow and the charge is suspended Refer to Table 3 1 Charge LEDs on page 49 for details 3 4 Switching The Hand Held On And Off Switching On The Unit e Press and hold down the lt ENTER ON gt key for at least one second When all four LEDs flash yellow release the lt ENTER ON gt button L Note Ifthe 7535 7530 is in suspend state pressing lt ENTER ON gt key wakes the unit from this state The screen in which you were working before the computer entered suspend state is displayed Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 39 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 The Keyboard Switching Off The Unit AN Important Keep in mind that turning off the 7535 7530 does not result in a complete reboot rather the unit enters a power saving suspend state When the 7535 7530 is turned on from suspend state operation resumes within a few seconds To switch off the 7535 7530 e Press the lt BLUE gt key and then press the lt ENTER ON gt key
372. s and saved data are preserved L Note You do not need to reset your WORKABOUT PRO after configuring the radio Cold Reset Important A cold reset returns the WORKABOUT PRO to factory settings All data and settings are lost Files and data stored in flash are preserved There are two options when executing a cold reset reset to BootLoader or reset directly to Windows CE NET operating system To execute a cold reset and access the BootLoader menu e Press and hold down the left lt SCAN gt key the BLUE key and the ENTER key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds After a cold reset the BootLoader menu appears Type 1 to continue loading the Windows CE NET operating system Once the operating system loads a cab file containing utilities drivers and software updates is automatically installed and the unit executes a warm start To execute a cold reset and launch the Windows CE NET operating system immediately e Press and hold down the BLUE lt ORANGE gt and ENTER keys for minimum of 6 seconds 32 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual GETTING To Know Your 1535 15303 3 1 Features Of The 7535 aaa aaa 35 3 2 Features Of The 7530 222A 36 3 3 The Battety i 4 orat efc Lo eti re al HR C HR OR TE SORA 37 3 3 1 Battery Safety iu ata xr eu Ie emet aea e 37 3 3 2 Removing And Installing The Battery Pack 37 3 33 Battery Chargers een 38 3 4 Swit
373. s function key lt F22 gt press lt SHIFT gt followed by F2 and so on 6 2 1 2 7530 Function Keys 63 Key Keyboard Function Keys The 7530 63 key keyboard is equipped with thirty function keys Function keys lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt are located in the top two rows of the keyboard and are directly accessible a key combination is not required Function keys lt F11 gt to lt F30 gt are colour coded in blue print above the alpha keys and are accessed using a key combination lt BLUE gt followed by the appropriate alpha key To access function keys lt F11 gt to lt F30 gt e Press the BLUE key followed by the alpha key to which the function key you want to use is mapped For example To access function key lt F11 gt press BLUE lt C gt To access function key lt F12 gt press lt BLUE gt lt D gt and so on 222 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Softkey Function Keys 31 Key Keyboard Function Keys The 37 key keyboard is equipped with twenty function keys Function keys lt F1 gt to lt F4 gt are located across the top of the keyboard and function keys F5 to lt F10 gt are located at the bottom of the keyboard Additional function keys lt F11 gt to F20 are colour coded in orange print above function keys F1 to lt F10 gt To access function keys lt F11 gt to lt F20 gt e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the a
374. s than 1 4mW maxi mum radiant power at a wavelength of 610nm or 680nm This product com ples with CDRH 21 CFR 1040 Class II and IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Class 2 laser product Do Not Operate IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Operating Psion Teklogix equipment where explosive gas is present may result in an explosion Do Not Remove Covers OR OPEN ENCLOSURES To avoid injury the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualified service personnel Do not operate the equipment without the covers and enclosures properly installed To ensure the safety of service personnel the battery pack must be removed before any product cover is removed YA CAUTION Danger of explosion if a 7535 7530 battery is incorrectly handled charged disposed of or replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions described in Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions on page 323 Carefully review all battery safety issues Vorsicut Explosiongefahr bei unsachgem fiem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers XII Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 About This Manual e 3 Text Conventions jo si a RE wo cono ves Y Ug uem mox
375. s that control USB communication are usbstor for commu nication with a device running BooSt and wceusbsh for communication through ActiveSync with a device running Windows CE NET These drivers must be updated with 7535 7530 specific information so that the 7535 7530 can be rec ognized by your PC The install program updates copies of the device installation scripts usbstor inf and wceusbsh inf with Psion Teklogix specific information e sets up a USB connection between the PC and the 7535 7530 and e installs the 7535 7530 as a device on your PC This may require notifying the PC OS that the device should be reinstalled and then reconnecting the USB device D l Launching The Application The log file is initialized and the program introduction is written to it Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual D 1 Appendix D USB Setup Application Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf D 1 2 Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf 1 Welcome Dialog Box You can click on the lt Back gt and lt Next gt buttons to navigate between the pre install windows At any time during the pre installation process you can tap on lt Cancel gt to exit the program E Psion Teklogix USB Setup x am 00 0 a Welcome This program will attempt to configure your computer so that it may connectto a Psion Teklogix device via USB Itis highly recommended that you shut down all applications b
376. s that protect your 7535 7530 from damage The PDM contains reverse polarity and over voltage protection If the DC power jack is wired backwards or exceeds 20VDC the PDM shuts down to protect the 7535 1530 the PDM and the power supply from damage Psion Teklogix does not recommend substituting the DC power supply provided with your PDM The DC power supplied by the PDM is sufficient to operate the 7535 7530 and fast charge its internal battery at the same time The 7535 7530 can run from a PDM without a battery installed Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 337 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Bluetooth Peripherals 7 10 Bluetooth Peripherals If the 7535 7530 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio it is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals including GSM GPRS handsets scanners printers and so on The range of the Bluetooth radio in the 7535 7530 is limited to approximately 5 meters Psion Teklogix provides built in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below e GSM GPRS tri band universal handset Bluetooth printer Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802 11b radios both operate in the 2 4GHz band Although the 7535 7530 includes features to minimize interference performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously Typically when both radios operate in the 7535 7530 at the same time they cannot transmit simultaneously this has a neg
377. s used to select the foreground and background colours used within Tekterm If an unreadable combination is assigned the foreground and background have the same value the foreground colour will be inverted The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black SILA Note The 7535 7530 must be reset press and hold down the lt BLUE gt and lt ENTER gt keys for a minimum of six seconds in order for the new colour assignments to take affect 266 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Applications 6 19 Applications TESS and ANSI applications require unique names so that several different sessions of TESS and ANSI can operate simultaneously 7535 7530s can support up to 8 sessions at one time 03 Applications Range Typel 1 ANSI None ANSI TESS Titlel 1 parts see text Settings 1 gt see text Typel 8 None Titlel 8 Settings 8 gt AN Important These applications will become active only after the changes made in the Application screen are saved by pressing F47 the SAVE key Type And Title Up to eight applications can be entered in this parameter The Type field indicates the type of session you will be running The Title parameter should be completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator e The available options for the Type
378. scard the new value and keep the old Data Squelch value Tap on the X button at the top of the dialog box The old value is sent to the protocol driver 148 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Radio Tab Frequency Table Tap on the Frequency button to display the Frequency Table dialog box o x Ch155 che 10 ch 11 15 ch 16 20 Channel Receive MHz Transmit MHz n 446 837500 446 837500 443 000000 443 000000 451 000000 451 000000 Copy Receive to Transmit Figure 5 71 Frequency Table OD CD LA Tap on the Copy Receive to Transmit button to copy the contents of the Receive fields into the corresponding Transmit fields When you tap on this button a warning box is displayed asking Copy all the Rx frequencies to the Tx frequencies Tap on the Yes button to go ahead or No to stop the copy process Statistics e Tap this button to display communication statistics Refer to Statistics Screen beginning on page 137 for details about this screen Advanced This button launches the Radio Test Application Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 149 Chapter 5 Configuration Scanner Properties Setup 5 10 Scanner Properties Setup The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize
379. se the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than luke warm The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel 1 4 Chargers Initially new batteries that have been fully charged may indicate less than 10096 charge No special conditioning is required The full capacity of the battery will reach 10096 after 5 cycles through the charger It can take from 1 5 to 4 hours to charge a battery The 7535 7530 s intelligent charging system protects the battery from over charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity A Important To preserve battery integrity the charger will proceed with a charge only when the battery temperature falls between 5 C and 39 C 41 F to 102 F If the battery is too hot or cold the battery status LED flashes yellow and the charge is suspended 1 5 Gang Charger The gang charger is designed to charge up to six 7535 7530 Lithium Ion batteries at one time Your charger is shipped with the appropriate IEC mains power cord If the supplied power cord is incorrect for your country contact Psion Teklogix for assistance see Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices LY Note The gang charger is shipped with a user manual It is critical that this s manual be reviewed for additional information and updates 326 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Installation 1 5 1 Inst
380. se them with clean running water and immediately seek medical attention 324 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Important Charger Safety Instructions Do not store the battery in extremely high temperatures e g a vehicle strong direct sunlight etc This may cause the battery to overheat or ignite and it may also reduce the performance and service life of the battery Do not use in areas where static electricity is greater than what the manufacturer guarantees Keep batteries out of reach of children Important Charger Safety Instructions SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for battery chargers Before using the battery charger read all instructions and cautionary markings on 1 battery charger 2 battery and 3 product using battery The mains power cord shall comply with national safety regulations of the country where the equipment is to be sold Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger manufacturer may result in fire electric shock or personal injury To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger pull the plug rather than the cord Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on tripped over or otherwise subjected to damage or stress Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug Replace imm
381. sful 7 8 6 2 1535 7530 LED Does Not Light When Docked e Check that the quad dock has power is the Power LED on the quad dock illuminated e Try inserting the 7535 7530 in another slot in the quad dock e Check for dirt or contamination on the docking contacts at the bottom of the 7535 1530 Wipe the contacts with a damp cloth if necessary e Check the pogo pins inside the dock cradle for dirt Gently wipe with a damp cloth if they appear to be dirty or discoloured e Check that the pogo pins are not bent or damaged Remove and reinsert the 7535 7530 in the cradle and check that the latch is holding the unit in place the pogo pins must be compressed for proper contact Make certain that the battery installed in the 7535 7530 is not defective 1 9 Portable Docking Module PDM Warning The mains power cord for the DC adapter shall comply with national safety regulations of the country where the equipment is to be sold The Portable Docking Module PDM clips onto the base of the 7535 7530 and is most often used to charge the 7535 7530 battery when a desktop charger is not convenient The PDM also offers additional communication ports making it useful for upgrading software in the 7535 7530 from a USB equipped laptop computer Figure 7 2 on page 337 illustrates the connectors on the PDM e Align the pins on the PDM with the connectors on the base of the 7535 7530 e Gently snap the PDM into place on the base of the unit Fi
382. sion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Activating Modifier Keys The lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt and ALT keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded two keys held down simultaneously The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified 3 5 1 1 Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed once it is displayed in lowercase letters in the taskbar at the bottom of the hand held screen For example if the lt CTRL gt key is pressed ctrl key is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen Once the next key is pressed the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar 3 5 1 2 Locking Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on A locked modifier key is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar For example pressing the lt BLUE gt key twice locks it on it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off Once a modifier key is unlocked the uppercase representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed Note The locking function of the lt ORANGE gt and lt BLUE gt keys can be dis abled so that pressing either of these keys once will lock the keys on If you disable the One Sho
383. smitted as part of a certificate The certificate assigned through this icon is used to ensure that the submitted public key is in fact the public key that belongs to the submitter The client checks that the cer tificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the client explicitly trusts Certificate Assignment on page 115 directs you to the appropriate setup information 92 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons 7 PC Connection PC Enables direct connections to a desktop computer Selecting the Change Connection Connection button allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC Nl Teklogix Scanners Teklogix Scanners Provides scanner parameters and the bar code symbologies that the 7535 7530 scanner will successfully read e Network And Dial up Connections bade anc Displays a network window from which the 7535 7530 802 11 radio can be Dune om configured and an existing configuration can be executed Refer to Config uring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit on page 22 for details Y Internet Options Internet Provides options to configure your Internet browser You can determine SES items such as the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet the cache size the Internet connection options and the security level that is applied when browsing T SNMP SNMP SNMP Simple
384. sor Inthe Password field type the Supervisor level password the default password is 123456 Select OK you can now access all menu items in the Start Menu along with the icons in the taskbar Accessing Teklogix Level Security YA Important The Teklogix security level is reserved for authorized Psion Tek logix personnel only Before you can access Teklogix security level you need to set the security level to Supervisor 74 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Security Settings In the Security Level dialog box e Select the Configure button Configure Security OK E3 Show Icons For M Supervisor User _ Allow Teklogix Security Level Figure 4 7 Configuring Security e Select the checkbox next to Allow Teklogix Security Level to enable this option and then select OK Security Level O Teklogix Supervisor User Password Set Password Configure Figure 4 8 Security Levels The Teklogix level security is now available in the Security Level dialog box e Select the radio button next to Teklogix To activate this security level you ll need to enter the appropriate Psion Teklogix level password in the Password field Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 75 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE Security Settings Changing A Password Note Keep in mind that this is the same password
385. splayed in reverse video To increment or decrement a number e Press the RIGHT or lt LEFT gt arrow keys or Type the desired number in the field Negative values are entered by typing a minus sign and then the number e Press ENTER Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it for example a preset range of 1 through 10 If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1 the incorrect value will be rejected the original value for this parameter if any will be displayed 6 10 1 3 Y N Parameters Y N parameters can only be enabled Y or disabled N To enable or disable a Y N parameter e Press the RIGHT or lt LEFT gt arrow key once or Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter Some Y N parameters have sub menus For these parameters a double right arrow appears next to the Y or N 6 10 1 4 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter The allowable values for alpha parameters consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words To cycle through the set e Press the RIGHT or lt LEFT gt arrow keys 6 10 1 5 String Entry Parameters Important For detailed information about using string entry fields to program macro keys refer to Macro Control Panel on page 255 A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter When a string entr
386. ss lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a Atthe TCP gt prompt type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session number you want to close e g Type cl 2 to close session 2 e Press lt ENTER gt Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 239 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Printing A Screen 6 1 5 4 Printing A Screen To print each line of a screen with a CR LF between each line e Press lt CTRL gt and type p The screen will be printed using the port configured as Print 6 1 5 5 Smart Echo Disabling In some circumstances like entering a password you many want to temporarily disable smart echo disguising the characters you type with periods e Press lt CTRL gt lt ALI gt lt P gt and type a period e Type the necessary information using the keyboard and then press lt ENTER gt to return to smart echo mode 6 8 The Radio Statistics Screen A radio statistics screen is automatically created when the Open Tekterm application is launched AN Important Ifyou have a 7530 equipped with a Narrow Band radio refer to Info Tab beginning on page 137 for details about accessing the Narrow Band radio statistics screen To access the 802 11 radios statistics screen you ll need to use the Applications menu to assign a radio title Inthe More Parameters menu choose Applications Inthe Type field choose RadioStats Inthe Title field type a
387. st select 234 CTRLi 230 CTRL I Tab 287 CTRL J Line Feed 287 CTRL K Vertical Tab 267 CTRLL 235 CTRL L Form Feed 281 CTRL p reprint 234 CTRLr 230 CTRL s 233 CTRL s status displaying continuously 234 CTRLt 233 CTRL t status display with unit 234 CTRLu 230 CTRL w 233 CTRL w status display in Lock B amp H mode 234 CTRL Key 42 cursor changing shape of 261 Enh Edit mode 299 field advance tab 229 field backspace 229 field exit 229 Field Order home 229 linefeed mode ANSI 281 moving between fields 280 297 newline mode ANSI 281 Custom Characters 264 cycle tasks 79 D data entering 229 299 Ign Bcode_fld 299 with a bar code reader 323 serial I O 295 Serial In Out 294 transmitting from the terminal 282 298 transmitting from the 7535 229 276 Data Bits 789 190 310 Data Squelch 748 data stream type typ 242 dead zone 362 DEC Cursor Keys 282 decimal values of keys 291 decoded external parameters 188 190 297 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Index V Index decoded internal scanner parameters 162 decoded Intermec ISCP parameters 178 decoded scanners 152 Decode Performance 768 Decode Performance Level 768 decode zones internal scanners 356 decoding bar codes decodes required 153 Security 153 2 D scanner 356 decrementing parameters 245 248 Default All Parameters 740 Default Colour 266 Default font 274 299 DEFAULT key F3 223 DEFLT key F3 249 DEL
388. station before connecting the 7535 7530 via USB For information about the USB application refer to Appendix D USB Setup Application By connecting the 7535 7530 to a PC with a cable and running ActiveSync on the PC you can View 7535 7530 files from Windows Explorer Drag and drop files between the 7535 7530 and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives e Back up 7535 7530 files to the PC then restore them from the PC to the hand held again if needed and so on To install ActiveSync follow the step by step instructions provided with the program s setup wizard Refer to the following website for details http www microsoft com windowsmobile resources downloads pocketpc activesync35 mspx Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 31 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Calibrating The Touchscreen 2 6 Calibrating The Touchscreen EIA Note Keep in mind that all 7530 hand helds are equipped with touchscreens as a standard feature 7535 hand helds can be ordered with or without a touchscreens If your 7535 7530 is equipped with a touchscreen it will need to be calibrated Refer to Calibrating The Touchscreen on page 46 for details 2 1 Resetting The Hand Held Warm Reset To execute a warm reset e Press and hold down the BLUE key and the lt ENTER ON gt key simulta neously for a minimum of six seconds A warm reset closes open applications any unsaved data are lost Installed program
389. t function of either of these keys pressing the lt BLUE gt and or ORANGE key once will lock the key on Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it off Refer to Key board One Shot Modes on page 100 for details 3 5 The Keys The lt SHIFT gt Key The lt SHIFT gt key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and provide access to the symbols above the numeric keys The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow up down left and right The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 41 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Alphanumeric Keyboards 58 Key And 63 Key The lt BKSP DEL gt Key The lt BKSP gt key sometimes referred to as destructive backspace moves the cursor one character to the left erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke The lt DEL gt key lt BLUE gt lt BKSP gt erases the character at the cursor position The lt CTRL gt And lt ALT gt Key The lt CTRL gt and lt ALT gt keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent The lt TAB gt Key Typically the lt TAB gt key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward The lt ESC gt Key Generally this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu dialog box
390. t Prefix Bluetooth Controls 123 ports ANSI Connection Type 270 Baud 310 Buffer 3 Data Bits 3 0 Flow Control 3 0 Input tmo 3 1 internal scanner 352 Output tmo 3 parameters 309 Parity 5 0 peripheral settings 308 Retries 377 Scan See settings 308 serial 294 Serial In Out 294 settings 309 settings Tether Console PR RS232 PR Tether 308 settings Scan See 308 Shared 3 Stop Bits 3 0 TESS Connection Type 287 Test 3 1 port settings 308 311 position of screen 288 Postal PIaNET 185 Index PostNET 185 Royal 185 Power Management Properties 709 battery capacity 110 scheme power saving 110 Power Mgmt 258 Power Off Time 7 47 PowerScan LR and XLR specs 366 PowerScan standard range specs 368 Power Scheme 0 Power Tab Narrow Band radio 146 Power Up Channel 4 power up 7535 20 preferred networks 30 Prefix 7 65 prefix serial I O 295 Prefix Char 55 157 PREVIOUS key F2 223 PREV key F2 244 248 Printer serial service Bluetooth 1 8 printing Binary print parameter 292 pages 234 Printer parameter 292 PrintScreen key 28 procedures local 293 process local 235 293 profile creating backup 130 profile restoring backup 135 Programs Command Prompt 77 Internet Explorer 77 Remote Desktop Connection 77 Windows Explorer 77 protocol 802 1Q v1 253 Protocol Tab Narrow Band radio 144 Protocol Type 254 PR RS232 port settings 308 PR Tether settings 308 punctuation marks accessing SHIFT Key 41 Q memory a
391. t of the expected entry If the entered data does not match the expected format the unit emits a long beep Auto tab Field automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current field is filled Bar code only Field is filled with data from a bar code reader Keyboard entries are not accepted in this type of field Serial I O Field is filled with data coming from a serial port Keyboard input is not accepted in this type of field 228 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 6 6 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys The following keys allow the Psion Teklogix computer to better emulate the functions of a true IBM 5250 terminal L Note These keys are active at all times in TESS applications Key Function Key Sequence Cursor Movement Cursor moves to the first position in the next Field ues os eme input field If already in the last field the cursor T 8 Y moves to the first input field on the screen Cursor moves to the beginning of the current Field Back Post d field If already in the first position the cursor ica 8 P EY moves to beginning of the previous field Current field is cleared from the cursor position Field Exit lt BLUE gt lt P gt to the end of the field and the cursor moves to the End key d next input field BLUE lt N gt Cursor moves to the first input field on the Home Home key screen
392. ta loss 1535 1530 Features Any differences between the 7535 and the 7530 are clearly indicated Rugged design 7530 IP67 rating protects against dust and temporary water immersion drop rating up to 2 meters 6 5 feet onto concrete 7535 IP54 light rain rating sealed from water and dust drop rating up to 2 meters 6 5 feet onto concrete Processor and memory Intel PXA255 400 MHz 32 KB instruction and 32 KB data cache On board RAM 128 MB SDRAM On board ROM 64 MB FLASH 4 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 7535 7530 Features Operating System Windows CE NET Programming environment HTML XML Psion Teklogix Mobile devices SDK for CE NET Java Embedded Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Standard CE NET APIs MFC ATL Wireless communications IEEE 802 11b 11 Mbps 2 4 GHz Compact Flash radio IEEE 802 11g 54 Mbps 2 4 GHz Compact Flash radio future High performance internal antenna GSM GPRS PC Card radio GSM GPRS CF Card radio NextGen Narrow Band 400 500 MHz PC Card radio 7530 only Bluetooth SDIO radio 2 4 GHz 5m range Application software Internet Explorer for CE Open TekTerm ANSI TESS terminal emulations IBM 3270 IBM 5250 HP 2392 Display 320 x 240 1 4 VGA graphic colour TFT 3 5 inch diagonal portrait mode 64K displayable colours Contrast control and automatic backlight Sun
393. taneously for a minimum of six seconds 6 18 2 Displaying The Unicode V Pop up Window The Unicode values you create are stored in a pop up window that you can access from any application To display the pop up window within any application e Press lt CTRL gt ALT lt A gt Unicode characters that cannot be displayed on your screen with the font you are currently using are displayed as rectangles in the pop up window See the sample menu on page 266 However the actual Uni code value you created will be sent to the host Select item with arrow keys Press ENTER when done Press ESC to cancel 0 OOL e Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor on the Unicode value you want to use and press ENTER Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 265 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window To close the pop up menu when you re done e Press the lt ESC gt key Font Override r 04 Font Override gt Font Code 0 is font 18x32 Font Code 1 is font 18x32 Font Code 2 is font 10x26 Font Code 3 is font 18x32 Font Code 4 is font 8x20 This parameter is used to redefine the font to which 5 different font codes refer Default Colours 04 Default Colours Range Foreground Black see text Background White See text Foreground And Background This menu i
394. tate is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent When Function is selected a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box When Macro is selected the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box e Choose Virtual Key Function or Macro e Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box and tap on OK Editing A Scancode Remap To edit a scancode Inthe Scancode Remapping tab tap the stylus on the remap you want to edit e Tap on the Edit button and make the appropriate changes e Tap on OK to save your changes Removing A Remap To delete a remap Inthe Scancode Remapping tab highlight the scancode you want to delete and tap on the Remove button e Tap on OK Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 107 Chapter 5 Configuration Volume And Sound Properties 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties Note The conditions under which hand helds emit sounds are tailored from i within the application installed on your unit Inthe Control Panel choose the Volume amp Sounds icon File View gt Y Regional Remove SNMP Settings Programs o Storage Stylus Systern Manager TH Teklogix Total Recall Scanners TEE Figure 5 16 Choosing The Volume Icon 5 5 3 1 Volume Adjustments amp Sounds Properties ok x Soft Loud Enable sounds for M Events warnings system events M Applications M Noti
395. tes the charging status of the internal battery Warning Applying a voltage above 90VDC or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the cradle power option and will void the product warranty Warning TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK when the powered cradle option is installed always ensure that the rear panel ground lug on the picker cradle is connected to the vehicle chassis Failure to do this could result in serious injury or death The metal chassis of the picker cradle must be connected directly to the chassis of the vehicle A safety ground lug clearly labelled on the rear of the cradle chassis is provided for this purpose The grounding strap must connect from the ground stud on the picker cradle to a solid reliable contact point on the main portion of the vehicle chassis It must not be connected to battery negative or a terminal block Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 341 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle This grounding strap ensures that if there is a fault in the vehicle wiring or in the picker cradle power module the picker cradle cannot be at a hazardous voltage with respect to the vehicle chassis Connection between the picker cradle ground lug and the vehicle chassis should be done with a 16 gauge ground strap ground wire Connect the ground strap to the picker cradle utilizing the ground lug hardware supplied with the picker cradle and a
396. that field n a right justified field the lt DEL gt key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the right most position of that field If the DEL key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message n both left and right justified fields the DEL key erases charac ters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the field The cursor remains in the same position in the field If the DEL key is pressed while cursor is in the right most Replace mode position in the field the 7535 7530 emits a keyboard error beep If the lt DEL gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message n both left and right justified fields the DEL key erases the char acters from one character position to right of the cursor to the end of the field If the DEL key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most Insert mode position in the field the 7535 7530 emits a keyboard error beep If the DEL key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response Field mo
397. the 7535 7530 cursor to create a point the pivot This pivot is mapped to the anchor and whatever is displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan See For example the anchor is chosen as 9 0 whereas 9 is the column and 0 is the line on the Scan See display the offset is chosen as 4 2 the cursor on the 7535 7530 is currently located at 7 5 the pivot would thus be located at 7 4 5 2 or 11 7 and so the area displayed on the Scan See will be 11 9 7 0 to 11 9 9 7 0 1 or 2 7 to 11 8 1 These computations assume that Wraparound described on page 315 is dis abled set to N and that Follow Cursor described on page 315 is enabled set to ey Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 313 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 oo terminal LO am 7 5 5 e H 4 6 n 7 o 2 PN 42 anchor AUD 00 0123456789 9 0 e 9 0 10 M term nal 4 1 11 Scan See Display Terminal Display superimposing the anchor on the pivot 01234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 sdior 0 T 2 3 4 5 e Q4 ARKI 7 8 9 pivot
398. the corresponding key s function Although you can enter up to 9 characters for each softkey label the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 275 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Colour Override L Note Ifyou are using a 7535 equipped with a monochrome display this menu is not available 06 Colour Override Range Foreground Black see text Background White See text Foreground And Background When Colour Override is set to Y the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the ANSI sessions These colour settings will override the Default Colours set from within the View Manager menu Refer to Default Colours on page 266 for details The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black 6 19 1 3 Xmit Modes 05 Xmit Modes Range Xmit Count 99 0 99 Xmit Wait 1 0 999 Dev Attr e 62 1 2 6Cc see text Auto Answer See text 7 bit Y Y N Block Mode see text Xmit Count This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are buffered by the 7535 7530 before being transmitted to the host If 0 zero is selected the hand held transmits only according to the Xmit Wait parameter If the ANSI block mode features are used this parameter should be set to 99 L
399. this feature L Note Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream 290 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tests H Match Chr This parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies hidden field match data from the host Field matching allows the host to pre load data into an entry field that is compared with the user s input The 7535 7530 beeps if the entered data does not match Hidden field matching means that the data to be matched is not displayed in the entry field Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify hidden match field data Enter 0 zero to disable this feature Note Another method of field matching is available directly through the mg TESS data stream Fill Chr This parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character The most commonly used characters are underline Enter 95 period Enter 46 L Note 7535 7530s in some systems may use the space character with the host using reverse video attributes to mark entry fields Upper Case When this parameter is enabled set to Y lowercase input is converted to uppercase 6 19 04 Tests 05 Tests Range AutoRep Fn 7 O 63 AutoRep T O 5 0 255 AutoRep Fn This p
400. tical to the value assigned to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Network Controller Wireless Gateway or Base Station A warm reset of the 7530 is required before this parameter can take effect If Enable Cellular Protocol is disabled unchecked the options in the Cellular Radio Address frame are displayed in grey text indicating that they cannot be accessed Cellular Radio Address Auto Radio Address If Auto radio address is enabled the 7530 requests an automatically assigned radio address Manual radio address is displayed in grey text indicating that it cannot be accessed Manual Radio Address The value entered in the Manual Radio Address parameter is used to identify the 7530 over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each unit This parameter is set to 0 an out of range value by default to block radio communication when the unit is initially powered up This prevents several new hand helds from attempting to communicate with the same default terminal number at initial power up Once the default value is changed it cannot be set back to 0 144 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual o Chapter 5 Configuration Protocol Tab Polling The default values for the Polling parameters are dependent on the value assigned to the Modulation Baud Rate parameter in the Radio tab Modulation Baud Rate Sync Delay Window Delay Poll Timeo
401. tion EAN 13 Variations When using Code 128 you can choose the bar code variation the scanner will recognize The options available are Standard UCC 128 and EAN UCC 128 e Double tap on Variations to display a dialog box listing your options e Tap on a variation to highlight it and then tap on OK If you choose None a check is not executed Standard Enable Standard if Code 128 is desired UCC 128 UCC 128 is a variation of Code 128 EAN UCC 128 To successfully scan this type of bar code EAN UCC 128 must be enabled EAN UCC bar codes include group separators and start codes Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 154 for details 5 1024 EAN 13 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 or off to disable it Include Country If this parameter is enabled the country code is included with the decoded bar code data Include Check If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data 156 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration EAN 13 Addendum AN Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter see page 153 must be enabled An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code This parameter provides three options Disabled Optional and Required Depending on the value chosen for this parameter an addendum is recognized
402. tioning cycles and the 7535 7530 battery system including chargers requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance To maximize the run time of your batteries consider the following 60 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time The display backlight is the largest drain on the battery Try to keep its brightness as low as possible The hand held is event driven that is when the unit is not in use it reverts to sleep mode even when it appears to be running saving battery power Events include a key press touchscreen taps and scan triggers Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unnecessary events and allow the unit to s eep as much as possible The hand held battery is a smart battery with built in intelligence The taskbar battery icon is a linear gauge used to estimate the remaining run time of the battery It is important to note that the battery capacity icon dis plays quarter percentages of nominal capacity the capacity of a new bat tery An aged battery even when fully charged shows somewhat less capacity than nominal Double tapping on the battery icon displays a dialog box that provides detailed information about the battery status and performance If the remaining capacity indication seems inaccurate the battery may need recal ibration Recalibration requires that the battery be fully
403. tranets To reach the website go to www psionteklogix com and click on the appropriate Teknet link on the home page Then click on the Log in button or the Register button depending on whether you have previously registered for Teknet Once you have logged in search for the Support Request Form A 2 Product Repairs International For technical support outside of Canada or the U S A please contact your local Psion Teklogix office listed on our worldwide website http www psionteklogix com Click on the heading labelled Contacts to choose a Psion Teklogix technical support representative closest to you Canada U S A Canadian and U S customers can receive access to repair services by calling the toll free number below or via our secure website see Technical Support above fL Note Customers calling the toll free number should have their Psion Teklogix customer number or trouble ticket number available Voice 1 800 387 8898 press option 2 Fax 1 905 812 6304 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual A 1 A 3 Worldwide Offices COMPANY HEADQUARTERS AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Inc 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Tel 1 905 813 9900 Fax 1 905 812 6300 Email salescdn psion com NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS AND U S SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Corp 1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard Suite 500 Erlanger Kentucky US
404. tus of the battery When 7535 7530 batteries are inserted in the charger the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charge wells in use indicate the status of the charge LED Behaviour Icon Charge Status Off No battery detected in the slot Solid green ONE Battery is fully charged xl Flashing green ei Battery is charged to 75 capacity Solid yellow elu Charge in progress Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 327 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Charging Batteries Battery temperature out of charge range between 5 C Flashi l to 39 C 41 F to 102 F This icon indicates that the dom eo 4 charger is waiting to charge Charging is attempted ye every five minutes until the battery is within the appropriate temperature range Battery rejected at insertion or unable to complete Solidred eu charge on battery Flashing red e m problem Refer to Troubleshooting Table 7 1 Gang Charger Indicators 1 5 4 Charging Batteries e Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger Slide the battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately A solid yellow LED indicates that the battery is being charged If the battery temperature is outside 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F the LED flashes yellow until the te
405. ual 137 Chapter 5 Configuration Info Tab These statistics are updated every second while the dialog box is displayed Statistics xj Protocol Low Level cq100 chi sc 0 a rm 6 xm ir Tu xf ra 0 xi 0 xr pt 0 xe rssi 2667 00035 Zero Statistics Figure 5 62 Protocol Statistics The following table provides a brief description of these statistics Statistic Description Channel quality See the description of the Channel Switch Speed parame cq ter in the channel tab for more information on how cq affects channel switching see Channel Switch Speed on page 141 ch Current channel ES Monitor state of RF Link LOCKED 0 LOCKPENDING 1 LOWC QWAIT 2 SCANNING 3 STARTUP 4 ABANDON 5 rm Number of received messages complete application messages xm Number of transmitted messages complete application messages rf Number of received polls with attached message xf Number of transmitted frames ra Number of received radio link aborts xi Number of transmitted radio link initialization messages rp Number of received polls xr Number of transmitted retries pt Number of poll timeouts xe Number of transmitted errors rssi Received Signal Strength Indicator Table 5 1 Protocol Statistics Descriptions 138 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Info Tab Low Level Screen e Tap on the
406. ues Inthe Unicode Mapping tab highlight the item you want to delete and choose the Remove button 104 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Scancode Remapping 5 5 2 6 Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key a function or a macro Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard A key can be remapped to send a virtual key e g VK F represents the F key VK RETURN represents the lt ENTER ON gt key etc perform a function e g turn the scanner on change volume contrast etc or run a macro There are three different tables of scancode mappings the Normal table the Blue table and the Orange table The Normal table defines unmodified key presses the Blue table defines key presses that occur when the BLUE modifier is on the Orange table defines key presses that occur when the lt ORANGE gt modifier is on The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialog box Keyboard Properties OK 3 Scancode Remapping nn O Normal Orange O Blue Scanc Vkey Function lo Add Remove Edit Remove All o AAO Figure 5 14 Scancode Remapping The first column in the Sca
407. uing on page 292 Although using local procedures eliminates the advantages of an on line 7535 7530 it allows work to continue when the host is unavailable The LOCK B H messages are replaced with NEXT B H in this mode LOCAL MENU Select Host Figure 6 3 Local Menu 6 6 11 Selecting Another Host Computer e Press lt CTRL gt lt H gt or lt F9 gt from the local menu to display a menu of available hosts This menu appears only when more than one host is available Select Host F1 Host 1 F2 Host 2 Figure 6 4 Select Host Screen R Note This feature will not function when the Lcl Process and Queuing E parameters are disabled see Lcl Process Save on Reset on page 293 and Queuing on page 292 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 235 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Queuing Mode 6 6 12 Queuing Mode In some applications queuing mode can decrease the computer lock time In queuing mode the host computer may send several pages to a 7535 7530 without waiting for a response These pages are stored in a queue within the hand held The operator completes the entries on the first page and then presses a function key The 7535 7530 simultaneously transmits to the host and displays the next page in the queue The computer does not lock allowing the operator to enter data on the next page immediately This continues as long as there are pages in the queue Queuing
408. ult mode 258 Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM 279 select host CTRL h 234 selecting ahost 235 Send Mile 293 Send with FKEY 300 serial I O TESS command 294 serial I O fields 228 Serial In 294 Serial IO Character 302 serial number Scan See 316 Serial Out 294 Serial Port 294 serial port enabling pins for printers 292 VO fields 294 Serial In 294 Serial Out 294 Serial Port 294 SICRC 295 SI Fkey 295 SI mode 294 SI prefix suffix 295 SO CRC 296 SO prefix suffix 295 Servers Bluetooth Controls 720 service information 4 Services Bluetooth Controls 118 session status sts 242 Set Length L1 1767 Set Length L2 767 Set Mode SM control 283 Set PIN Bluetooth Controls 7 9 Settings Control Panel 80 Network and Dial up connections 80 Run 80 Taskbar and Start Menu 80 setting the session number 228 SE 1200 Advanced LR specs 355 SE 1200 HP specs 354 SE 1200 LR specs 354 SE 1200 WA specs 357 SE 1224 HP specs 357 SE 1524 ER specs 360 SE 2223 PDF specs 355 xviii Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual SE923HS 357 Shared 3 1 Shared Mode network authentication 26 SHIFT Key 41 Short Code 153 Shutdown Bootloader 82 Cold Reset 82 Suspend 82 Warm Reset 82 Shutdown Start Menu 7 SICRC 295 SI Fkey 295 signal quality narrow band 52 signal quality 802 11 57 SI mode 294 Simple Network Management SNMP See SNMP 194 SIP Soft Input Panel 93 SI prefix suffix 295 size of fields 154 Size Chars bar code scanni
409. unction keys are accessed by pressing BLUE F5 and F6 On 36 key and 37 key keyboards the volume function keys are accessed by pressing BLUE lt F3 and lt F4 gt To adjust the beeper volume e Press the BLUE key twice to lock the key on and then press the increase volume function key or the decrease volume lt function key until the volume meets your requirements Remember to press the lt BLUE gt key again to turn it off 3 8 Internal Scanners AN Important For detailed scanner specifications and decode zone tables refer to Internal Scanner Specifications beginning on page 353 The 7535 and 7530 support a wide range of scanner options to address a variety of user application requirements The scanner installed in your unit can be configured using the Scanner Properties dialog box in the Control Panel External non decoded scanners are also configured through the Control Panel Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 53 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 7535 7530 Internal Scanners However external decoded scanners must be configured by scanning special configura tion bar codes In these cases the scanner manufacturer provides programming manuals for configuration purposes For Symbol decoded scanners refer to the appropriate programming guide e P300 LS3408 For Symbol non decoded scanners refer to the L 3200 Programming Guide For Power Scan PSC d
410. ut 4 Level 19200 17 20 20 4 Level 9600 17 23 25 2 Level 9600 17 19 22 2 Level 4800 25 23 37 Table 5 3 Polling Parameters Sync Delay Warning This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing The Sync Delay parameter specifies the delay between the base station transmission and the first response window measured in milliseconds The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other hand helds and base stations in the system The allowable range for this parameter is between 1 and 40 Window Delay AN Important The value assigned to this parameter should not be changed from the factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol This parameter specifies the amount of time in milliseconds the 7530 should add to each response window in order to accommodate the receive transmit switching characteristics of the radio The value assigned must be compatible with other units and base stations in the system The default setting of 19 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio operating at 9600 baud Poll Timeout This parameter in units of 16 6 ms sets the time out value used for automatic channel switching Poll Timeout is the time during which the 7530 should detect at least one poll from a base station As each Poll Timeout passes without a successful poll
411. vation of the release knobs Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location 1 1 1 1 Mounting Template The picker cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill template 1 1 2 Wiring Guidelines Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices consider the following Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 339 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Using The Picker Cradle e Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal Use plastic straps and tie downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled e Keep cables away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards e Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle 1 1 3 Using The Picker Cradle If your 7535 7530 is equipped with a shoulder strap or cover these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a picker cradle There is no need to remove handstraps pistol grips or tethered devices from the unit e Slide the 7535 7530 into the cradle and press firmly downward until it locks into place On a vehi
412. wer Properties Battery schemes Suspend Thres Main battery ES Good 9696 COLL Remaining Power 1986 mAh Full Capacity 2073 mAh Time To Empty 13h 35 min Operating Time 13 h 34 min Voltage 122V Current 117 m Temperature 256 Chemistry Li Ion Cycle Count D Serial Number 2008000001 Manufacturer PSION o MA Ol Figure 6 9 Power Properties Dialog Box AN Important Refer to Power Management Properties on page 109 for details about this dialog box 6 16 4 User Permissions p 04 User Permissions Range Screen Switch Y Y N Font Change Y Y N Exit N Y N At User security level the operator is restricted to a small group of parameters AN Important Only Supervisor and Teklogix level passwords can change the values of the User options Screen Switch When set to Y the operator can use the Split screen parameter to toggle between screens when multiple applications are running on the 7535 7530 Refer to Split Screen on page 261 for details about using this function 258 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Windows Properties Font Change When Font Change is set to Y operators at the User level can change the font size of their 7535 7530s Pressing lt CTRL gt ALT lt F gt cycles through the available fonts Exit If this parameter is set to Y an operator with user leve
413. which you can choose one of the following scanning modes Smart Raster Always Raster Programmable Raster Slab Pattern Cyclone Pattern or Semi Omni Pattern 2D Raster Height And 2D Raster Expand Rate These parameter determine the laser pattern s height and rate of expansion 164 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Data Options Decoded Internal Scanner Note These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or Always Raster is assigned to the 2D Scanning Mode parameter 2D Raster Height and 2D Raster Expand Rate are intended for very specific applications and are usually not required for normal scanning purposes Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 15 5 10 3 2 Data Options Decoded Internal Scanner Transmit Code ID Char A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type In addition to any single character prefix already selected the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code None AIM or Symbol Scan Data Format This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format Double tapping on Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format data as is data lt S1 gt data lt S2 gt data
414. while typing the decimal value that represents the Unicode 1M character you want to use However you will need to press ALT and retype the decimal value each time you want to use the special character The advantage to creating special characters using the Custom Chars parameters is that the characters you create in the customer characters table are saved in a pop up window that is accessible from any application e Inthe Parameters menu highlight View Manager and press lt F1 gt e Highlight Custom Chars and press F1 to display the custom characters table 04 Custom Chars E Font Small U 0000 U 0000 Position the cursor on the Fonts at the top of the table 264 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window Press the LEFT or lt RIGHT gt arrow keys until the character set you want to use is displayed You can create up to 20 Unicode characters in the custom characters table To create a Unicode value Replace the 0000 value with a hex value that represents the Unicode character you want to use Press the lt DOWN gt arrow key to accept the value and move the cursor to the next field When you have finished creating the Unicode characters you want to use e Press F4 to save your changes e Reset the 7535 7530 press and hold down the ENTER and lt BLUE gt key simul
415. x should normally be unchecked In one particular use case manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic configuration If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device each SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile automatic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured profile for each SIM card For this to work each profile must be configured while the corresponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized i e the status is at least SIM is ready The Select profile drop down list in the data configuration profile selects to which profile a subsequent action applies A profile named Default is always present and contains the current parameters from the database The following actions are available Show The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap the stylus on this button For the Default profile the publicly known password is shown otherwise the password is hidden Edit The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile Delete The selected profile is deleted You cannot delete the Default profile 210 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Data Connection Configuration New Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile New
416. xternal decoded scanners must be configured by scanning special configuration bar codes In these cases the scanner manufacturer provides programming manuals for configuration purposes e For Symbol decoded scanners refer to the appropriate programming guide e p300 or e LS3408 For Symbol non decoded scanners refer to e LS3200 Programming Guide For Power Scan PSC decoded and non decoded scanners refer to e Powerscan Programing Guide PSC Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 151 Chapter 5 Configuration Non Decoded Scanners 5 10 2 Non Decoded Scanners Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E Codabar disabled Code 93 disabled Code 11 disabled E Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled i To change a setting press space right arrow or double click 20 AO Figure 5 74 Non Decoded Scanner Options Tap on the Scanner dropdown menu and choose Non decoded All the available bar code symbologies for this type of scanner can be selected in this tab A plus sign to the left of the menu item indicates that a sub menu of parameters is attached Tap the stylus on the sign to display the sub menu e To change a parameter value double tap on the parameter If you need to type a value a dialog box is displayed in which you can type a new value If you need to change a yes or no value double tapping on the parameter toggles between yes and no If y
417. y MDC and its suppliers specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities You agree that MDC and its suppliers will not be liable for any claims or damages aris ing from the use of the Software in such applications Ownership The Software is licensed not sold The Software is owned and copyrighted by MDC or its third party suppliers Your license confers no title or ownership in the Software and is not a sale of any rights in the Software You acknowledge such ownership and intellectual property rights and will not take any action to jeopardize limit or interfere in any manner with MDC s or its suppliers ownership of or rights with respect to the Software The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and by international treaties MDC s third party suppliers may protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms Termination Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from MDC if you fail to comply with any term s of this License Upon termination you must immediately destroy the Soft ware together with all copies adaptations and merged portions in any form U S Government Restricted Rights The Software and documentation have been developed entirely at private expense and are provided as Commercial Computer Software or restricted computer software They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer s
418. y UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No950 LVD EN60950 EMC FCC Part 15 Class B EMC Directive Class B 370 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications 7535 1900 mAh Lithium lon Battery Pack 8 12 7535 1900 mAh Lithium lon Battery Pack Technology Operating Temperature Charge Temperature Storage Temperature Charge Cycles Charge Time Voltage Cell Configuration Capacity Supported Chargers Lithium Ion Li Ion 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 C Storage at elevated temperatures is not recommended Minimum of 300 charge cycles with no deg radation below 70 of nominal capacity Charge time is typically 1 5 hours 7 4 V nominal 6V min to 8 4V max 2 series connected cells 1800 mAh nominal at 300mA discharge 20 C to 6 0V minimum 6 Gang Charger Combo Charger Combo Docking Station Quad Docking Station 8 13 7530 1900 mAh Lithium lon Battery Pack Technology Capacity Charge Temperature Discharge Temperature Storage Temperature Charge Cycles Voltage Cell Configuration Cell Type Max Charge Voltage Charge Time Lithium Ion Li Ion 1900 mAh nominal at 300mA discharge 20 C to 8 5V minimum 1400 mAh nominal at 300mA discharge at 20 C to 8 25V 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 C 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 C Storage at elevated temperatures not recom mended
419. y snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the inserts on the back of the 7535 align with the holes in the pistol grip e Using a Phillips screwdriver securely fasten the pistol grip to the back of the 7535 Tighten the screws to a torque of 3kgf cm 3 Ibs in or until finger tight to secure the pistol grip in place B 2 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix B RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only Installation Attaching The RD7950 e Push the plug through the pistol grip with the hole in the plug towards the front e Attach the RD7950 to the 7535 securing it to the unit with the screws provided Thread the long screw through the pistol grip Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual B 3 Appendix B RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only Installation e Plug the RD7950 into the tether port B 4 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Appendix B RD7950 Integrated UHF RFID Reader 7535 Only Enabling The RD7950 D Enabling The RD7950 In the 7535 when the trigger source is selected for RFID usage pressing the trigger causes a Scanning icon to appear on the hand held screen While this icon is dis played the RD7950 is powered on and is actively probing for RFID tags Scanning When the trigger is released the im
420. y parameter contains data it is displayed in reverse video Empty fields Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 245 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application String Entry Parameters are not displayed in reverse video The methods that can be used to enter information in string entry parameters are described in this section In string entry parameters the lt UP gt arrow DOWN arrow ENTER and lt BKSP gt keys have the following functions The UP and lt DOWN gt arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields in the direction of the arrow e lt ENTER gt completes the entry field e lt BKSP gt deletes the character to the left of the cursor e lt DEL gt key combination BLUE lt BKSP gt clears the entire field Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys AN Important Make sure the lt CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt keys are turned off By pressing either the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key you can cycle through a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow to display the next character in this sequence and the lt LEFT gt arrow to display the previous one Adding Additional ASCII Characters When you ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character Normally pressing the lt RIGHT gt arrow key moves the cursor to the right but in a string
421. ying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Windows CE NET logo appears When Windows CE has successfully loaded the startup desktop is displayed Note The screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end This is part of the normal Windows CE NET cold boot process The desktop is displayed afier a few moments Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit 2 3 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio In The Unit The most common 802 11b settings are configured as defaults However there are some fields that must be completed including the SSID of your access point and the security methods implemented in the network including access keys AN Important Ifthe 7535 7530 is equipped with a radio that has never been con figured the radio settings dialog box opens automatically when the unit is powered on In this case skip to Step 4 on page 24 To configure the 802 11b radio 1 Tap on the Start button in the taskbar and tap on Settings Network and Dial up Connections If you re using the keyboard press lt BLUE gt 0 to display the Start Menu Use the lt DOWN gt arrow key to highlight Settings Press the RIGHT arrow key to display the sub menu Highlight Network and press ENTER E My Internet Computer Explorer mos PES 7 Programs hy Shortcuts gt fie AE E us Settings gt amp Contr
422. ys a pop up window in which you can choose the appropriate Parity Figure 5 82 Parity Settings Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 1 5 or 2 used for asynchro nous communication Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual 189 Chapter 5 Configuration Console Port 5 10 6 2 Console Port Scanner Settings LOK x Barcodes Options Translations Scanner Decoded external y Console Port Enabled off Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 To change a setting press space right arrow or double click 9 250 Figure 5 83 Console Port Settings Enabled This parameter must be set to on in order for the 7535 7530 to recognize the device connected to the console port Baud Refer to page 189 for details Data Bits Refer to page 189 for details about this parameter Parity For details refer to page 189 Stop Bits Refer to page 189 for details about Stop Bits 190 Psion Teklogix 7535 7530 Hand Held Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Options Tab 5 10 1 Options Tab This tab allows you to tailor the double click parameters and the display options associated with your scanner Scanner Properties foxy x Barcodes Options Translations Internal scanner Non decoded Click Time 250 msec Click Data O E Display Scan Result on Scan Indicator on Scan Result Time O s

$" " $" ءAfyi Apwiء 6€xپ&dagger;…p&fnof; - Southern Graphics & Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

$&quot; &quot; $&quot; ءAfyi Apwiء 6&euro;xپ&dagger;&hellip;p&fnof; - Southern Graphics &amp; Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

$" " $" ءAfyi Apwiء 6€xپ&dagger;…p&fnof; - Southern Graphics & Systems